d-lab.1 family Repair - Saal Digital Fotoservice GmbH

Service Instructions 

Digital Minilab 

d-lab.1 family 

Repair 

Order number DD+18070022D0 

Edition 2005-05-01 

Version English, 03002_05

List of Chapters 

Edition 

Chapter 

Contents..................................................................2005-05-01 ...................0 

General ....................................................................2005-05-01 ...................1 

Basic Machine.......................................................2005-05-01 ...................2 

Software ..................................................................2005-05-01 ...................3 

Service / Diagnosis.............................................2005-05-01 ...................4 

Power Supply.........................................................2005-05-01 ...................5 

Computer System ................................................2005-05-01 ...................6 

Film Processor.......................................................2005-05-01 ...................7 

Scanner....................................................................2005-05-01 ...................8 

Printer ......................................................................2005-05-01 ...................9 

Paper Processor....................................................2005-05-01 ................10 

Maintenance..........................................................2005-05-01 ................11 

Index.........................................................................2005-05-01 ................12 

Preinstallation / Installation...........................2005-05-01 ................13

Modification History 

Version Edition Modifications 

03002_00 2004-01-02 Start Version 

03002_01 2004-04-01 Update 

03002_02 2004-06-01 Four Machine Variants 

New Software Version 

03002_03 2004-07-30 Modified Maintenance Kit (yearly) 

New Maintenance Kit (every second year) 

Updated chapters do to new software versions 8.00x 

03002_04 2004-12-15 Updated chapters due to new software versions 9.00x 

03002_05 2005-05-01 Twelve Machine Variants 

Published in compliance with EN 55022 (valid in EU): 

Warning! 

The equipment complies with the limits for a Class A device. Operation of the equipment 

in residential areas may cause radio interference in which case the user at his own 

expense will be requested to take whatever measures may be required to correct the 

interference. 

© 2005 AgfaPhoto GmbH. All rights reserved. 

No part of these instructions may be reproduced, copied, or transmitted in any form or by 

any means without prior written permission by AgfaPhoto GmbH. 

AgfaPhoto is used under license of Agfa-Gevaert AG.

d-lab.1 family: Repair 

Contents 

Contents 

1 General .............................................................................................................................1-1 

1.1 Available Documentation...........................................................................................................................................1-1 

1.2 Repair.................................................................................................................................................................................1-1 

1.2.1 Guideline for the Technician.................................................................................................................1-2 

1.2.2 Means of Representation........................................................................................................................1-3 

1.2.2.1 Text Styles and Symbols...............................................................................................1-3 

1.2.2.2 Safety Notes......................................................................................................................1-3 

1.3 Machine ............................................................................................................................................................................1-4 

1.3.1 Standards and Rules.................................................................................................................................1-4 

1.3.2 CE Symbol ....................................................................................................................................................1-4 

1.3.3 Use ..................................................................................................................................................................1-5 

1.3.3.1 Purpose................................................................................................................................1-5 

1.3.3.2 Appropriate Use................................................................................................................1-5 

1.3.3.3 Inappropriate Use............................................................................................................1-5 

1.4 Manufacturer...................................................................................................................................................................1-6 

1.4.1 Warranty........................................................................................................................................................1-6 

1.4.2 Exclusion of Liability.................................................................................................................................1-6 

1.4.3 Manufacturer Information ......................................................................................................................1-6 

1.5 Legal Situation ...............................................................................................................................................................1-7 

1.5.1 Safety Notes ................................................................................................................................................1-7 

1.5.1.1 Terms for Users.................................................................................................................1-7 

1.5.1.2 General................................................................................................................................1-8 

1.5.1.3 Installation.........................................................................................................................1-8 

1.5.1.4 Transport.............................................................................................................................1-8 

1.5.1.5 Operation............................................................................................................................1-9 

1.5.1.6 Service / Repairs ..........................................................................................................1-10 

1.5.1.7 Warnings and Information Labels on the Machine .........................................1-11 

1.6 Handling of Processing Chemicals......................................................................................................................1-14 

1.6.1 Safety Instructions .................................................................................................................................1-14 

2 Basic Machines..................................................................................................................2-1 

2.1 Versions.............................................................................................................................................................................2-1 

2.2 Versions (Illustrations).................................................................................................................................................2-1 

2.2.1 d-lab.1 with Film Processor ...................................................................................................................2-1 

2.2.2 d-lab.1s..........................................................................................................................................................2-2 

2.2.3 netlab.1 .........................................................................................................................................................2-3 

2.2.4 Overview (Table).........................................................................................................................................2-4 

2.3 Complete Machine .......................................................................................................................................................2-5 

2.3.1 Main Components.....................................................................................................................................2-5 

2.3.2 Components ................................................................................................................................................2-7 

2.4 List of Machine Parts ...................................................................................................................................................2-8 

3 Software............................................................................................................................3-1 

3.1 Software installation....................................................................................................................................................3-1 

3.1.1 Save customer settings and data base..............................................................................................3-1 

3.1.2 Installation of the Operating System MPU......................................................................................3-2 

3.1.3 First Installation of the d-lab.1 Main Software...............................................................................3-4 

3.1.4 Update of the Operating System MPU ..............................................................................................3-9 

3.2 Error Messages ............................................................................................................................................................3-12 

3.2.1 Film Processor (FP), only d-lab.1with Film Processor ...............................................................3-13 

3.2.2 Scanner (SC) .............................................................................................................................................3-24 

3.2.3 Print Engine (PE) / Exposure Controller (EC)................................................................................3-37 

3.2.4 Paper Advance (PA)................................................................................................................................3-42 

3.2.5 Paper Processor (PP)..............................................................................................................................3-45 

3.2.6 Timer (TI) ....................................................................................................................................................3-55 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 0-i

Contents 


3.2.7 Messages (Custom Errors) ................................................................................................................... 3-56 

3.2.7.1 Film Prozessor (FP), only d-lab.1 allrounder....................................................... 3-56 

3.2.7.2 Scanner (SC)...................................................................................................................3-56 

3.2.7.3 Exposure Controller (EC)............................................................................................ 3-56 

3.2.7.4 Paper Advance (PA) ..................................................................................................... 3-57 

3.2.7.5 Paper Processor (PP) ................................................................................................... 3-57 

3.2.7.6 IP / IPP............................................................................................................................. 3-58 

3.2.7.7 Software........................................................................................................................... 3-60 

3.2.7.8 Timer................................................................................................................................. 3-61 

3.2.8 Messages (Custom Info)....................................................................................................................... 3-62 

3.3 Production Statistics (Clickrate)........................................................................................................................... 3-65 

3.3.1 Recorded Data ......................................................................................................................................... 3-65 

3.3.2 Type of Saving ......................................................................................................................................... 3-65 

3.3.3 Export of Data .......................................................................................................................................... 3-65 

3.3.4 Fetching Data........................................................................................................................................... 3-66 

3.3.5 Installation and Deinstallation of the Software Clickrate ...................................................... 3-66 

3.3.6 Additional Tools supplied by AgfaPhoto........................................................................................ 3-66 

3.3.6.1 ClickrateReport.mdb ................................................................................................... 3-66 

3.3.6.2 ClickrateChecker.exe .................................................................................................. 3-66 

4 Service / Diagnosis............................................................................................................ 4-1 

4.1 Scripts................................................................................................................................................................................4-1 

4.1.1 Overview of the Script Folder ...............................................................................................................4-1 

4.2 Scripts for Service (Folder).........................................................................................................................................4-2 

4.2.1 Exposure Controller ..................................................................................................................................4-2 

4.2.2 Film Processor ............................................................................................................................................4-4 

4.2.3 General..........................................................................................................................................................4-6 

4.2.4 Initialization ................................................................................................................................................4-7 

4.2.5 Paper Advance (Paper Drive).................................................................................................................4-8 

4.2.6 Paper Processor....................................................................................................................................... 4-12 

4.2.7 Scanner ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-15 

4.2.8 Setup........................................................................................................................................................... 4-20 

4.3 Passwords...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-22 

4.4 Remote Diagnosis via Modem.............................................................................................................................. 4-23 

4.4.1 Netsupport Manager for the d-lab ................................................................................................... 4-24 

4.4.1.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................................4-24 

4.4.1.2 Setup in the d-lab ........................................................................................................ 4-24 

4.4.1.3 Deactivate Timer Card Watchdog ON for Remote Access via Modem.... 4-29 

4.5 Log Views and Log Levels....................................................................................................................................... 4-30 

4.6 Watchdog...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-32 

4.6.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 4-32 

4.6.2 Operation and User Interface............................................................................................................. 4-32 

4.6.2.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................... 4-32 

4.6.2.2 Startup screen ............................................................................................................... 4-33 

4.6.2.3 Standard operator interface...................................................................................... 4-36 

4.6.3 Extended operator interface............................................................................................................... 4-37 

4.6.4 Keyboard Hooks ...................................................................................................................................... 4-39 

4.6.5 System Logbook...................................................................................................................................... 4-40 

4.6.5.1 Change of Log settings during operation............................................................ 4-41 

4.6.5.2 Browsing through the Logbook............................................................................... 4-41 

4.6.5.3 Overview of the existing filter functions............................................................. 4-42 

4.6.5.4 Display of the software versions ............................................................................ 4-43 

4.6.5.5 Registration codes....................................................................................................... 4-44 

4.6.6 Structure of the Software .................................................................................................................... 4-47 

4.6.6.1 Interface interprocess communication................................................................ 4-48 

4.6.6.2 Interface to the Timer card....................................................................................... 4-49 

0-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Contents 

4.6.7 Sequence diagram..................................................................................................................................4-50 

4.6.7.1 d-lab.1 startup ...............................................................................................................4-50 

4.6.7.2 Watch function..............................................................................................................4-50 

4.6.7.3 d-lab.1 Shutdown .........................................................................................................4-51 

4.7 MC Data.........................................................................................................................................................................4-53 

4.7.1 Modify and save MC Data ...................................................................................................................4-53 

4.7.2 FP MC Data Lists (only d-lab.1 allrounder)..................................................................................4-54 

4.7.3 PA MC Data List ......................................................................................................................................4-57 

4.7.4 PP MC Data List ......................................................................................................................................4-59 

5 Power Supply Units and PCBs .............................................................................................5-1 

5.1 Power Supply Units – Overview ..............................................................................................................................5-1 

5.2 Power Supply System..................................................................................................................................................5-2 

5.2.1 Power ON Sequence.................................................................................................................................5-2 

5.3 Main Power Supply.......................................................................................................................................................5-4 

5.3.1 Components of the Main Power Supply ...........................................................................................5-6 

5.3.2 Connections – Overview.........................................................................................................................5-7 

5.3.3 Fuses...............................................................................................................................................................5-8 

5.3.3.1 Fuses on AC Main Power Supply...............................................................................5-8 

5.3.3.2 Fuses on 90A-FUS............................................................................................................5-8 

5.3.3.3 Fuses on 90A-LPS............................................................................................................5-8 

5.3.4 Command of the Power Supply Units................................................................................................5-9 

5.3.4.1 Connection diagram: Activation of Power Supply PS1..................................5-10 



5.3.5 PCB 90A-LPS ............................................................................................................................................5-12 

5.3.6 Adjustment of the Power Supply Units ..........................................................................................5-13 

5.3.7 Connection diagrams: Pilot voltages..............................................................................................5-14 

5.3.7.1 Connection diagram +8V (PL) pilot voltage.......................................................5-14 

5.3.7.2 Connection diagram +24V (PL) pilot voltage ....................................................5-14 

5.3.8 Connection diagrams: Power Supply Units Paper Advance (PA) and 

Paper Processor (PP)..............................................................................................................................5-15 

5.3.8.1 Connection diagram +5V (CD) voltage ................................................................5-15 

5.3.8.2 Connection diagram +36V (PB) voltage..............................................................5-15 

5.3.8.3 Connection diagram +24V (PC) voltage..............................................................5-16 

5.3.8.4 Connection diagram +24V (PA) voltage..............................................................5-16 

5.3.9 Connection diagrams: Power Supply Units Scanner (SC), Print Engine (PE) 

and Densitometer...................................................................................................................................5-17 

5.3.9.1 Connection diagram +6.5V (AD) voltage.............................................................5-17 

5.3.9.2 Connection diagram –15V (AA) voltage..............................................................5-18 

5.3.9.3 Connection diagram +18V (AA) voltage..............................................................5-18 

5.3.9.4 Connection diagram +24V (FD) voltage ..............................................................5-19 

5.4 Film Processor Power Supply (only d-lab.1 with Film Processor) ............................................................5-20 

5.4.1 Components of the Film Processor Power Supply.....................................................................5-21 

5.4.2 Connections – Overview......................................................................................................................5-21 

5.4.3 Fuses............................................................................................................................................................5-22 

5.4.3.1 Fuses on 90P-SSR.........................................................................................................5-22 

5.4.4 Command of the Film Processor Power Supply Unit ................................................................5-22 

5.5 PCBs ................................................................................................................................................................................5-23 

5.5.1 Functions of the most important PCBs ..........................................................................................5-23 

5.5.2 Diagram: PCBs of the Paper Processor (PP), Paper Advance (PA) and Film 

Processor (FP)...........................................................................................................................................5-24 

5.5.3 Functions: LEDs and DIP Switches of the CPU PCBs ................................................................5-25 

5.5.3.1 LEDs...................................................................................................................................5-25 

5.5.3.2 DIP Switches..................................................................................................................5-25 

5.5.3.3 Replacing CPU PCBs ...................................................................................................5-26 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 0-iii

Contents 


6 Computer System .............................................................................................................. 6-1 

6.1 Version dependent Computer Systems ................................................................................................................6-1 

6.2 General Data...................................................................................................................................................................6-2 

6.2.1 Room conditions........................................................................................................................................6-2 

6.2.2 Power distribution and power supply of the components.........................................................6-2 

6.2.3 Power distribution and power supply of the components.........................................................6-2 

6.2.4 Network settings .......................................................................................................................................6-3 

6.2.5 Settings and Registry entries................................................................................................................6-3 

6.2.6 Product Security and Certificates........................................................................................................6-4 

6.3 Functional Description of the Main Processor Unit (MPU)............................................................................6-5 

6.3.1 Signal Diagram MPU................................................................................................................................6-6 

6.3.2 ON / OFF and Reset of the Computer System ...............................................................................6-8 

6.3.3 Interfaces / Connections........................................................................................................................6-9 

6.3.3.1 Serial Interfaces / 4-fach SIO (RS232)................................................................. 6-11 

6.3.4 Drives.......................................................................................................................................................... 6-12 

6.3.4.1 Dismounting the MPU drive..................................................................................... 6-12 

6.3.4.2 Jumper settings of the drive .................................................................................... 6-12 

6.3.5 Graphic card ............................................................................................................................................. 6-12 

6.3.6 Ethernet cards.......................................................................................................................................... 6-12 

6.3.7 Drive Module............................................................................................................................................ 6-13 

6.3.7.1 Power Supply for Drive Module.............................................................................. 6-13 

6.3.7.2 Card Reader (optional)................................................................................................ 6-14 

6.3.8 MPU Mainboard ...................................................................................................................................... 6-14 

6.3.8.1 MPU Mainboard connections .................................................................................. 6-15 

6.3.9 Operating System................................................................................................................................... 6-16 

6.3.10 Bios Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 6-16 

6.3.11 Touch Screen calibration..................................................................................................................... 6-22 

6.4 Functional Description of the Image Processor System (IPU)................................................................... 6-23 

6.4.1 Signal Diagram IPU ............................................................................................................................... 6-23 

6.4.2 Interfaces / Connections..................................................................................................................... 6-24 

6.4.2.1 Serial interface Timer board..................................................................................... 6-25 

6.4.3 Drives.......................................................................................................................................................... 6-28 

6.4.3.1 Dismounting the IPU drives..................................................................................... 6-28 

6.4.3.2 Jumper settings on the drives................................................................................. 6-28 

6.4.4 Graphic Card............................................................................................................................................. 6-29 

6.4.5 LVDS Card.................................................................................................................................................. 6-29 

6.4.6 Ethernet Card ........................................................................................................................................... 6-29 

6.4.7 IPU Mainboard......................................................................................................................................... 6-30 

6.4.7.1 IP Mainboard connections........................................................................................ 6-30 

6.4.8 Operating System................................................................................................................................... 6-31 

6.4.9 Bios Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 6-31 

6.5 Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................................................................... 6-36 

6.5.1 IPU does not start................................................................................................................................... 6-36 

6.5.1.1 Startup sequence of Computer system................................................................ 6-36 

6.5.1.2 Particularities during IPU software installation................................................ 6-38 

6.5.1.3 IP function test ............................................................................................................. 6-38 

6.5.1.4 Possible failures during IPU startup or operation ............................................ 6-41 

6.5.1.5 Possible failures during IPU startup...................................................................... 6-42 

6.5.1.6 Forced software installation of IPU ....................................................................... 6-44 

6.5.1.7 Manual start of IPU or MPU ..................................................................................... 6-45 

6.5.1.8 Connection diagram: Computer System ............................................................. 6-46 

6.5.1.9 Computer System Startup timing chart............................................................... 6-47 

6.6 Tools for Computer System Check ...................................................................................................................... 6-48 

6.6.1 COMTool .................................................................................................................................................... 6-48 

6.6.2 Drives.......................................................................................................................................................... 6-50 

6.6.3 LAN Test..................................................................................................................................................... 6-51 

0-iv 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Contents 

6.6.4 PuTTY...........................................................................................................................................................6-52 

6.6.5 Flash MPU with current BIOS and current settings...................................................................6-53 

6.6.6 Flash IPU with current BIOS and current settings......................................................................6-54 

6.6.7 HGST DFT Drive Fitness Test...............................................................................................................6-55 

6.6.8 Description of DFT Codes ....................................................................................................................6-67 

6.6.9 HGST Drive Feature Tool ......................................................................................................................6-68 

6.7 Maxtor Power Max Drivetest..................................................................................................................................6-71 

6.7.1 Memorytest...............................................................................................................................................6-71 

6.7.2 Boot OS for advanced tests.................................................................................................................6-72 

6.7.2.1 IntelPro DiagnosticTool .............................................................................................6-73 

6.8 Dismount the Computer System..........................................................................................................................6-78 

6.9 Installation of the Card Reader.............................................................................................................................6-79 

6.9.1 Hardware Installation............................................................................................................................6-80 

7 Film Processor ...................................................................................................................7-1 

7.1 Functional description.................................................................................................................................................7-1 

7.2 Assembly Groups in the Film Processor ...............................................................................................................7-1 

7.2.1 Location.........................................................................................................................................................7-1 

7.2.2 Designation and shortcuts .....................................................................................................................7-1 

7.3 Actuators and Sensors in the Film Processor .....................................................................................................7-2 

7.3.1 Designation and Shortcuts.....................................................................................................................7-3 

7.3.2 Funktion of the parts................................................................................................................................7-3 

7.3.3 Actuators and Sensors List.....................................................................................................................7-4 

7.4 Components of the Film Processor.........................................................................................................................7-9 

7.4.1 Main Drive....................................................................................................................................................7-9 

7.4.1.1 Checking the main drive ..............................................................................................7-9 

7.4.1.2 Replacing the main drive motor................................................................................7-9 

7.4.1.3 Lubricating the chains and sprocket gears.........................................................7-10 

7.4.2 Gear for Frequency Adjustment.........................................................................................................7-10 

7.4.2.1 Replacing the Gear 50 / 60 Hz...............................................................................7-10 

7.4.3 Loading Unit .............................................................................................................................................7-11 

7.4.3.1 Sensors.............................................................................................................................7-11 

7.4.3.2 Actuators..........................................................................................................................7-12 

7.4.4 Leader Cutter............................................................................................................................................7-13 

7.4.4.1 Function...........................................................................................................................7-13 

7.4.4.2 Actuators and Sensors................................................................................................7-13 

7.4.4.3 Motor positions (half steps)......................................................................................7-14 

7.4.5 Processing Racks ....................................................................................................................................7-15 

7.4.5.1 Replacing parts .............................................................................................................7-15 

7.4.6 Docking ......................................................................................................................................................7-17 

7.4.6.1 Actuators and Sensors................................................................................................7-18 


7.4.7 Replenisher tanks...................................................................................................................................7-25 


7.4.8 Effluent tanks...........................................................................................................................................7-26 

7.4.8.1 Checking parts...............................................................................................................7-26 

8 Scanner .............................................................................................................................8-1 

8.1 Designation of Assembly Groups and Shortcuts ...............................................................................................8-1 

8.2 Actuators and Sensors.................................................................................................................................................8-2 

8.2.1 General overview.......................................................................................................................................8-2 

8.2.2 Camera Module CM..................................................................................................................................8-3 

8.2.3 Lighting Module LM .................................................................................................................................8-3 

8.2.4 Scanner Frame SF......................................................................................................................................8-4 

8.2.5 Cartridge Feeder CF ..................................................................................................................................8-4 

8.2.6 Film Feeder FF.............................................................................................................................................8-5 

8.2.7 Film Supply FS............................................................................................................................................8-5 

8.2.8 Main Board MB...........................................................................................................................................8-6 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 0-v

Contents 


8.3 Functional Description................................................................................................................................................8-7 

8.3.1 Scanner data and signal paths.............................................................................................................8-7 

8.3.2 Integration into the global system.....................................................................................................8-8 

8.3.3 Driver Sensor Board (DS, SF_GS01)....................................................................................................8-9 

8.3.4 Scanner Motherboard ........................................................................................................................... 8-10 

9 Printer............................................................................................................................... 9-1 

9.1 Assembly Groups in the Printer...............................................................................................................................9-1 

9.1.1 Location ........................................................................................................................................................9-1 

9.1.2 Designation and shortcuts.....................................................................................................................9-1 

9.1.3 Designation and Shortcuts ....................................................................................................................9-2 

9.1.4 Funktion of the parts................................................................................................................................9-2 

9.2 Actuators and Sensors in the Exposure Unit.......................................................................................................9-3 

9.3 Exchange of the Print Engine ...................................................................................................................................9-4 

9.3.1 Demounting.................................................................................................................................................9-4 

9.3.2 Mounting......................................................................................................................................................9-5 

9.3.3 Copying correction files..........................................................................................................................9-6 

9.3.4 Calibrating the machine.........................................................................................................................9-6 

9.4 Actuators and Sensors in the Paper Advance (PA) ...........................................................................................9-7 

9.4.1 Actuators and Sensors Diagram...........................................................................................................9-7 

9.4.2 Actuators and Sensors List.....................................................................................................................9-8 

9.5 Paper Advance Sequence........................................................................................................................................ 9-12 

9.6 Components of the Paper Advance..................................................................................................................... 9-15 

9.6.1 Paper magazine drives ......................................................................................................................... 9-15 

9.6.1.1 Actuators ......................................................................................................................... 9-15 

9.6.1.2 Sensors............................................................................................................................. 9-16 

9.6.2 Transport Unit TU.................................................................................................................................... 9-17 

9.6.2.1 Actuators / Sensors..................................................................................................... 9-17 

9.6.2.2 Troubleshooting TU ..................................................................................................... 9-18 

9.6.2.3 Adjustment of paper transport and cut length ................................................. 9-20 

9.6.3 Auxiliary Paper Drive............................................................................................................................. 9-21 

9.6.3.1 Actuators / Sensors..................................................................................................... 9-21 

9.6.4 Exposure Unit........................................................................................................................................... 9-22 

9.6.4.1 Exposure table 55A-0102.......................................................................................... 9-22 

9.6.4.2 LED Exposure Unit........................................................................................................ 9-22 

9.6.4.3 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................ 9-23 

9.6.5 Lane Distributor LD................................................................................................................................ 9-24 

9.6.5.1 Actuators and Sensors................................................................................................ 9-24 

9.6.5.2 Troubleshooting LD ..................................................................................................... 9-26 

9.6.6 Back Printer.............................................................................................................................................. 9-27 

9.6.6.1 Actuators and Sensors................................................................................................ 9-27 

9.6.6.2 Back Printer Adjustment ........................................................................................... 9-28 

9.6.7 Shutter........................................................................................................................................................ 9-30 

9.6.7.1 Actuator ........................................................................................................................... 9-30 

10 Paper Processor............................................................................................................... 10-1 

10.1 Functional description.............................................................................................................................................. 10-1 

10.2 Assembly Groups in the Paper Processor.......................................................................................................... 10-1 

10.2.1 Location ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-1 

10.2.2 Designations and shortcuts................................................................................................................ 10-1 

10.3 Actuators and Sensors in the Paper Processor................................................................................................ 10-2 

10.3.1 Designation and Shortcuts ................................................................................................................. 10-3 

10.3.2 Funktion of the parts............................................................................................................................. 10-3 

10.3.3 Actuators and Sensors List.................................................................................................................. 10-4 

10.4 Components of the Paper Processor................................................................................................................... 10-9 

10.4.1 Switches..................................................................................................................................................... 10-9 

10.4.2 Main Drive................................................................................................................................................. 10-9 

10.4.2.1 Checking the main drive........................................................................................... 10-9 

10.4.2.2 Replacing the main Drive Motor..........................................................................10-10 

0-vi 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Contents 

10.4.3 Gear for Frequency Adjustment...................................................................................................... 10-10 

10.4.3.1 Replacing the Gear 50 / 60 Hz............................................................................ 10-10 

10.4.4 Processing Racks ................................................................................................................................. 10-11 

10.4.4.1 Replace worn parts................................................................................................... 10-11 

10.4.5 Rack drive and torque limiter ......................................................................................................... 10-12 

10.4.5.1 Replacing parts .......................................................................................................... 10-12 

10.4.6 Replenisher tanks................................................................................................................................ 10-13 

10.4.6.1 Replacing parts .......................................................................................................... 10-13 

10.4.7 Effluent tanks........................................................................................................................................ 10-14 

10.4.7.1 Checking parts............................................................................................................ 10-14 

10.4.8 Water Replenishment Tank ............................................................................................................. 10-15 

10.4.8.1 Functional description............................................................................................. 10-15 

10.4.9 Docking Station.................................................................................................................................... 10-16 


10.4.9.2 Actuators and Sensors............................................................................................. 10-17 

10.4.9.3 Flow charts................................................................................................................... 10-20 

10.4.9.4 Timing............................................................................................................................ 10-25 

10.4.9.5 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 10-26 

10.4.10 Dryer......................................................................................................................................................... 10-30 


10.4.10.2 Temperature sensors dryer..................................................................................... 10-30 

10.4.11 Paper Exit................................................................................................................................................ 10-31 


10.4.12 Densitometer......................................................................................................................................... 10-34 


10.4.12.2 Technical Data............................................................................................................ 10-34 

10.4.12.3 Climatic conditions................................................................................................... 10-35 

10.4.12.4 Measuring characteristics...................................................................................... 10-35 

10.4.12.5 Zeroing .......................................................................................................................... 10-35 

10.4.12.6 Data rate (RS 232 Connection) ............................................................................ 10-35 

10.4.12.7 Interfaces......................................................................................................................10-35 

10.4.12.8 Jumper positions........................................................................................................ 10-36 

10.4.12.9 Measurement.............................................................................................................. 10-36 

10.4.12.10 MBL, PBL Test print .................................................................................................. 10-36 

10.4.12.11 Block circuit diagram of the 5.5 V power supply.......................................... 10-37 

10.4.12.12 7-Segment display.................................................................................................... 10-37 

10.4.12.13 Data output for MBL and PBL test print ........................................................... 10-38 

10.4.12.14 Densitometer Error Messages............................................................................... 10-38 

10.4.12.15 Generally valid Error Codes (independent of the machine or 

process) ......................................................................................................................... 10-41 

10.4.12.16 Error Codes specified for Process Control ........................................................ 10-41 

10.4.12.17 Error Codes specific for Grey Wedge Measurement..................................... 10-42 

10.4.12.18 Error Codes specific for FLASH Programming ................................................. 10-42 

10.4.12.19 Densitometer Types.................................................................................................. 10-43 

10.4.12.20 Sudden Density Change in the Print caused by the Densitometer........ 10-44 

10.4.12.21 Densi Error Messages when measuring the Test Print................................ 10-47 

10.4.12.22 Error: Densitometer communication time out ............................................... 10-48 

10.4.13 Lane Shifter LS...................................................................................................................................... 10-49 


10.4.14 Sorter SO................................................................................................................................................. 10-50 


10.4.14.2 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 10-51 

11 Maintenance....................................................................................................................11-1 

11.1 Purpose ..........................................................................................................................................................................11-1 

11.2 Safety Prescriptions...................................................................................................................................................11-1 

11.3 To all Service Engineers...........................................................................................................................................11-2 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 0-vii

Contents 


11.4 Maintenance Kits (wearing Parts)........................................................................................................................ 11-3 

11.4.1 Kit for Maintenance – Yearly............................................................................................................. 11-3 

11.4.2 Kit for Maintenance – Every Second Year .................................................................................... 11-4 

11.5 Lubricants and Cleaning Agents........................................................................................................................... 11-5 

11.6 Special Tool.................................................................................................................................................................. 11-5 

11.7 Overview: Maintenance Jobs to be performed by the Service Engineer............................................... 11-6 

11.7.1 General machine .................................................................................................................................... 11-6 

11.7.2 All Paper magazines.............................................................................................................................. 11-6 

11.7.3 Paper magazine compartment left and right .............................................................................. 11-6 

11.7.4 Film Processor (FP)................................................................................................................................. 11-6 

11.7.5 Computer System (CS).......................................................................................................................... 11-7 

11.7.6 Scanner (SC) ............................................................................................................................................. 11-7 

11.7.7 Paper Advance (PA)................................................................................................................................ 11-7 

11.7.8 Paper Processor (PP).............................................................................................................................. 11-8 

11.7.9 End of the Maintenance Work (Machine ON).............................................................................. 11-9 

11.8 Overview: Maintenance Jobs to be performed by the Customer...........................................................11-10 

11.9 General machine......................................................................................................................................................11-11 

11.9.1 Cleaning the inside compartments...............................................................................................11-11 

11.10 Cleaning the Paper Magazines inside..............................................................................................................11-11 

11.11 Checking the Paper Magazine Compartments.............................................................................................11-11 

11.12 Film Processor (FP) (d-lab.1 allrounder)...........................................................................................................11-12 

11.12.1 FP: Cleaning and checking the film loading units and the film magazines..................11-12 

11.12.2 FP: Lubricating the main drive chain and the motor gear, cleaning and 

lubricating the dryer............................................................................................................................11-12 

11.12.3 FP: Squeegee unit, replace worn parts if required...................................................................11-13 

11.12.4 FP: Cleaning the racks and replacing worn parts if required...............................................11-14 

11.12.5 FP: Cleaning the processing tanks.................................................................................................11-15 

11.12.6 FP: Servicing hoses, valves, circulation pumps.........................................................................11-16 

11.12.7 FP: Servicing the replenisher pumps ............................................................................................11-16 

11.12.8 FP: Servicing the Docking System.................................................................................................11-17 

11.12.8.1 Nozzle sets and Opener...........................................................................................11-17 

11.12.8.2 Locking mechanism of the docking door..........................................................11-21 

11.12.9 FP: Cleaning and lubricating the Leader cutter........................................................................11-22 

11.13 Computer System ....................................................................................................................................................11-23 

11.14 Scanner (SC)...............................................................................................................................................................11-24 

11.14.1 SC: Negative mask support, replacing worn parts if required .............................................11-24 

11.14.2 SC: Cleaning the Cartridge Feeder.................................................................................................11-24 

11.14.3 SC: Lubricating all negative masks (if required).......................................................................11-25 

11.15 Paper Transport (PA)................................................................................................................................................11-26 

11.15.1 PA: Cleaning the Print Engine.........................................................................................................11-26 

11.15.2 PA: Cleaning the cutter units ..........................................................................................................11-26 

11.15.3 PA: Servicing the Lane Distributor.................................................................................................11-27 

11.15.4 PA: Cleaning the back printer head...............................................................................................11-27 

11.16 Paper Processor (PP) ...............................................................................................................................................11-28 

11.16.1 Paper Processor – Important note.................................................................................................11-28 

11.16.2 PP: Cleaning the gears and bearings............................................................................................11-28 

11.16.3 PP: Checking / replacing the gear for frequency adjustment (every second year).....11-29 

11.16.4 PP: Crossovers, replace worn parts if required ..........................................................................11-29 

11.16.5 Cleaning / servicing the squeegee unit......................................................................................11-30 

11.16.6 PP: Racks, replace worn parts if required....................................................................................11-31 

11.16.7 PP: Cleaning the processing tanks................................................................................................11-32 

11.16.8 PP: Servicing hoses, valves, pumps...............................................................................................11-32 

11.16.9 PP: Cleaning the water tank ............................................................................................................11-33 

11.16.10 PP: Servicing the replenisher pumps............................................................................................11-33 

11.16.10.1 PP: Replacing the poppet valves of the replenisher and water 

pumps if required .......................................................................................................11-34 

0-viii 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Contents 

11.16.11 PP: Cleaning the Docking System ................................................................................................ 11-35 

11.16.11.1 Locking mechanism of the docking door......................................................... 11-39 

11.16.12 PP: Cleaning the dryer rack ............................................................................................................. 11-40 

11.16.13 PP: Dryer rack, replace worn parts if required, lubricate the chain.................................. 11-40 

11.16.14 PP: Cleaning and checking the densitometer.......................................................................... 11-41 

11.16.15 PP: Cleaning the Sorter..................................................................................................................... 11-41 

11.17 Switching on the machine................................................................................................................................... 11-42 

11.17.1 FP/PP: Checking the circulation pumps (running noise) ..................................................... 11-42 

11.17.2 FP/PP: Calibrating the water pumps............................................................................................ 11-42 

11.17.3 Functional check of the machine.................................................................................................. 11-42 

11.17.4 Eliminate ghost effects (if required) ............................................................................................. 11-42 

12 Index...............................................................................................................................12-1 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 0-ix

Contents 


■ 

0-x 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


General 

1 General 

1.1 Available Documentation 

Available documentation, see Table. 

The customer receives the Preinstallation Instructions when he orders the machine. 

The Operation folder includes a CD with the available documentation (with the exception 

of the circuit diagrams. The Operation Manual – Installation and Operation – are included 

with the machine shipment. All other parts can be ordered from AgfaPhoto. 

The Operating Instructions must be kept around the machine to ensure that all users have 

access to them. 

Instructions Folder / Booklet Owner Operator Technician 

Preinstallation Preinstallation (booklet) x 

Operating Instructions Operation 

x 

Installation (booklet) 

x 

Service Instructions Repair 

x 

Spare Parts List x x 

Circuit Diagrams 

x 

1.2 Repair 

The Operation Manual is useful for safe and appropriate working on the machine and with 

the machine. Perfect and safe operation of the product requires careful observation of the 

Operation Manual and the contained safety instructions. Therefore it must always be 

complete and in good condition for easy reading. 

All persons working on the machine and with the machine must 

– have read and understood the Operation Manual before they switch on the machine 

for the first time. 

– have the Operation Manual at hand when they work on the machine. 

– observe all information and instructions of the Operation Manual. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 1-1

General 


1.2.1 Guideline for the Technician 

Instructions 

Preinstallation 

Installation 


Information 

The owner takes care of the listed preinstallation measures and returns the checklist to 

AgfaPhoto no later than two weeks prior to the installation date. 

This document describes the transport to the installation site, as well as the installation 

and implementation of the machine. 

Appendix: Declaration of Conformity 

The declaration of conformity is the first sheet in the Operation folder. 

This document includes all important information to ensure correct operation by a 

technician: 

Chapter 1: 

Notes on the Repair Manual, legal notes, safety notes, transport and storage. 

Chapter 2: 

Introduction of the basic machine, components, functions and controls of the machine, 

help function and information. 

Chapter 3: 

Installation of the main software; list of error messages with error codes 

Chapter 4: 

Description of the service functions and the error diagnosis 

Chapter 5: 

Description of the power supply 

Chapter 6: 

Description of the Computer System 

Chapter 7: 

Description of the Film Processor 

Chapter 8: 

Description of the Scanner 

Chapter 9: 

Description of the Printer 

Chapter 10: 

Description of the Paper Processor 

Chapter 11: 

Description of the required maintenance routines on the machine 

Chapter 12: 

Index 

Chapter 13: 

Preinstallation (booklet) und Installation (booklet) 

1-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


General 

1.2.2 Means of Representation 

1.2.2.1 Text Styles and Symbols 

The following text passages are emphasized by bold print, italic print or the type face 

Courier New: 

– Button designations 

Example: Press Service to call up the service functions 

– Reference s 

Italic print is used for reference to Registers or paragraphs 

Example: See 1.2.2.1 Text Styles and Symbols 

– Program code 

Courier New is used for commands and script names in the service functions 

This symbol describes an action to be carried out. 

If an action requires further secondary steps this symbol has been used. 

CAUTION! 

This symbol described Safety instructions 

Note 

This symbol describes notes and hints for more efficient work routines on the machine. 

1.2.2.2 Safety Notes 

The words CAUTION and WARNING in the documentation and on the machine labels 

indicate the following risks: 

CAUTION! 

This indicates a potential danger which may result in minor personal injuries or 

property damage. 

WARNING! 

Indicates a possible risk involved with a product which in case of non-observance 

may result in severe personal injuries or even death. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 1-3

General 


1.3 Machine 

1.3.1 Standards and Rules 

The machine is in compliance with the requirements of the standards and rules listed 

below: 

98/37/EG: 

Machine Directives 

73/23/EWG: 

Directive for Low Voltage 

89/336/EWG: 

Electromagnetic Compatibility (according to modifications 91/ 263/EEC and 2/31/EEC). 

EN 60950: 

Safety of Information Technology Equipment 

EN 60825-1: 

Safety of Laser Equipment 

EN 55022: 

Information Technology Equipment – Radio interference – Limits and Methods of 

Measurements 

EN 55024: 

Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Standard - Limits and Methods of 

Measurements 

EN 61000-6-2: 

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Basic Standard 

Immunity Standard for Industrial Areas (IEC 61000-6-2:1999, modified) 

EN 61000-3-2: 

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2: Limit Values 

Limit Values for Harmonic Emissions (IEC 61000-3-2:2000, modified) 

EN 61000-3-3: 

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-3: Limit Values 

Limit values for voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low voltage 

supply networks for equipment with a current ≤ 16 A per conductor, which are not subject 

to any special connection conditions. 

(IEC 61000-3-3:1994 + A1:2001) 

1.3.2 CE Symbol 

The CE symbol describes the conformity of the machine with the requirements of the EG 

Directives 89/336/EWG and 73/23/EWG (see Standards and rules). 

If further devices are to be connected to the digital minilab, these devices, too, must 

meet the requirements of the relevant EG directives. 

The machine is a Class A equipment A (EN 55022). This equipment may cause radio 

disturbances in residential areas. In this case the user may be required to initiate 

respective measures to eliminate such disturbances and pay for these measures. 

1-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


General 

1.3.3 Use 

1.3.3.1 Purpose 

The digital minilab has been designed exclusively for the purpose of printing negatives, 

slides, and digital images on photographic paper and for saving image files on storage 

media. 

1.3.3.2 Appropriate Use 

The product corresponds to the state of the art and is operationally reliable. If the product 

is not used correctly or for its intended purpose this may result in risks and danger. 

Only strict adherence to all instructions and specifications of this Operation manual 

assures the intended use of the machine. 

For safety reasons it is not permitted to maker conversions and modifications of the 

product without proper authorization. 

The machine must only be operated with the recommended consumables and the defined 

conditions for use (see Technical Specifications). 

Any other user of the machine may result in damage on the machine and further 

even to personal injuries and property damage! 

1.3.3.3 Inappropriate Use 

Inappropriate use (misuse) will be: 

– any application not corresponding to the afore mentioned appropriate use or use 

outside the specifications 

– non-observance of the instructions in the manuals 

– non-observance of the safety instructions 

– operation of the machine in a non-operative condition 

(regarding function and/or safety) 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 1-5

General 


1.4 Manufacturer 

1.4.1 Warranty 

AgfaPhoto will not be liable for personal injuries and property damage caused by mistakes 

or omissions of the information provided in this manual. 

AgfaPhoto will not be liable for damage caused by inappropriate use, non-observance of 

safety and maintenance instructions, or by unauthorized modifications. 

Guaranty regulations are up to the countries. For information refer to the sales contract or 

the warranty certificate. 

1.4.2 Exclusion of Liability 

In principle the applying conditions are the AgfaPhoto general conditions of sale and 

delivery. The owner will receive these the latest at the time of the conclusion of a 

contract. 

All information, data, and notes in this Operation Manual are current as of the date of 

printing. All rights reserved to change technical specifications as a result of further 

developments on the machine. Therefore claims for modifications or additions on 

delivered equipment based on the data, illustrations, and descriptions herein will not be 

accepted. 

AgfaPhoto tested the contents of this Operation Manual regarding the correspondence 

with the described hardware and software. As deviations cannot be excluded, AgfaPhoto 

will not guarantee complete correspondence. Necessary corrections will be made in 

follow-up editions. 

AgfaPhoto will not be liable for damages and interferences resulting from: 

– non-observance of the Operation Manual 

– mistakes by the user 

– inappropriate working on the machine and with the machine 

– use of non-original wear parts, spare parts and accessories as well as the use of nonoriginal 

consumables 

– unauthorized conversions and modification on the machine by the owner or the 

owner’s staff 

1.4.3 Manufacturer Information 

AgfaPhoto GmbH 

PO Box 900151 

D- 81536 Munich, Germany 

1-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


General 

1.5 Legal Situation 

The operation of the machines is ruled by the appropriate regulations for the place of 

installation in force in the country concerned. 

This Operation Manual includes an EU Conformity Declaration (CE) about the applying 

harmonized standards (see Appendix). 

CAUTION! 

The following safety regulations, warnings and instructions on machine labels 

must be observed by all means. 

The non-observance may be dangerous for persons, equipment and buildings: 

injuries, electric shocks, fire. 

Note: 

The manufacturer and the service will not assume any responsibilities for accidents and 

damage resulting from inappropriate operation. 

1.5.1 Safety Notes 

1.5.1.1 Terms for Users 

The Owner is any actual person or juristic person, who uses the machine or has 

somebody use the machine. 

The AgfaPhoto authorized Service technicians are responsible for all those tasks on the 

machine which cannot be performed by the operators. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 1-7

General 


1.5.1.2 General 

CAUTION! 

Warning and instructions on machine labels must be strictly observed. 

CAUTION! 

Safety Device 

Never change the electrical circuit. 

Do not circumvent or disable the integrated safety devices. 

Do not modify preset values of safety components. 

Replace fuses only by the same type of fuse: value, switch-off characteristics. 

1.5.1.3 Installation 

CAUTION! 

Only the Service is entitled to install the machine. 

Install all lines and cables in such a way that nobody will step on them or trip. 

Only those extension units must be installed, which meet the safety requirements 

and regulations, and are in compliance with electromagnetic compatibility and 

the respective AgfaPhoto specifications. For information about extensions or 

additions released for this machine turn to the Service. 

All data cables, signal cables, process and control cables, which connect the 

machine with other machines must be correctly shielded and connected. 

1.5.1.4 Transport 

CAUTION! 

The machine must only be transported by the Service or an authorized forwarder. 

1-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


General 

1.5.1.5 Operation 

CAUTION! 

Only the Operator and Service are allowed to operate the machine. The operating 

instructions should be read carefully before the work is started. 

Persons under the influence of alcohol, drugs, or certain medication (e.g. 

psychopharmacological medication) are not permitted to operate the machine. 

In emergencies immediately switch off the machine at the main switch; see 

position of the main switch in Chapter 2. 

Never run the machine without covers / panels. Persons who open or remove 

covers expose themselves to dangerous voltages or run other risks. 

For the cleaning of the machine follow the instructions in Chapter 8. Only use the 

recommended cleaning substances and devices. 

Do not cover or block the venting openings in the housing: This may lead to 

overheating of single components. 

No objects or liquids should get into the machine through the venting openings: 

This may cause fire, electric shock, or a short circuit. Therefore never place objects 

or containers with liquid on or around the machine. 

Provide for sufficient cooling air and fresh air at the operating site. 

Do not block the operation and maintenance areas by other equipment or objects. 

Avoid excessive generation of dust as this may damage the components in the 

device. 

Keep consumables and containers for food and drinks separate. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 1-9

General 


1.5.1.6 Service / Repairs 

CAUTION! 

Only the Service is entitled to repair the machine. All areas which can only be 

opened by means of tools are considered service areas. Illegal opening of a 

service areas and inappropriate repairs may result in serious risks for the 

operators. 

Observe country-specific safety regulations 

Maker sure to switch off the machine prior to service / repair work 

The machine contains components using high voltage as well as quite sensitive 

components. For this reason, the following work must only be performed by 

authorized service technicians: 

Repairs on electrical components, maintenance work / removal of parts and 

covers not described in the operation folder. 

Use original AgfaPhoto spare parts: only these parts have been tested regarding 

their suitability and safety. 

When replacing electronic components: observe the data given in the circuit and 

wiring diagrams. 

At the end of all service / maintenance jobs: check the general function of the 

machine as well as the correct condition of the safety devices. 

1-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto

1 

2 3 4 

3 


General 

1.5.1.7 Warnings and Information Labels on the Machine 

Make sure the labels are attached and are clearly visible. 

STOP 

3003_074 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 1-11

General 


No. Label Meaning 

1 Fire hazard if fuses other than specified by AgfaPhoto are used (see 

Technical Specifications). 

2 Risk of injuries by electric shock with open covers. 

3 Risk of injuries by rotating parts (getting caught, bruising). 

Keep the door closed when the machine is on. If the door must be 

opened make sure not to touch any components. 

4 Risk of injuries by sharp blades (cutting wounds). 

Do not reach into the cutting unit during operation. Do not touch the 

cutting blades either when the machine is off. 

5 Name plate with CE certification 

The CE certification means that the machine is in compliance with all 

applying EG Rules. 

The given voltage, fuse and frequency values for single-phase and threephase 

connections are listed. 

d-lab.1 starter 8070/040 

d-lab.1 allrounder 1 8070/050 


d-lab.1 plus 8070/109 

3003_161 

1-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


General 

d-lab.1s starter oc 8070/230 

d-lab.1s starter 8070/240 

d-lab.1s basic 1 8070/300 


d-lab.1s plus 8070/310 

3003_162 

netlab.1 starter oc 8070/130 

netlab.1 allrounder 8070/150 

netlab.1 plus 8070/160 

3003_163 

6 This label identified the main switch or main breaker. 

7 This label advises the user to read the installation instructions before 

connecting the machine to the power supply. 

Installation errors may lead to injuries (risk of electric shock) or machine 

damage when the machine is connected to the mains. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 1-13

General 


1.6 Handling of Processing Chemicals 

1.6.1 Safety Instructions 

CAUTION! 

In the work environment of the machine slightly poisonous, irritating, and caustic 

substances may occur. The Owner (employer) 

– has to elaborate operation instructions for the handling of dangerous 

substances 

– provides for the instruction of his staff at least once a year 

– ensures sufficient aeration: The air in industrial workrooms should be 

exchanged at least eight to ten times per hour. 

All photographic developers contain substances, which may irritate the skin, the 

mucous membrane and the eyes, and which may cause allergic skin reactions 

affecting very sensitive persons. For this reason, avoid long or repeated skin 

contact, especially with developer solutions. 

For all jobs where photographic processing solutions may splash, e.g. preparing 

and filling in chemical solutions, cleaning processing racks etc.: 

– Wear protective gloves and change them every day, if possible; rinse all 

solutions that get on your skin immediately with plenty of fresh water 

– Wear protection goggles: If in spite of this, splashes do get into your eyes, 

wash them immediately with plenty of water, pulling apart the eyelids. 

Consult an oculist! 

Store chemicals and processing solutions in a safe place. 

Collect leaking chemicals immediately and dispose of these chemicals. The above 

regulations must be observed. 

Mind chemical residues in the boxes (Easy paper box). 

■ 

1-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Basic Machines 

2 Basic Machines 

2.1 Versions 

The d-lab.1 is offered in twelve different versions: 

– d-lab.1fp machines can process input from digital media and film material; color 

negative films can be developed (4 versions). 

– d-lab.1s machines can process input from digital media and film material; (5 versions). 

– netlab.1 machines can process input from digital media (3 versions). 

Note: 

The digital input and the CD burning are performed one the d-lab.1 allrounder 2 and 

the d-lab.1 plus via the image box using the AgfaPhoto programs workstation or kiosk. 

Both functions are also available on the d-lab.1 and the netlab.1, provided the machine 

is retrofitted for this (options 6-port drive and Software licenses). 

2.2 Versions (Illustrations) 

2.2.1 d-lab.1 with Film Processor 

d-lab.1 starter 

Type 8070/040 

d-lab.1 allrounder 1 

Type 8070/050 


Type 8070/100 

d-lab.1 plus 

Type 8070/109 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 2-1



2.2.2 d-lab.1s 

d-lab.1s starter 

Type 8070/230 

d-lab.1s starter oc 

Type 8070/240 

d-lab.1s basic 1 

Type 8070/300 


Type 8070/200 

d-lab.1s plus 

Type 8070/310 

2-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



2.2.3 netlab.1 

netlab.1 starter oc 

Type 8070/130 

netlab.1 allrounder 

Type 8070/150 

netlab.1 plus 

Type 8070/160 

Note: 

All illustrations in this manual show the d-lab.1 allrounder. Additional illustrations for 

the versions d-lab.1 or netlab.1 are usually not necessary and will be shown only in 

exceptional cases. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 2-3



2.2.4 Overview (Table) 

Version 

Type 

ABC Code 

(Order Number) 

Film Processor 

No. of Paper 

Magazines 

Monitor 

image box 

Digital Input on 

d-lab.1 

Easy Box 

Chemicals 

APS Zoom 

(IX240) 

APS Film mask 

and Feeder 

d-lab.1 starter 8070/040 5MGRP yes 1 TS-LCD no yes yes yes no 

d-lab.1 allrounder 1 8070/050 5KW92 yes 2 TS-LCD no yes yes yes yes 

d-lab.1 allrounder 2 8070/100 5KXA6 yes 2 TS-LCD yes no yes yes yes 

d-lab.1 plus 8070/109 — yes 2 TS-LCD yes no yes yes yes 

d-lab.1s starter oc 8070/230 5MAFB no 1 CRT/LCD * no yes no no no 

d-lab.1s starter 8070/240 5MAGD no 1 CRT/LCD * no yes yes yes no 

d-lab.1s basic 1 8070/300 5LEKS no 1 CRT/LCD * no yes yes yes no 

d-lab.1s basic 2 8070/200 5LEJQ no 2 CRT/LCD * no yes yes yes no 

d-lab.1s plus 8070/310 — no 2 CRT/LCD * no yes yes yes yes 

netlab.1 starter oc 8070/130 5L95J no 1 CRT/LCD * no yes no no no 

netlab.1 allrounder 8070/150 5LQK4 no 2 CRT/LCD * no yes yes no no 

netlab.1 plus 8070/160 — no 2 CRT/LCD * no yes yes no no 

* optional 

Note: 

The drawings in this manual only show the version d-lab.1 allrounder as an example. 

2-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



2.3 Complete Machine 

2.3.1 Main Components 

3003_001 

1-5 d-lab.1 with Film Processor 

2-5 d-lab.1s 

3-5 netlab.1 

see Table on the next page 

The machine consists of five major assemblies: 

1 Film Processor FP 

2 Scanner SC 

3 Computer System CS 

4 Printer PR 

– Print Engine PE 

– Paper Advance PA 

5 Paper Processor PP 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 2-5



Main Components 

d-lab.1 with Film Processor 

d-lab.1s 

netlab.1 

Example: d-lab.1 allrounder 1 

Example: d-lab.1s starter 

Example: netlab1_allrounder 


d-lab.1 allrounder 1 and 2 




d-lab.1s basic 1 and 2 





all main components without Film Processor without Film Processor 

without Scanner 

Note: 

The position and the kind of Computer System (CS) depend on the version. 

one unit 

on top of the Printer 


Computer System (CS) 

two units, on top of each other, 

in a cabinet on the LHS of the Printer 

Versions with cabinet for CS 

two units, side by side, 

above the second/left paper magazine, 


Versions with a cabinet for CS and 

left paper magazine 







Former production: 


d-lab.1s starter oc and starter 



New Production 




New production: 


2-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



2.3.2 Components 

3002_160 

1 Scanner SC (not netlab.1) 3.13 Drain cocks for the Paper Processor effluent tanks 

1.1 Film feeder – film feeding to the print area 3.14 Water tank drain cock 

1.2 Film Scanner 

1.3 Negative mask 4 Printer PR 

1.4 Take up – film take-up after scanning 4.1 Paper magazine RHS 

1.5 Print engine (exposure system) 4.2 Lane distributor with back printer 

4.3 Cutter RHS 

2 Computer system CS (see previous page) 4.4 Print engine 

2.1 CD drive 4.5 Exposure table 

2.2 ON button, Timer lamp and STOP button (Reset) 4.6 Film collecting box 

2.3 Touch Screen 4.7 Cutter LHS 

3 Paper Processor PP 5 Film Processor FP (d-lab.1 with Film Processor) 

3.1 Built-in densitometer 5.1 Paper magazine LHS 

3.2 Tray 5.2 Drain cocks for the Film Processor processing tanks 

3.3 Order sorter 5.3 Drain cocks for the Film Processor processing tanks 

3.4 Processing tanks with pumps and filters 5.4 Drain cocks for the Film Processor effluent tanks 

3.5 Tray 5.5 Replenisher tanks 

3.6 Docking station 5.6 Emergency cut button and crank handle position 

3.7 Main switch with ground fault interrupter (GFI switch) 5.7 Docking station 

3.8 Dryer 5.8 Bleach bath aeration (BL agitation) 

3.9 Replenisher tanks 5.9 Film feed shafts A (top) and B (bottom) 

3.10 Drain cocks for the Paper Processor processing tanks 5.10 Dryer 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 2-7



2.4 List of Machine Parts 

Major assemblies No. Designation 

Film Processor FP 





Paper Advance PA 

F05-90 MAIN BODY BLOCK 

90F-0105 FILM LOADING UNIT 

90F-0701 FILM POWER SUPPLY ASSY 

F08-90 PROCESSING BLOCK 

90F-0801 TANK UNIT ASSY 

50F-0802A 

50F-0802B 

50F-0802C 

50F-0802D 

50F-0802E 

50F-0802F 

50F-0802G 

50F-0802H 

FILM RACK UNIT (CD-1) 

FILM RACK UNIT (CD-2) 

FILM RACK UNIT (BL) 

FILM RACK UNIT (FX-1) 

FILM RACK UNIT (FX-2) 

FILM RACK UNIT (SB-1) 



90F-0806 EFFLUENT TANK UNIT ASSY 

90F-0808 REPLENISHMENT TANK UNIT 

50F-0809 SQUEEZE UNIT ASSY 

90F-0811 FP DOCKING SYSTEM ASSY 

F16-90 DRYER BLOCK 

90F-1601 DRYER RACK UNIT ASSY 

A05-90 MAIN BODY BLOCK 

A01-90 PAPER SUPPLY BLOCK 

52A-0101 PAPER MAGAZINE UNIT 

90A-0102 EXPOSURE TABLE UNIT 

90A-0105 PAPER ADVANCE UNIT 

90A-0106 BACK PRINTER UNIT 

90A-0107L CUTTER L ASSY 

90A-0107R CUTTER R ASSY 

90A-0113L MAGAZINE DRIVE L ASSY 

90A-0113R MAGAZINE DRIVE R UNIT 

90A-0114R SUB PAPER ADVANCE R UNIT 

90A-0701 POWER SUPPLY UNIT ASSY 

90A-0702 PA CONTROLLER UNIT 

90A-0704 PP CONTROLLER UNIT 

2-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Machine Part No. Designation 

Paper Processor PP P08-90 PROCESSING BLOCK ASSY 

90P-0801 PROCESSING TANK UNIT 

90P-0802A PROCESSING RACK A (CD) 

90P-0802B PROCESSING RACK B (BF) 

90P-0802C PROCESSING RACK C (SB1-3) 

90P-0802D PROCESSING RACK D(SB4) 

90P-0807 EFFLUENT TANK UNIT 

90P-0808 REPLENISHMENT TANK UNIT 

90P-0809 SQUEEZE UNIT 

90P-0810 WATER TANK ASSY 

90P-0811 DOCKING SYSTEM UNIT 

P16-90 DRYER BLOCK 

90P-1601 DRYER RACK UNIT 

90P-1602 DRYER HEATER UNIT 

90P-1603 OUTLET UNIT 

90P-2001 SHIFTER UNIT 

P20-90 SORTER BLOCK 

90P-2002 SORTER UNIT ASSY 

Standard Accessory P22-90 STANDARD ACCESSORY 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 2-9



■ 

2-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 

3 Software 

3.1 Software installation 

3.1.1 Save customer settings and data base 

CAUTION! 

Before installing the Operating System, the customer settings and the data base 

have to be saved. 

Save Customer Settings and Data Base on a 

CD using Save Settings in the GUI 

Copy to the same CD from: 

D:\Data\Combiprints 

D:\Data\dbbackup 

D:\Data\Index 

D:\Data\Luts (ensure that offset_large1 to 

4.ars, offset_small1 to 4.ars and 

LCD_Lut.txt are in this folder => 9 files) 

D:\Data\statistics 

Save these folders to CD using Nero: 

C:\Program Files\Ahead\Nero\nero.exe 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-1

Software 


3.1.2 Installation of the Operating System MPU 

inst_0 

Insert CD Operating System MPU 

Version 1.05 or higher 

Call up watchdog: + 

Click on control 

Select explorer and click on execute 

Press 

Button Shutdown 

Select Restart 

Wait until MPU restarts 

Press DEL to enter the Setup 

Change BIOS: 

Advanced Settings \ FIRST BOOT DEVICE: 

from Harddisk to CDROM 

Boot of MPU starts 

Select 2: Boot from CD-Rom 

Menu is displayed, see image 

Select 1....Windows and BIOS 

installation: 

Windows and BIOS Image will be installed 

Note: 

After the installation from Windows and BIOS 

Image the Advanced Settings will be changed 

automatically from CDROM to Harddisk. 

Install the current d-lab.1 software 

Run the d-lab.1 software: Then copy the 

saved data back to MPU 

3-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 

Wait until the installation is finished 

inst_1 

Start Explorer: 

Right mouse click on Windows Start 

Mark Explorer in the menu with the 

arrow 

Left mouse click 

inst_2 

Check if new Drives are present 

Insert CD Software d-lab.1 Version 2.00C 

or higher 

inst_3 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-3

Software 


3.1.3 First Installation of the d-lab.1 Main Software 

Start software installation: 

E:\version\MainSW\install\ 

DLAB1_xx.xxx_setup8\set up.exe 

inst_00 

Wait until the next screen is displayed 

inst_01 

3-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 

Click on Next > 

inst_02 


inst_03 

Select release and click on Next > 

inst_04 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-5

Software 


Accept the destination folder with Next > or 

Browse … for another one. 

inst_05 

Select DB Install 


inst_06 

Click on Next: 

The software installation starts. 

inst_07 

3-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 

Wait … 

inst_08 

Wait … 

inst_09 

Wait … 

inst_10 

Wait … 

inst_11 

Choose a restart option: 

Yes for now 

No for later 

Press Finish: 

If Yes has been chosen, the computer 

system reboots 

inst_12 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-7

Software 


Start the d-lab.1 Software: 

Double click on the yellow LK1Watchdog 

icon 

inst_13 

SW d-lab.1 startup 

Note: 

Description of the startup sequence, 

see chapter 6.4.1.1. 

inst_14 

3-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 

3.1.4 Update of the Operating System MPU 

CAUTION! 

Before installing the Operating System, the customer settings and the data base 

have to be saved, see 3.1.1 Save customer settings and data base. 

The Installer OP System d-lab.1, version 1.06 UPDATE, 10+9807090252 

can be used from OS Version 1.04. 

Note: 

Update from OS Version 1.04 can cause an error shown at the end of this section. 

If you get this error, press OK to continue the update process. 

Insert CD Operatingsystem MPU 

Version 01.06 UPDATE 

Open Settings 

Open Machine settings 

open machine settings 

Open Install Software 

open SW installation 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-9

Software 


Press Load CD 

Select d-lab.1 OS-Update V:0.01up 

Press Install 

select d-lab.1 OS-Update 1.06 

Answer the Question: select Yes 

Update starts (it will take approx. 8 min) 

d-lab.1 SW shutdown 

Update screen will be displayed 

Steps of action will be displayed on the 

LHS of the screen 

Wait until the d-lab.1 software starts 

have you saved 

3-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 

Possible error message during update from OS Installer 1.04 

Press OK to continue 

update_error 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-11

Software 


3.2 Error Messages 

Overview 

Chapter 

3.2 Error Messages 

3.2.1 Film Processor (FP), only d-lab.1with Film Processor 

3.2.2 Scanner (SC) 

3.2.3 Print Engine (PE) / Exposure Controller (EC) 

3.2.4 Paper Advance (PA) 

3.2.5 Paper Processor (PP) 

3.2.6 Timer 

3.2.7 Messages (Custom Errors) 

3.2.7.1 Film Processor (FP), only d-lab.1with Film Processor 

3.2.7.2 Scanner (SC) 

3.2.7.3 Exposure Controller (EC) 

3.2.7.4 Paper Advance (PA) 

3.2.7.5 Paper Processor (PP) 

3.2.7.6 IP / IPP 

3.2.7.7 Software 

3.2.7.8 Timer 

3.2.8 Messages (Custom Info) 

3-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 

3.2.1 Film Processor (FP), only d-lab.1with Film Processor 

Error code Error message Description / Remedy 

ERFPFCDS0002 

5512518 

FP: Docking fault Filmbox1 

Light sensor does not respond, check the film box 

Service engineer: 

Check DSLS05, DSMO01 

ERFPFCDS0003 

5512519 

FP: Docking fault Filmbox1, cutter not 

in home position 

Cutter jammed, check the mechanism 



ERFPFCDS0004 

5512520 

FP: Insert Filmbox1 or Filmbox2 Service engineer: 

Check DSLS03, DSLS06 

ERFPFCDS0005 

5512521 

FP: Filmbox1 or Filmbox2 inserted 

incorrectly 


Check DSLS03, DSLS06, DSMS01 

ERFPFCPU0002 

5512501 

FP: Flash Rom Delete / Write error 

upon Download 

Film Flash-ROM defective. 


Replace film Flash-ROM 

ERFPFCPU0003 

5512502 

FP: Check sum error during Download Firmware version file (SW) damaged or wrong. Select the correct 

file and try again. 


Repeat the Download manually 

ERFPFCPU0004 

5512503 

ERFPFCPU0005 

5512504 

ERFPFCPU0006 

5512505 

ERFPFCPU0007 

5512506 

ERFPFCPU0008 

5512607 

ERFPFCUT0001 

5512507 

ERFPFCUT0002 

5512508 

FP: EEPROM Delete / Write error 

during Download 

FP: Communication problem with 

Paper Processor 

FP: Film Processor CPU not read 

FP: Watchdog Timer active 

FP: Reload the machine settings, they 

are defective 

FP: Film cutting fault in film 

magazine TOP 

FP: Film cutting fault in film 

magazine BOTTOM 

Delete / Write error during Download. It has not been possible 

to save the data (MC+Docking) after 2 attempts. 

Service engineer:try again or replace the PCB 

No reply from Paper Processor CPU. 

(This message is ok during the PP assembly group download) 


Check the connection 


Check the serial connection, replace the FP-CPU 

(This message is ok during the PP assembly group download) 


Repeat the action or replace the Timer PCB 

The machine settings were overwritten with the Default settings. 

The machine then works with the faulty standard values. Load 

the last correct data backup in the menu item Settings > Load 

settings > Machine settings. 


Check the MC data of the assembly group in the cfg files. If it is 

correct, set the parameter VALID to 1. Then save it and load it 

into the assembly group and into the data base. 

The film cassette is still in cutting position after several cutting 

attempts, check the film magazine and the film cutter. 


Check LDLS02 

The film cassette is still in cutting position after several cutting 

attempts, check the film magazine and the film cutter. 


Check LDLS07 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-13

Software 



ERFPFCUT0003 

5512509 

FP: Film jamming in film magazine 

TOP 

End of film detected too early, cut cannot be performed. 

Film jamming in the cassette, Leader card may be damaged. 


Check LDLS02 

ERFPFCUT0004 

5512510 


BOTTOM 




Check LDLS07 

ERFPFCUT0005 

5512511 


TOP 




Check LDLS01, LDLS02 

ERFPFCUT0006 

5512512 


BOTTOM 





ERFPFCUT0007 

5512513 


TOP 





ERFPFCUT0008 

5512514 


BOTTOM 





ERFPFDRY0001 

5512515 

FP: Close dryer lid of the Film 

Processor 

Film Processor dryer open. 


Check DYMS01 

ERFPFDRY0002 

5512516 

FP: Malfunction of the film dryer fan Check the fan unit (fan, board, cable) 


Check DHAL01, DYFA01 

ERFPFDRY0003 

5512517 

FP: Remove film from film dryer Sensor covered for more than 1 min. during the initialization. 


Check DRLS01 

ERFPFLDS0001 

5512522 

FP: Remove the film from the film 

magazine during the initialization 

The light sensors see a film for more than 20mS during the 

initialization of the Film Processor. 

Remove the film from the film magazine. 


Check LDMS01, LDMS02 

ERFPFLDS0002 

5512523 



The light sensors see a film for more than 20mS during the 




Check LDMS06, LDMS07 

3-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERFPFLDS0003 

5512524 

ERFPFLDS0004 

5512525 

ERFPFLOD0001 

5512526 

ERFPFLOD0002 

5512527 

ERFPFLOD0003 

5512528 

ERFPFLOD0004 

5512529 

ERFPFLOD0005 

5512530 

ERFPFLOD0006 

5512531 

ERFPFLOD0007 

5512532 

ERFPFLOD0008 

5512533 





FP: No film seen in film magazine 

TOP 

FP: No film seen in film magazine 

BOTTOM 

FP: Film jam in film magazine TOP 

FP: Film jam in film magazine 

BOTTOM 

FP: Wrong film size in film magazine 

TOP 

FP: Wrong film size in film magazine 

BOTTOM 

FP: Leader card without a film in film 

magazine TOP 

FP: Leader card without a film in film 

magazine BOTTOM 

The light sensors see a film for more than 3 min. during the 




Check LDMS03, LDMS04, LDMS05 

The light sensors see a film for more than 3 min. during the 




Check LDMS08, LDMS09, LDMS10 

The light sensors do not see a film 50 sec after the start of the 

film exit motor. 


Check LDLS03, LDLS04, LDLS05 and the motor 

The light sensors do not see a film 50 sec after the start of the 

film exit motor. 


Check LDLS08, LDLS09, LDLS10 and the motor 

The light sensors still see a film 4 min. after the film feed. 

Remove the film. 


Check LDLS03, LDLS04, LDLS05 

The light sensors still see a film 4 min. after the film feed. 

Remove the film 



A film has been detected that does not match the magazine. 

Insert the film in a matching film magazine. 


Check LDLS03, LDLS04, LDLS05, LDMS01, LDMS02 

A film has been detected that does not match the magazine. 

Insert the film in a matching film magazine. 


Check LDLS08, LDLS09, LDLS10, LDMS03, LDMS04 

A Leader card without a film has been recognized. Possible 

causes: 

– Leader card inserted without a film 

– Film not spliced correctly or torn off the Leader card 

– Leader card inserted the wrong way 



A Leader card without a film has been recognized. 

Possible causes: 

– Leader card inserted without a film 

– Film not spliced correctly or torn off the Leader card 

– Leader card inserted the wrong way 



AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-15

Software 



ERFPFPDS0002 

5512534 

FP: Docking fault Filmbox2 

Light sensor does not respond. 

Check Filmbox 



ERFPFPDS0003 

5512535 

FP: Docking fault Filmbox2, cutter not 

in home position 

Cutter jammed. 

Check mechanism. 



ERFPFPDS0004 

5512536 

FP: Insert Filmbox1 and Filmbox2 Service engineer: 

Check DSLS03, DSLS06 

ERFPFPDS0005 

5512537 

FP: Insert Filmbox2 correctly A full Filmbox has been recognized although the docking door is 

open. 


Check DSLS03, DSMS01 

ERFPFPDS0006 

5512538 

FP: Close docking door 


Check DSMS01 

ERFPFPDS0007 

5512539 

FP: Docking door cannot be unlocked Check mechanism, unlock manually. 


Check DSMS02, DSMG01 

ERFPFPDS0008 

5512540 

FP: Docking door cannot be locked Check mechanism 



ERFPFPEF0001 

5512541 

FP: Empty CD effluent tank 

The sensor has seen high level for more than 2 sec. 


Check ETFS01 

ERFPFPEF0002 

5512542 

FP: Empty BL effluent tank 



Check ETFS01 

ERFPFPEF0003 

5512543 

FP: Empty FX effluent tank 



Check ETFS03 

ERFPFPEF0004 

5512544 

FP: Empty SB effluent tank 



Check ETFS03 

ERFPFPHT0001 

5512545 

ERFPFPHT0002 

5512546 

ERFPFPHT0003 

5512547 

ERFPFPHT0004 

5512548 

FP: CD heater of the Film Processor 

defective 

FP: BL heater of the Film Processor 

defective 

FP: SB heater of the Film Processor 

defective 

FP: Dryer heater of the Film Processor 

defective 

The temperature rises less than 5°C per hour during preheating. 


Check CTHS01, CTHT01, 90P-SSR-PCB 



Check CTHS02, CTHT02 




The temperature rises less than 5°C in 5 min. during preheating. 


Check DRHS01, DHHT01, DHHT02 

3-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERFPFPLC0001 FP: Remove film from leader cutter The sensor sees film for more than 3 min. during the 

5512593 

initialization of the leader cutter. Film jam in the leader cutter or 

the Stocker. 


Check LCS01, DRLS01 


5512594 


the Stocker. 




5512595 


the Stocker. 



ERFPFPLC0004 

5512596 

FP: Remove film between film dryer 

and leader cutter 

Sensor in leader cutter not covered 30 sec. after the transfer. 


Check LCLS02, DRLS01 

ERFPFPLC0005 

5512597 

FP: Remove film from leader cutter Sensor in leader cutter covered for more than 25 sec. Film jam 

between leader cutter exit and leader cutter blade. 


Check FDDRLS01 

ERFPFPLC0006 

5512598 

FP: Remove film from film leader 

cutter blade 

Leader cutter blade jammed. 


Check LCLS01, LCMO01 

ERFPFPLC0007 

5512599 

FP: Remove film at end of leader 

cutter 

Film jam because of Timeout of the light sensor at the leader 

cutter end. 



ERFPFPLC0008 

5512600 

FP: Remove film between leader 

cutter and Scanner 

Film jam in front of Scanner unit. 



ERFPFPMR0002 

5512549 

FP: Reset the emergency run on the 


A fatal error has occurred during the docking sequence. 


Check the docking unit, reset the emergency run 

ERFPFPMR0003 FP: Filling level error of the 


5512550 replenisher tanks 

Calibration value of the replenishment pump exceeded by 115%. 

Check pumps, valves, filling level sensors and hosing. Then drain 

all replenisher tanks, reset the pumps and start the docking 

sequence again. 

ERFPFPMR0004 FP: Docking error, drain ALL 

An error has occurred while the replenisher tanks were pumped 

5512601 

replenisher tanks (red, yellow, green, empty. Normal operation is possible after emptying the 

blue) of the Film Processor 

replenisher tanks. For this, plug a short piece of hose on the 

drain cocks of the tanks concerned and empty the contents 

completely into a recipient kept ready. 

If the error reoccurs, a machine error is present: Call in a service 

engineer 


Check the replenisher tanks, pumps, sensors, valves, cables and 

the hosing. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-17

Software 



ERFPFPMR0005 

5512602 

ERFPFPMR0006 

5512603 

ERFPFPMR0007 

5512604 

ERFPFPMR0008 

5512605 

FP: Docking error, drain ALL 

replenisher tanks (red, yellow, green, 


FP: Docking error, drain the BL (red), 

FX (green), SB (yellow) replenisher 

tanks of the Film Processor 




FP: Docking error: Drain ALL 

replenisher tanks (red, yellow, green, 


An error has occurred while the replenisher tanks were filled. 

Normal operation is possible after emptying the replenisher 

tanks. For this, plug a short piece of hose on the drain cocks of 

the tanks concerned and empty the contents completely into a 

recipient kept ready. 


engineer 



the hosing. 

Never drain the CD (blue) replenisher tank because the tank 

contents can still be used. 

An error has occurred while the replenisher tanks were pumped 

empty. Normal operation is possible after emptying the 

replenisher tanks. For this, plug a short piece of hose on the 

drain cocks of the tanks concerned and empty the contents 

completely into a recipient kept ready. 


engineer. 



the hosing. 









engineer 



the hosing. 






If the error reoccurs, a machine error is present, call in a service 

engineer. 



the hosing. 

3-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERFPFPMR0009 

5512606 

ERFPFPMR0010 

5512609 

ERFPFPPW0001 

5512551 

ERFPFPPW0004 

5512552 

ERFPFPPW0005 

5512553 

ERFPFPPW0006 

5512554 

ERFPFPPW0007 

5512555 

ERFPFPRK0001 

5512556 




FP: No Docking since 2 Docking 

cycles => Replenishment stopped ! 

FP: Fill up the water tank in the Paper 

Processor 

FP: Fill up the water tank in the Paper 

Processor 

FP: Malfunction of the CD water valve 

FP: Malfunction of the FX water valve 

FP: Malfunction of the SB water valve 

FP: Remove the film jam in the Film 

Processor 








If the error reoccurs, a machine error is present, call in a service 

engineer. 



the hosing. 

No Docking has happened although a Docking should have 

taken places already twice acc. to the number of pump cycles. 

Cause: Manual filling of the replenisher tanks to save box 

chemistry. This is not allowed - replenishment stopped. 


Check PPRWFS01 

The water tank must be topped up before the docking sequence 

is started. 


Check PPRWFS03 

Timeout when filling the replenisher tank. The process can be 

repeated, then the machine goes into emergency mode. 


Air may be in the hosing at the first filling (first Docking). To 

remove the air, briefly open the water tank drain cock (PP side at 

the bottom) until water comes out. 

Check the valve and the hosing. 

Check RTFS01, RTFS05. 

Timeout when filling the replenisher tank during the docking 

sequence. The docking sequence is stopped and the machine 

goes into emergency mode. 






Check RTFS03, RTFS07 

Timeout when filling the replenisher tank during the docking 

sequence. The docking sequence is stopped and the machine 

goes into emergency mode. 






Check RTFS08 

The Leader card is not seen by the sensor at the Film Processor 

outlet 9 min. after it has been fed. 



AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-19

Software 



ERFPFPRK0002 

5512557 

FP: Remove film from film dryer Film jam in film dryer. 



ERFPFPRK0003 

5512558 

FP: Film in Film Processor, switch-off 

only possible after 12 min. 

Safety routine: 

Do not operate the main switch! 

ERFPFPRP0001 FP: CD replenisher tank empty - do An empty replenisher tank has been recognized. Normal 

5512559 not refill 

operation is still possible, the pump calibration is determined 

again for the next Docking sequence. Inform the service 

engineer if the error appears frequently. 


Check the hosing and RTFS1, the pump calibration 

ERFPFPRP0002 FP: BL replenisher tank empty - do An empty replenisher tank has been recognized. Normal 

5512560 

not refill 





Check the hosing and RTFS02, the pump calibration 

ERFPFPRP0003 FP: FX replenisher tank empty - do An empty replenisher tank has been recognized. Normal 






Check the hosing and RTFS03 

ERFPFPRP0004 FP: SB replenisher tank empty - do An empty replenisher tank has been recognized. Normal 






Check the hosing and RTFS04 

ERFPFPRP0006 FP: More than 10 films (135FF-24) Machine stopped because replenishment is not possible during 

5512563 processed during Docking 

the Docking or when the docking sequence is still running after 

a new machine start. Other films can only be processed when 

the docking sequence is finished 

ERFPFPTH0001 

5512564 

FP: Check temperature sensor CD 

heater 

The measured temperature is too low (48° 

C). Sensor defective, check filter. 


Check CTHS01, 90P-SSR-PCB 

ERFPFPTH0002 

5512565 

FP: Check temperature sensor BL 

heater 

The measured temperature is too low (48° C). Sensor defective, check filter. 



ERFPFPTH0003 

5512566 

FP: Check temperature sensor SB 

heater 

The measured temperature is too low (48° C). Sensor defective, check filter. 



ERFPFPTH0004 

5512567 

FP: Check temperature sensor dryer 

heater 

The measured temperature is too low (101° C). Sensor defective. 


Check DRHS01 

ERFPFPTK0001 FP: Fill the CD machine tank with Service engineer: 

5512568 

water (not replenisher!) when FP is Check TKFS01 

empty (Info window) 

3-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERFPFPTK0002 

5512569 

ERFPFPTK0003 

5512570 

ERFPFPTK0004 

5512571 

ERFPFPTK0005 

5512572 

ERFPFPTK0006 

5512573 

ERFPFPTK0007 

5512574 

ERFPFPTM0001 

5512575 

ERFPFPTM0002 

5512576 

ERFPFPTM0003 

5512577 

ERFPFPTM0004 

5512578 

ERFPFRMX0001 

5512579 

ERFPFRMX0002 

5512580 

FP: Fill the BL machine tank with 

water (not replenisher!) when FP is 


FP: Fill the FX1 machine tank with 



FP: Fill the FX2 machine tank with 



FP: Fill the SB1 machine tank with 









FP: CD temperature out of tolerance 

FP: BL temperature out of tolerance 

FP: SB temperature out of tolerance 

FP: Film dryer temperature out of 

tolerance 

FP: CD replenisher filling level error, 

tolerance of the pump exceeded 

FP: BL replenisher filling level error, 



Check TKFS02 


Check TKFS03 


Check TKFS04 


Check TKFS05 


Check TKFS06 


Check TKFS07 

A temperature fault has been found after the reference 

temperature has been reached. 

Clean chemical filter. 


Check CTHT01, CTHS01, FPMO01 





Check CTHT02, CTHS02, FPMO02 





Check CTHT03, CTHS03, FPMO05, FPMO06, FPMO07 



Clean/replace air filter. 


Check DHHT01, DHHT02, DHHS01, DHFA01 

The pump volume is readjusted during the docking sequence. If 

the value differs by more than 30% from the initial value, the 

sequence is interrupted. 


Check hosing, valves, pump 



sequence is interrupted 



AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-21

Software 



ERFPFRMX0003 

5512581 

ERFPFRMX0004 

5512582 

ERFPFRMX0005 

5512583 

ERFPFRMX0006 

5512584 

ERFPFRMX0007 

5512585 

ERFPFRMX0008 

5512586 

ERFPFRMX0009 

5512587 

ERFPFRMX0010 

5512588 

ERFPFROF0001 

5512589 

ERFPFROF0002 

5512590 

FP: FX replenisher filling level error, 


FP: SB replenisher filling level error, 


FP: Docking sequence film processing 

running 

FP: CD replenisher tank cannot be 

pumped empty 

FP: BL replenisher tank cannot be 

pumped empty 

FP: FX replenisher tank cannot be 

pumped empty 

FP: SB replenisher tank cannot be 

pumped empty 

FP: Docking sequence stopped, 

voltages switched off 

FP: CD replenisher tank full 

FP: BL replenisher tank full 











— 

The replenisher tank is not pumped empty within 10 min. after 

the beginning of the docking sequence. Docking sequence 

stopped. 

Reset the emergency run on the machine. 


Check the hosing and the pump 

Check RTFS01, RTFS05, RTFS09 


the beginning of the docking sequence. Docking sequence 

stopped. 




Check RTFS02, RTFS06, RTFS10 


the beginning of the docking sequence. 



Check RTFS03, RTFS07, RTFS11. 


the beginning of the docking sequence. 



Check RTFS04, RTFS08, RTFS12. 

The docking sequence continues when the message is confirmed 

and the voltages are switched on again. This fault also occurs in 

case the EEPROM is cleared by resetting the emergency mode 

(INC, INN). 

The top filling level sensor has been triggered for more than 

0.5 sec. 


Check RTFS09, drain the replenisher tank level down to sensor 

level RTFS05 -> reset the emergency run. 


0.5 sec. 




3-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERFPFROF0003 FP: FX replenisher tank full 

5512591 

ERFPFROF0004 

5512592 

ERFPFROF0005 

5512608 

ERFPUNKN0001 

5512500 

FP: SB replenisher tank full 

FP: Replenisher tank too full, water 

valve defective 

FP: Unknown error, inform the service 


0.5 sec. 





0.5 sec. 




The replenisher tank was filled too much during the Docking. 


Check the water valve and the sensors of the replenisher tanks. 

FP: Unknown error, inform the service 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-23

Software 




ERCDTEMP__00 

5516513 

ERCDTEMP__01 

5516586 

ERCFCAN___00 

5516500 

ERCFCPU___00 

5516502 

ERCFFPO___00 

5516503 

ERCFIOU___00 

5516504 

SC: overtemperature in the CCD power 

output stages 

SC: Warning, high temperature in the 

CCD power output stages 

SC: Internal communication error in the 

Scanner (CF00) 

SC: Internal error in Cartridge Feeder 

SC: Insert the APS cassette again - spool 

core in the wrong position 

SC: Remove the APS cassette - film 

cannot be unwound 

The temperature of the CCD power output stages has 

exceeded the critical value. If the temperature rises any 

further, the Scanner may get damaged. The Scanner is 

switched off for safety reasons. 

Clean air filter (fan box) or replace it. 


Check the fan and the temperature sensor for the CCD Driver 

Board 

The temperature of the CCD electronic has reached the 

warning threshold. Scanning is still possible. In case of overtemperature 

the Scanner is switched off. 

Clean the air filter (fan box) or replace it 


Check the fan, reduce the ambient temperature, check 

temperature sensor for the CCD Driver Board. 

An error has occurred in the communication with the 

Cartridge Feeder via the CAN-Bus. 

Switch off the machine and start again. If the error reappears, 

inform a service engineer. 


Check the wiring, replace the Cartridge Feeder. 

The CPU of the Cartridge Feeder reports an internal error. 

Switch off the machine and start again. If the error reappears, 

inform a service engineer. 


Replace the Cartridge Feeder 

The spool core of the APS cassette is not positioned correctly 

in the Cartridge Feeder. 

Remove the APS cassette, check it and reinsert it. Remove 

the film from the cassette and scan it with the Film Feeder. 

Test other cassettes, switch off the machine and start again. 

If the error reappears with different cassettes, inform a 

service engineer. 



The Cartridge Feeder reports overcurrent upon unwinding. 

Remove film, if necessary release the film clamp with the 

Stop key, check the cassette. Test other cassettes, switch off 

the machine and start again. If the error reappears with 

different cassettes, inform a service engineer. 



3-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERCFIRV___00 

5516505 

SC: Remove the APS cassette - film 

cannot be rewound 

The Cartridge Feeder reports overcurrent upon rewinding. 

Remove film, if necessary clear the film clamp with the Stop 

key and check the cassette. Test other cassettes, switch off 

the machine and start again. If the error reappears with 

different cassettes, inform a service engineer. 



ERCFNDV___00 

5516506 

SC: Remove the APS cassette - film not 

processed 

The Cartridge Feeder has discovered that the lug on the APS 

cassette is not pressed in (sufficiently) for a developed film. 

Remove the film, push in the lug for a developed film, test 

other cassettes, switch off the machine and start again. If the 

error reappears with other cassettes, inform a service 

engineer. 



ERCFNFI___00 

5516507 

SC: Put APS cassette in Cartridge Feeder No cassette seen in the Cartridge Feeder. 


If the error reappears with other cassettes, inform a service 

engineer. 



ERCFNOP___00 SC: Door of APS cassette cannot be Remove the cassette from the Cartridge Feeder and check 

5516508 

opened 

the door function. Test other cassettes, switch off the 

machine and start again. If the error reappears with other 

cassettes, inform a service engineer. 



ERCFNRV___00 

5516509 

SC: Film jam - film cannot be rewound The Cartridge Feeder cannot rewind the film. Film jamming. 

Remove the film, if required, release the film with the Stop 

key. 

Test other cassettes, check the film drive, switch off the 





ERCFNSP___00 

5516510 

SC: Film cannot be unwound 

The film in the Cartridge Feeder cannot be unwound 

Remove the cassette, check it and reinsert it. 


Test other cassettes, check the film drive, switch off the 



ERCFOPN___00 

5516511 

SC: Flap open - remove APS cassette Flap of the APS cassette open. 

Remove the cassette, close the flap. 



If the error reappears with different cassettes, replace the 

Cartridge Feeder. 

ERCFREPORT00 

5516512 

SC: Internal communication error from 

Cartridge Feeder 

CAN report error from Cartridge Feeder. 


Switch off the machine and start again. Check the wiring. If 

the error reoccurs replace the Cartridge Feeder. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-25

Software 



ERCFUNK___00 SC: Unknown error from Cartridge Feeder 

5516542 

ERCMMO01__0 

0 

5516517 

ERCSTEMP__00 

5516501 

ERCSTEMP__01 

5516585 

ERFFFILMCB00 

5516588 

ERFFFILMFE00 

5516578 

ERFFFILMQU00 

5516579 

ERFFFILMSY00 

5516593 

ERFFMO01__00 

5516514 

SC: Initialization error of the lens motor 

SC: CCD temperature has exceeded the 

critical value 

SC: Warning, high CCD temperature 

SC: Remove the film from the Film Feeder 

- calibration running 

SC: Remove film from Film Feeder 

SC: Remove film - film may get damaged 

by Feeder jaws 

SC: Check whether there is a film in the 

Feeder and remove it, if an 

SC: Initialization error of the Film Feeder 

motor (Feeder width) 

The Cartridge Feeder has reported an error not known to the 

Scanner. 



the error reoccurs, replace the Cartridge Feeder. 

Initialization error of the bifocal lens motor. 



the error reoccurs, replace the lens or the Driver Sensor 

Board. 

The CCD may get damaged if the temperature rises any 

further. The machine is switched off for safety reasons. 

Clean/replace the air filter (fan box) 

Reduce the ambient temperature. 


Check the fan and the temperature sensor for the CCD 

The temperature of the CCD electronic has reached the 

warning threshold. Scanning is still possible. In case of overtemperature 

the Scanner is switched off. 

Clean the air filter (fan box) or replace it 

Reduce the ambient temperature. 


Check the fan and the temperature sensor for CCD 

No film should be in the Feeder during the calibration. 


Check FF_LS04 

The film strip has not been removed from the Film Feeder 

after it has been unwound 


Check FF_LS04 

The film was fed into the closing Feeder. Feeder movement 

stopped until the film is removed again. 


Check FF_LS04 

It was found upon the Scanner initialization that the Feeder 

light sensor was covered. This may be due to a film in the 

Feeder or to a Feeder skid almost closed. The Feeder width 

setting is not initialized for safety reasons. 

Remove the film (if existing), then confirm the error message. 


If this message appears again after several Scanner 

initializations without a film, check the light sensor FF_LS04 

and the Feeder width motor FF_MO01. 

Initialization error of the motor for the Feeder width. Zero 

position of the Feeder cannot found. 


Check the motor movement FF_MO01, LS_FF01 and the 

wiring. 

Switch off the machine and start again. If the error reoccurs, 

replace the motor, the sensor or the Driver Sensor Board. 

3-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERFFNOFILM00 

5516582 

ERFS_TOUT100 

5516580 

ERFS_TOUT200 

5516581 

ERFSMO01__00 

5516516 

ERFSMO02__00 

5516515 

ERHWCAN_OF00 

5516520 

ERHWI2CERR00 

5516592 

SC: Remove film manually - no film 

movement recognized 

SC: Timeout at film transfer from FP to 

SC, no film recognized 

SC: Timeout at film transfer from FP to 

SC, no end of film recognized 

SC: Initialization of the motor in the film 

supply failed 

SC: Activation of the film drive motor in 

the film supply failed 

SC: Internal communication error 

SC: Data communication failures on the 

I2C-Bus 

No moving film was detected in the Film Feeder during film 

ejection. 

Check whether the film has really been removed completely 

and remove it from the film drive by hand, if necessary. 


Check FF_LS04 

Remove the film from the film buffer or remove the film jam 

in the FP if any. 


Timeout between Film Processor signal 'FP-FILMIN' active 

and the arrival of the film in the film supply. 

Check FF_LS03, FS_MO01 and FS_MO02. 

Remove the film from the film stocker or remove the film 

jam in the Film Processor, if any. 


Timeout between the arrival of the film in the film supply 

and the inactive Prosser signal "FP-FILMIN". Check film length 

(

Software 



ERHWI2CLCK00 

5516590 

SC: I2C-Bus error 

The data line of the I2C-Bus in the Scanner is set to a 

permanent LOW by a component connected to the bus. 

It is not possible to continue working with the Scanner. 

Push the STOP key, switch the machine OFF/ON if necessary. 


Check the PCBs concerned: 

CD CCD-Driver-Board 

CS CCD-Scan-Head 

DS Driver-Sensor Board 

MB Motherboard 

MD Magnet Decoder 

SC Scanner-Main-Board 

ERHWPROMRD0 

0 

5516529 

ERHWPROMWR 

00 

5516530 

SC: Error when reading the EEPROM 

configuration data 

SC: Error when writing the EEPROM 

configuration data 

The EEPROMs hold important data which the Scanner needs 

for correct functioning. Default values are used. 

Reset the Scanner by pressing the 'Stop' key to trigger 

another reading process. 

If this error reoccurs or if the Scanner still does not function 

correctly, call in a service engineer. 


If this error occurs in conjunction with the I2C-Bus 

communication error, the corresponding Eprom cannot be 

read: In this case error removal acc. to the I2C-Bus error 

message. 

Without aI2C-Bus communication error, the Eprom can be 

read, but it does not contain data: In this case, the Eprom is 

reinitialized. The saved data is lost, no other error message 

will be output. 

Details can be found in the Log file: Search error code 

"HWPROMRD00". 

Meaning of the shortcuts in the Log file: 







Switch off the machine and start it again. 

Call a service engineer if the error reoccurs. 


Search "HWPROMWR" in the Log file. It is explained there 

what type of Eprom it is and on which board it is located 

– Check the wiring to this board 

– Replace the board 

If several entries of different boards appear in the Log file, 

the whole I2C-Bus is concerned and the reason for the fault 

may be elsewhere: check all cables and all boards. 

Meaning of the shortcuts in the Log file: 







3-28 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERICCAND__00 

5516538 

ERLM_LOWLI00 

5516539 

ERLM_LOWLI01 

5516540 

ERMDCAN___00 

5516543 

ERMDCPU___00 

5516544 

ERNC_NOEND00 

5516545 

SC: Unknown error message from the 

Scanner Controller 

SC: Light path jammed or mirror box not 

mounted 

SC: Film mask calibration failed - light 

path not free 

SC: Internal communication error with 

APS magnetic decoder 

SC: Error message from the APS magnetic 

decoder 

SC: End of film not recognized 

Undefined error message reported from the Prescan area in 

the Scanner Controller. Switch off the machine and start it 

again. 


If the error reoccurs, check the Scanner Firmware and 

perform an Update if necessary. Replace the Scanner Main 

Board. Send the Log files and an error description to R&D. 

Not enough light available for the determination of the white 

reference of the density measurement or for the calibration 

of the (Pre-)Scanner. 

Initialization is repeated after confirmation of the error 

message. 

– Light path not free (e.g. film in film mask) 

– No mirror box mounted 

– Prescanner in the lens maladjusted 

– LED failed 

– Lens defective 

– Check Scanner electronic, wiring, CCD electronic 


Check the above items 

The Prescanner cannot calibrate the film mask. 

Not enough light available for the calibration of the 

(Pre-)Scanner. 

– Light path not free (e.g. film in film mask) 

– No mirror box mounted 

– Prescanner in the lens maladjusted 


– Lens defective 

– Check Scanner electronic, wiring, CCD electronic 


Check the above items 

An error has occurred in the communication with the APS 

magnetic decoder via the CAN-Bus. 


Switch off the machine and start again. Check the CAN cable 

to the Cartridge Feeder, the termination resistors (Dip-Switch) 

on the Motherboard and the Cartridge Feeder 

Replace the magnetic decoder electronic. 

The Controller for the APS magnetic data reports an error in 

the CPU. Switch off the machine and start again. 


Replace the magnetic decoder electronic. 

Remove film and scan it again. 

The Prescanner has not seen the end of the film. 


Check the film length (

Software 



ERNC_NOEND01 SC: End of film not recognized 

The film transport motor has reached a maximum admissible 

5516553 

number of steps without the Prescanner having seen an end 

of film. The film must not be longer than 2 m. 

For films < 2m the reason may be a mechanical jam or a too 

important slippage. Reinitialize the Scanner (Stop key). 


Check the film track and the film drive 

ERNC_SLIPP00 SC: Maximum slippage exceeded The slip correction has found that there is too much slippage 

5516546 

when the film is positioned 

– Remove the film and reinsert it 

– Clean the pressure rollers acc. to the maintenance 

schedule 

– Insert the film in opposite direction 

– Check the film for damage 


Check the pressure rollers 

ERNCAPSCUT00 SC: The film may be damaged. Remove The end of the APS film is not cut straight or is cut 

5516547 

the film from the takeup after having irregularly. When moving back, there is the risk that the film 

confirmed the error message. 

gets damaged on the film rocker. 

The end of the APS film must be cut straight or must not be 

taken out of the APS cassette. 

The film moves into the Takeup. 

To be able to position the film all the same, this check can 

be deactivated by entering "APSEN0" in the machine 

configuration file for the Scanner ("dlab_sc.cfg") 

ERNCAPSEND00 SC: Remove film from Takeup - end of The end of the APS film cannot be identified by the 

5516549 film not recognized 

perforation. The film was drawn in too far. There is the risk 

that the film gets damaged when positioned. Process 

stopped. 


Check the perforation of the film and the distance between 

the perforation and the end of the film. 

Fasten the film again in the cassette. 

The film can also be scanned without the cassette. For this, 

cut the end of the film straight and feed the film through the 

Feeder. 

ERNCAPSPOS00 SC: End of film not cut straight - damage The end of the APS film is not cut straight or is cut 

5516548 possible 

irregularly. When moving back, there is the risk that the film 

gets damaged on the film rocker. 

The end of the APS film must be cut straight or must not be 

taken out of the APS cassette. 

Continue by confirming the message. Film removal with 

"STOP". 

As an alternative error handling, the film can be moved into 

the takeup in this case. For this, command "APSEN1" must 

be entered in the machine configuration file for the Scanner 

("dlab_sc.cfg"). 

3-30 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERNCJAM_FL00 

5516550 

SC: Remove film - film tip not recognized The film tip cannot be recognized during Prescanning. 


– Film jam 


Reinitialize the Scanner (STOP key) 



ERNCJAM_FL01 

5516551 

SC: Remove film - film jam in film mask The film was not seen to move during film positioning. 

Cause: 

– Film jam. 

– LEDs not supplying enough light for the perforation 

detection. 

Check the film drive for mechanical obstacles and scan the 

film again. 

Check the film for damage and reinitialize the Scanner (Stop 

key). 


Check the film track, the film drive and the lighting 

ERNCLONGFL00 

5516552 

SC: Film too long 

The film must not be longer than 2 m: separate the film. 

For films < 2m the reason may be a mechanical jam or a too 

important slippage. Reinitialize the Scanner (Stop key). 



ERNCNCFILM00 SC: Remove negative from film mask After the insertion of a film mask 135 in the standard mode, 

5516576 

a negative inserted in the mask has been detected. Light 

path not free! 

Reinitialize the Scanner (Stop key). 


Check the light path (mirror box, film mask, LED´s, lens). 

ERNCNCFILM01 SC: Film in film mask during change of There are still negatives in the mask when the mode is 

5516583 mode - remove film 

changed from standard to single negative (manual 

positioning) or vice versa. They must be removed to start the 

calibration. 



Check the light path (mirror box, film mask, LED´s, lens) 

ERNCNCFILM02 

5516584 

SC: Calibration failed - remove film A film has been detected in the film mask during the 

calibration. If must be removed to start the calibration. 




ERNCSRFILM00 SC: Prescan failed - remove film 

A film has been detected in the film mask during 

5516574 

Prescanning or the light path (mirror box) is not free. Remove 

the negative and reinitialize the Scanner (Stop key). 



ERNCSRFREI00 

5516575 

SC: Prescan not possible - put in negative 

or film strip 

If the film mask is pulled in the manual positioning mode, a 

negative or a film strip is expected in the film mask. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-31

Software 



ERNM_ILL__00 

5516541 

SC: Mount film mask 

Film mask missing or not matching. 

Switch off the machine and start it again. 


Check SF_LS01 to SF_LS06 and wiring. 

ERNM_NCARR00 SC: Calibration without film mask When trying to switch to the "calibration mode with film 

5516557 required - remove film mask 

mask", the Scanner has found that a film mask is mounted. 

This calibration is not possible with a film mask. 

ERNM_NO_NC00 SC: Autofocus running - push in the It was found during the slide Autofocus that the slide holder 

5516556 slide 

is not or no longer inserted. After the slide holder has been 

inserted, the Autofocus is determined again. 

ERNMCHANGE00 

5516559 

SC: Unauthorized change of the mask 

during calibration or exposure 

The film mask must not be removed during a calibration or 

an exposure. This calibration or exposure cannot be used. 

The calibration must be started again: either by changing the 

film mask or by menu selection 

ERNMCHANGE01 

5516587 

SC: Scanning - film mask moved 

although it was locked 

The Scanner is in the scanning or calibration mode. 

Leave the film mask inserted until the current operation is 

finished. 

The film mask can only be removed after the locking has 

been released. 

ERNMCODE__00 

5516560 

SC: Unknown film mask 

The Scanner cannot work with the inserted film mask as its 

coding cannot be defined. 

Check the film mask coding. 


Check SF_LS01 to SF_LS06 

ERSC_HARDW00 

5516537 

SC: Hardware fault on the Scanner Main 

Board 

A Hardware fault has occurred on the Scanner Mainboard 


Switch off the machine and start it again. If the error 

reoccurs, replace the Scanner Motherboard. 

ERSCAPL___00 

5516536 

SC: General error of the automatic 

positioning logic 

The positioning logic has reported an internal error. 

Insert the film in opposite direction and scan it again. 


Send the film and the Log files to the R&D for assessment. 

ERSCDL____00 

5516521 

SC: Repeat Download - unauthorized 

process 

Unauthorized Download process. Download stopped. 


Error in the command sequence from the computer system to 

the Scanner. 

Switch off the d-lab and the computer system and start them 

again. 

Start the Download again. 

ERSCDLCANC00 

5516522 


command received 

Download stopped. 


A SY was sent during the Download. Start the Download 

again. 

ERSCDLDREF00 

5516523 


process 

Unauthorized process upon Download. Download stopped. 


The bootstrap has received a Download telegram without 

having been switched to the Download mode before. Start 

the Download again. 

3-32 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERSCDLFAIL00 

5516524 


process 

Unauthorized process upon Download. Download stopped. 


Download end command sent to the bootstrap without the 

Download having been started with Download Request. Start 

the Download again. 

ERSCDLNORN00 SC: Start Download - no main module Service engineer: 

5516525 

existing 

Process fault: The Scanner Firmware cannot be executed as 

no valid main module exists. Run Download. 

ERSCDLRDWR00 SC: Repeat Download - error upon Service engineer: 

5516526 

Download 

Error in den Download data or when storing in the Flash- 

PROM. 

Check Firmware and run Download if necessary, replace the 

Scanner Mainboard. 

ERSCDLREFU00 SC: Download of the subassembly The bootstrap of the SC Controller cannot perform a 

5516527 rejected 

Download of the sub-assembly (FPGA). The cycle control 

must start the main program first with the commands "Make 

ready" or "Run". 


ServiceGUI in the Commands Scanner: 

– Power Off => On 

– SY check, when SY512 comes => download main_sc 

on SC-Controller 

– SY 

– download of lk1 on FPGA 

– SY 

– Version check 

– ON-RESET 

ERSCDLWDRS00 SC: Watchdog Reset - call the service It was found in the Downloader that there is a Watchdog 

5516589 

Reset. This is a fatal error. If this error only occurs 

occasionally, work can be continued normally. 

Switch off the machine and start again. 


Machine data and protocol files to R&D 

ERSCDLWRFL00 

5516528 

SC: Repeat Download - error upon 

Download 

Wrong Software version or programming errors. 

Check the version numbers of the Software package. 


Error when entering data in the Flash-PROM. Faulty check 

sum of the data or wrong version for the SC Controller. Check 

the Firmware and run Download if necessary, replace the 

Scanner Mainboard. 

ERSCFPGA__00 

5516518 

SC: FPGA cannot be configured An error has occurred during the FPGA configuration on the 

Scanner Mainboard; the system does not function. 

Inform a service engineer if the error reoccurs. 

Service engineer. 

Check the voltages 

Replace the Scanner Mainboard 

ERSCINT_AB00 SC: Internal error 


5516531 

Switch off the machine and start it again. If the error 

reoccurs, search the error code in the Log file and follow the 

advice in the Debug messages. 

Check the Scanner Firmware and perform an Update if 

required. Replace the Scanner Main Board. Send the Log files 

and an error description to R&D. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-33

Software 



ERSCPNSGL_00 SC: Single frames are not positioned PN command sent after SR2. 

5516563 

ERSCSCI_AC00 

5516532 

SC: Communication problem with Main No confirmation of receipt received from Main, 


Adjust the Software version of the computer system and the 

Scanner Firmware. Check the wiring. Replace the Scanner 

Main Motherboard or the Motherboard. 

ERSCSCI_OV00 

5516533 

SC: Communication error with Main - 

buffer overflow 

Scan Interface sends buffer overflow. 


Adjust the Software version of the computer system and the 

Scanner Firmware. Check the wiring. Replace the Scanner 

Main Motherboard or the Motherboard. 

ERSCTEMP__00 SC: Warning, high temperature in the The temperature of the Scanner electronic (Scanner-Main- 

5516534 

Scanner electronic 

Board) has reached the warning threshold, Scanning is still 

possible. In case of overtemperature the Scanner is switched 

off. 


Check the fan and the filter, reduce the ambient temperature. 

ERSCTEMP__01 SC: Scanner switched off! 

The temperature of the Scanner electronic has exceeded the 

5516535 

Overtemperature in the Scanner critical value. If the temperature continues to rise, the 

electronic 

electronic (Scanner-Main-Board) may get damaged. The 

machine is switched off for safety reasons. 

All motors are switched off. The Scanner can only be started 

again by resetting it with the 'Stop' key. 


Check fan, fan filter and temperature sensor on the Scanner 

Main Board. 

ERSFMO01__00 

5516554 

SC: Initialization of the film transport 

motor failed 

Initialization error of the film transport motor. 

Reinitialize the Scanner with the 'STOP' key 


Check SF_MO01 

ERSFMO02__00 

5516555 

SC: Initialization of the film pressure 

motor failed 

Initialization error of the motor of the film pressure rollers 

and the negative pressure. Zero position not found. 


Check SF_MO02 and SF_LS07 

ERSFSTEPOR00 

5516591 

SC: Film transport step width beyond 

admissible limits 

Check the film transport drive rollers, clean them if 

necessary 


Check the drive rollers, replace if necessary 

ERSU_UNK__00 

5516564 

SC: Unknown error - Push STOP key An unknown error index was sent internally. 

Reinitialize the Scanner with the 'STOP' key 


Software bug. If it reoccurs, send the Log files and an error 

description to R&D. 

3-34 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERSUCALPRE00 

5516561 

SC: Calibration of the Prescanner failed An error has occurred during the Prescanner calibration. 

The Prescanner does not see enough light, the light path is 

not free. 

– Remove the negative or the film scraps from the film 

mask 

– Mount the mirror box 


Check the Prescanner and lens adjustment, check the LED 

lamphouse and the Scanner electronic 

ERSUCALPRE01 

5516558 

SC: Prescanner not calibrated 

Attempt to start a scanning process although the Prescanner 

has not been calibrated. 

Calibration must be started again. 

ERSUCALPRE02 

5516562 

SC: Wait... Prescanner calibration 

running 

Message during the calibration for the strip mode. 

This is no error. 

ERVOM15___00 SC: Power supply (-15V) not stable - The fluctuations are within the tolerance limits. Scanning is 

5516565 scanning is possible 

still possible. The Scanner is stopped if major voltage 

fluctuations occur 


Check external power supply (in-house network) and 

machine power supply unit. 

ERVOM15___01 

5516566 

SC: Power supply (-15V) out of 

tolerance - Scanner switched off 

The voltage differs too much from the reference value -15V. 

Safe functioning of the Scanner is no longer ensured. 


Check wiring (power supply unit to the Driver Sensor Board, 

Driver Sensor Board to the Motherboard), machine power 

supply unit, external power supply (in-house network). 

ERVOP18___00 SC: Power supply (+18V) not stable - The fluctuations are within the tolerance limits. Scanning is 

5516567 

scanning is possible 






ERVOP18___01 

5516568 

SC: Power supply (+18V) out of 


The voltage differs too much from the reference value +18V. 






ERVOP24___00 SC: Power supply (+24V) not stable - The fluctuations are within the tolerance limits. Scanning is 

5516569 







ERVOP24___01 

5516570 

SC: Power supply (+24V) out of 


The voltage differs too much from the reference value +24V. 






AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-35

Software 



ERVOP65___00 

5516571 

ERVOP65___01 

5516572 

ERZOCAN___00 

5516573 

SC: Power supply (+6,5V) not stable - 


SC: Power supply (+6,5V) out of 


SC: Internal communication error with 

the Zoom 

The fluctuations are within the tolerance limits. Scanning is 






The voltage differs too much from the reference value +6,5V. 






An error has occurred in the communication with the Zoom 

via the CAN-Bus. 


Switch off the machine and start again. Check the CAN cable 

to the Zoom. Check the termination resistors (Dip-Switch) on 

the Motherboard and the Zoom. Replace the Zoom. 

3-36 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 

3.2.3 Print Engine (PE) / Exposure Controller (EC) 


ERECEC__0000 

5511538 

PE: Warning, high temperature on EC 

board 

Exposure still possible. 

Clean air filter (fan box). 


Fan and wiring EC board - check fan. 

ERECEC__0001 

5511539 

PE: Overtemperature on the EC board Exposure no longer possible. 

Clean air filter (fan). 



ERECEC__0002 

5511540 

PE: Error in the parameter file on the EC 

board 

Exposure not possible. 


Check the parameters in the EEPROM of the EC board. 

ERECEC__0004 

5511542 

PE: Failures of the data communication 

on the EC board 


Failures of the data communication of the I2C-Bus on the EC 

board. 


Replace the EC board if the failures reoccurs. 

ERECEC__0005 

5511543 

PE: Failure of the EC board power supply Exposure not possible. 

Voltages of the EC board not within the authorized operating 

range. 


Check the power supply to the print engine, measure the 

voltages, check the connector, the wiring. Replace the EC 

board. 

ERECEC__7000 PE: Error of the exposure command Exposure not possible. 

5511557 

between the image processor and the 

An invalid parameter or an error has been found in the 

print engine 

exposure command from the image processor to the EC 

board. 


Check Software of the image processor. 

ERECEC__7001 

5511558 

PE: Invalid calibration for dosed exposure Exposure not possible. 

Calibration values for dosed exposure missing or invalid. 


Calibrate print engine. 

ERECEC__7002 

5511559 

PE: Different image ID in print engine and 



Expose and PaperReady command have different Image IDs. 

ERECEC__7005 PE: Invalid value in the machine Exposure not possible. 

5511562 

configuration of the print engine (MCEC 

The MC command of the main computer to the exposure 

commands) 

control (EC) holds invalid values. 



Error in the program cycle of the main 

Error in the program cycle of the main computer or defective 

computer or defective initialization file. 

initialization file. 

ERECEC__9999 

5511545 

PE: Fatal Hardware fault on the exposures 

control board (EC) 


A fatal Hardware fault has been found by the exposure 

control (EC). 


Replace the exposure control board (EC). 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-37

Software 



ERECLB__0000 

5511527 

PE: Warning, high temperature of the 

blue LED (LB) 





ERECLB__0001 

5511528 

PE: Error, overtemperature of the blue 

LED (LB) 

Exposure no longer possible. 

Clean air filter (fan box) 



ERECLB__0002 

5511529 

PE: Error in the parameter file of the blue 

LED (LB) 



Check the parameters in the EEPROM of the blue LED (LB). 

ERECLB__0004 

5511531 

PE: Data communication error with the 

blue LED (LB) 


Data communication failures between the I2C-Bus and the 

blue LED (LB). 


Check the cable connection to the blue LED (LB). 

If failures reoccur, replace the blue LED (LB) or the EC board. 

ERECLB__9999 

5511566 

PE: Fatal Hardware fault of the blue LED 

(LB) 


A fatal Hardware fault has been found on the blue LED (LB). 


Replace the blue LED 

ERECLD__0000 

5511500 

PE: Warning, high temperature on the LD 

Board 





ERECLD__0001 

5511501 

PE: Error, overtemperature on the LD 

Board 





ERECLD__0002 

5511507 

PE: Error of the parameter file on the LD 

Board 

Exposure not possible. Service engineer: 

Check the parameters in the EEPROM of the LD Boards. 

ERECLD__0004 

5511503 


LCD driver board (LD) 



LCD driver board (LD). 


Check cable connection to the LCD driver board (LD). 

If failures reoccur, replace the LCD driver board (LD) or the EC 

board. 

ERECLD__1003 

5511570 

PE: LCD driver board LD failed 

Exposure no longer possible. Error of the LCD driver board LD. 

Shut down the machine completely and cut the power 

switch. If the error reoccurs, inform a service technician. 

Possible cause: SYNC error, overtemperature, voltage error, 

FPGA error, calibration error 


Check the image processor (IPU), the DVI cable, the graphic 

card in the IPU or replace the LCD driver board. 

3-38 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERECLD__9999 

5511569 

PE: Fatal Hardware fault on the LCD driver 

board (LD) 


A fatal Hardware fault has been found on the LCD driver 

board (LD). 


Replace the LCD driver board (LD). 

ERECLG__0000 

5511521 

PE: Warning, high temperature of the 

green LED (LG) 





ERECLG__0001 

5511522 

PE: Error, overtemperature of the green 

LED (LG) 





ERECLG__0002 

5511523 

PE: Error in the parameter file of the 




Check the parameters in the EEPROM of the green LED (LG). 

ERECLG__0004 

5511525 





green LED (LG). 


Check the cable connection to the green LED (LG). 

If failures reoccur, replace the green LED (LG) or the EC board. 

ERECLG__9999 

5511567 

PE: Fatal Hardware fault of the green 

LED (LG) 


A fatal Hardware fault has been found on the green LED (LG). 


Replace the green LED (LG). 

ERECLR__0000 

5511515 

PE: Warning, high temperature of the red 

LED (LR) 





ERECLR__0001 

5511516 

PE: Error, overtemperature of the red 

LED (LR) 





ERECLR__0002 

5511517 

PE: Error in the parameter file of the red 

LED (LR) 



Check the parameters in the EEPROM of the red LED (LR). 

ERECLR__0004 

5511519 


red LED (LR) 



red LED (LR). 


Check the cable connection to the red LED (LR). 

If failures reoccur, replace the red LED (LR) or the EC board. 

ERECLR__9999 

5511568 

PE: Fatal Hardware fault of the red 

LED (LR) 


A fatal Hardware fault has been found on the red LED (LR). 


Replace the red LED (LR). 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-39

Software 



ERECMZ__0000 

5511508 

PE: Warning, high temperature on the MZ 

Controller 





ERECMZ__0001 

5511509 

PE: Error, overtemperature on the MZ 

Controller 





ERECMZ__0002 

5511510 

PE: Error in the parameter file of the MZ 

Controller. 



Check the parameter in the MZ Controller. 

ERECMZ__0004 

5511512 


MZ Controller (MZ) 



MZ Controller (MZ). 


Check cable connection to the MZ Controller (MZ) 

If failures reoccur, replace MZ Controller (MZ) or EC board. 

ERECMZ__0005 

5511513 

PE: Failure of the power supply of the MZ 

Controller (MZ) 


The voltage of the MZ Controller (MZ) is not within the 

admissible operating range. 


Check the power supply to the print engine (measure the 

voltages, connectors, wiring), connection and wiring to the 

MZ Controller (MZ). 

Replace MZ Controller or EC board. 

ERECMZ__5000 

5511554 

PE: Firmware error of the MZ Controller Exposure not possible. 

Firmware of the MZ Controller defective. 


Replace the MZ Controller or update the Firmware 

ERECMZ__9999 

5511565 

PE: Fatal Hardware fault on the MZ 

Controller (MZ) 


A fatal Hardware fault has been found on the MZ 

Controller (MZ). 


Replace MZ Controller (MZ). 

ERECPD__0000 

5511533 

PE: Warning, high temperature on the 

LCD 





ERECPD__0001 

5511534 

PE: Error, overtemperature on the LCD Exposure no longer possible. 




ERECPD__0002 

5511535 

PE: Error in the parameter file of the PD 

board 



Check the parameters on the PD board. 

3-40 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERECPD__0004 

5511537 


photodetector (PD) 



photodetector (PD). 


Check cable connection to the photodetector (PD). 

If failures reoccur, replace photodetector board (PD) or EC 

board. 

ERECPD__9999 

5511564 

PE: Fatal Hardware fault on the 

photodetector (PD) 


A fatal Hardware fault has been found on the 

photodetector (PD). 


Replace photodetector (PD) or temperature sensor (TS). 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-41

Software 




ERPAACPU0002 PA: Download CPU Board failed 

5514501 

ERPAACPU0003 

5514502 

ERPAACPU0004 

5514503 

ERPAACPU0008 

5514532 

ERPAAEMS0001 

5514504 

ERPACNST0001 

5514527 

ERPACUTT0001 

5514523 

ERPACUTT0002 

5514524 

ERPADOOR0001 

5514525 

ERPADOOR0002 

5514526 

ERPADOOR0003 

5514534 

ERPAECPU0005 

5514528 

PA: Check sum error during Download 

PA: EEPROM Delete / Write error during 

Download 

PA: Reload the machine settings, they are 

defective 

PA emergency button pushed! 

PA: Remove control strip box 

PA: Failure RH cutter unit 

PA: Failure LH cutter unit 

PA: Close the Printer door 

PA: Printer door opened during the 

exposure 

PA: Printer door open, no paper exposed 

PA: Communication problem between PA 

and EC 

The EEPROM cannot be cleared during Download, operation 

failed. 


Repeat the operation or replace the PCB 

Firmware version file (SW) damaged or wrong. 

Select the correct file and try again. 

Service engineer:Repeat the Download manually 

Delete / Write error during Download. It has not been 

possible to save the data (MC+Docking) after 2 attempts. 


Try again or replace the PCB 

The machine settings were overwritten with the Default 

settings. The machine then works with the faulty standard 

values. Load the last correct data backup in the menu item 

Settings > Load settings > Machine settings. 


Check the MC data of the assembly group in the cfg files. If it 

is correct, set the parameter VALID to 1. Then save it and 

load it into the assembly group and into the data base. 

When the emergency switch is pressed, the Printer and the 

Paper Processor are stopped. Remove the error, confirm the 

message. 

Remove the control strip box from the exposure table. 


Check VCLS01 

The RH cutter unit cannot be operated. 


Remove the cutter unit and check it 

Check PCLS07 and PSMO01 

The LH cutter unit cannot be operated. 


Remove the cutter unit and check it 

Check PCLS08 and PSMO02 

Printer door open or sensor defective. 


Check MFMS01 

Print damaged by scattered light. 


Check MFMS01 

The door was opened without requiring the stop of the order. 

EC-CPU does not respond to the command from the paper 

transport (PA). 


Check the RS232 cables (X16/X18) and the connectors 

3-42 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERPAECPU0007 

5514529 

ERPALNDS0001 

5514517 

ERPALNDS0002 

5514518 

ERPALNDS0003 

5514519 

ERPALNDS0004 

5514520 

ERPALNDS0005 

5514521 

ERPALNDS0006 

5514522 

ERPALNDS0007 

5514531 

ERPAMGDL0001 

5514506 

ERPAMGDL0002 

5514507 

PA: EC-CPU reset, start the machine 

again 

PA: Remove paper jam between exposure 

table and Lane Distributor 

PA: Remove paper jam in back printer 

PA: Remove paper jam in Lane Distributor 

(middle) 

PA: Remove paper jam in Paper Processor 

feed 

PA: Remove malfunction of sledge in 

Lane Distributor 

PA: Paper too large for lane distribution 

PA: Remove the paper jam in the Lane 

Distributor 

PA: Paper jam at end of paper LHS 

PA: Paper in paper magazine LHS 

The paper transport (PA) has noticed a RESET of the EC, the 

print engine has reinitialized itself. 

The machine is in an undefined status and has to be 

restarted. 


Check the power supply and the cable on the EC 

Remove the paper from the Lane Distributor entrance. 


Check LDLS01, LDMO01, PAMO01 

Paper jam detected in the Lane Distributor in the back printer 

area. 

Remove the paper from the Lane Distributor. 



Paper jam in the Lane Distributor behind the back printer. 



Check LDLS08, LDLS09, LDMO05 

Paper jam between the top area of the Lane Distributor and 

the wet section. 

Remove the paper. 


Check LDLS06, LDLS07, LDLS08, LDLS09, LDMO08 

The message appears if the light sensor does not respond 

within 2 sec. after the activation of the motor. 


Check LDLS05, LDMO04 

The inserted paper width and the magazine coding in one or 

both paper magazines do not match (at the outside of the 

magazines): the inserted paper is larger. Acc. to the coding, 

distribution should have been possible (up to 102 mm / 

4 Inch). 


LDLS03, check the paper turning device in the Lane 

Distributor 

Paper jam in Lane Distributor. 



Check LDLS04 

Owing to the paper jam, the paper cannot be transported out 

of the LH paper magazine or rewound into the magazine. 

Remove the paper jam, check the paper magazine and the 

paper transport. 


Check MFLS02, PCLS03, MDMO03 

LH paper magazine empty. 

Remove the magazine and put in a new paper roll. 



AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-43

Software 



ERPAMGDL0003 

5514508 

PA: Paper length measuring error paper 

magazine LHS 

The diameter of the LH paper roll cannot be determined. 


Check MFLS02, PCLS03 

ERPAMGDL0004 

5514509 

PA: Paper length LEFT paper roll out of 

tolerance 

The detected diameter of the LH paper roll is out of tolerance 

(too large). 


Check MFLS02, PCLS03, MDMC04 

ERPAMGDL0006 

5514510 

PA: LH paper magazine coding wrong An undefined coding was detected on the LH paper magazine. 

Enter the coding into the Software. 


Check MDLS08 to MDLS013 

ERPAMGDR0001 

5514511 

PA: Paper jam at end of paper RHS Owing to the paper jam, the paper cannot be transported out 

of the RH paper magazine or rewound into the magazine. 

Remove the paper jam, check the paper magazine and the 

paper transport. 



ERPAMGDR0002 

5514512 

PA: Put paper in RH paper magazine RH paper magazine empty. 

Remove the magazine and put in a new paper roll. 



ERPAMGDR0003 

5514513 

PA: Paper length measuring error RHS The diameter of the RH paper roll cannot be determined. 



ERPAMGDR0004 

5514514 

PA: Paper length RIGHT paper roll out of 

tolerance 

The detected diameter of the RH paper roll is out of tolerance 

(too large). 



ERPAMGDR0006 

5514515 

PA: RH paper magazine coding wrong An undefined coding was detected on the RH paper magazine. 

Enter the coding into the Software. 


Check MDLS01 to MDLS06 

ERPAMGZN0001 

5514530 

PA: Put back the removed paper 

magazine 

A paper magazine was removed after the order has been 

started in spite of the 'red lamp'. 

This magazine has to be put back so that the order can be 

continued. 

ERPAPCPU0005 

5514505 

PA: Communication problem with the 


The Paper Processor CPU does not respond to commands of 

the PA-CPU. 


RS232 check the connecting cable between PA-CPU and PP- 

CPU 

ERPAUNKN0001 

5514500 

PA: Unknown error in paper transport An unknown error has occurred. 

Inform a service engineer. 

ERPAVACU0001 

5514516 

PA: Remove the paper from the exposure 

table 

Paper has been detected on the exposure table or at the 

entrance of the Lane Distributor during the initialization. 


Check PALS01 

ERPAVACU0002 PA: Remove the paper splice from the If the paper splice is longer than 295 mm, there is the risk 

5514533 exposure table 

that it jams in the Shifter. For this reason, it must be removed 

already on the exposure table. 

3-44 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 



ERPPCHUT0001 

5515605 

PP: Remove the sorter flap malfunction The Sorter flap has not reached the desired position. 

This message appears when: 

a) Motor PPLSMO02 has not reached sensor PPLSLS01 after 

300 pulses or 

b) Sensor PPLSLS01 remains ON after motor PPLSMO02 has 

moved the Sorter flap away from the sensor. 


Check the mechanism as well as PPLSLS01 and PPLSMO02 

ERPPDENS0001 

5515512 

PP: Unknown densitometer error An unknown error has occurred. 


ERPPDENS0002 

5515513 

PP: Densitometer communication error The densitometer does not respond 20 seconds after the 

inquiry has started. 

Switch the machine OFF and start it again. 


Check the densitometer wiring. The densitometer is not 

ready for Download if the 7-segment display shows 8 on the 

densitometer board. Switch the boards dead for 30 seconds 

(disconnect the connector - the display turns off). The 

densitometer is ready for Download when three horizontal 

bars appear in the display segment - manual Download via 

SGUI, replace the densitometer if necessary. 

ERPPDENS0003 PP: Densitometer light source defective At least one measurement of the white reference calibration 

5515514 

differs too much from the tolerances. Check the shutter 

mechanism of the densitometer calibration plate. 


Clean the recalibration plate, check the pressure mechanism, 

the adjustment of the densitometer head (parallelism and 

slight projection of the densitometer beyond the paper guide 

plate), replace the densitometer if necessary. 

ERPPDENS0004 PP: Densitometer measurement stopped The measured actual value of the calibration plate (white 

5515515 

reference) is smaller than the minimum value after the 

calibration of the densitometer in the factory. 


Replace the densitometer. 

ERPPDENS0005 

5515604 

PP: Clean the densi. calibration plate, 

repeat MBL 

The calibration plate (pressure plate) of the densitometer is 

too dirty and needs cleaning. 

ERPPDENS0006 

5515516 

PP: Densitometer cannot find the 

beginning of the measuring field 

Border between White and the measuring field not 

recognized, measurement stopped. 

Check the paper for scattered light or damage. 


Check the paper transport 

ERPPDENS0007 

5515517 

PP: Densitometer sees a black measuring 

field for too long 

The measurement is stopped. 




ERPPDENS0008 

5515518 

PP: Densitometer has detected scattered 

light on the measuring field 

White measurement too short, measurement stopped. 




AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-45

Software 



ERPPDENS0009 

5515519 

ERPPDENS0020 

5515520 

ERPPDENS0021 

5515521 

ERPPDENS0022 

5515522 

ERPPDENS0023 

5515523 

ERPPDENS0027 

5515524 

ERPPDENS0030 

5515525 

ERPPDENS0031 

5515526 

ERPPDENS0032 

5515527 

ERPPDENS0033 

5515528 

ERPPDENS0037 

5515529 

ERPPDENS0040 

5515530 

ERPPDENS0090 

5515531 

ERPPDENS0091 

5515584 

ERPPDENS0092 

5515585 

PP: Densitometer cannot use the speed 

data from the PA 

PP: Reserved for process control 


PP: Densitometer does not find enough 

valid values 

PP: Densitometer cannot calculate a 

mean value 


PP: Tolerance of densitometer reference 

values too large 

PP: Densitometer measuring error - paper 

in front of measuring field not white 

PP: Densitometer finds less than 5 

measuring values 

PP: Densitometer cannot calculate a 

mean value 

PP: Densitometer does not see the black 

measuring field 

PP: Internal densitometer Timeout - 

check Firmware 

PP: Measuring error/ internal assessment 

error in the densitometer 

PP: Densitometer memory overflow 

PP: Densitometer memory overflow when 

finding the measuring values 


Check the connections and the cables, reset the Paper 

Processor 

No reference values of the densitometer available. 

No white reference values of the densitometer available. 

The densitometer does not see enough valid values in a 

measuring field. The end of the measuring field is seen too 

early due to dirt or scattered light, or the transport speed is 

out of tolerance. 



Check the transport speed 

— 

Densitometer measuring field missing 

PP: Tolerance of densitometer reference values too large 

Acc. to the paper measurement, the white of the paper is 

much darker than that on the calibration plate. Measurement 

stopped. another measurement is performed automatically. 

If the next measurement is faulty as well, the paper 

calibration is stopped, Check the paper for scattered light or 

damage, repeat the procedure. 


Replace the densitometer 

Clean the calibration plate 


Check the position of the measuring head in the machine 

— 

The densitometer has not seen the border between white and 

black. Measurement stopped. 


Check the measuring field and the transport speed 


Check the wiring and the densitometer Firmware 

Check the paper for dirt, clean the densitometer with 

compressed air. 



The densitometer has found more than 10.000 values in a 

field. Measurement stopped. 


Check the paper for homogeneity of the measuring field, 

check the transport speed. 

3-46 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERPPDENS0093 PP: Densitometer cannot find valid values Service engineer: 

5515586 



ERPPDENS0094 PP: Densitometer cannot find enough The densitometer cannot find enough valid values in a 

5515587 valid values 

measuring field. The end of the measuring field has been 

detected too early due to contamination or scattered light, or 

the transport speed is out of tolerance. 




ERPPDENS0096 PP: Densitometer has detected 


5515589 communication failures with PA 

Check the connections and cables, reset the Paper Processor, 

eliminate the source of the fault. 

ERPPDENS0097 PP: Densitometer has detected 


5515590 communication failures with PA 



ERPPDENS0098 PP: Densitometer has detected an The densitometer has detected communication failures with 

5515591 unauthorized mode 

the PA. No admissible mode (exposure control, process 

control or grey wedge measurement) occurred. 




ERPPDENS0099 

5515592 

PP: Undefined densitometer error Service engineer: 

Reset the Paper Processor, replace the densitometer. 

ERPPDMDL0001 

5515588 

PP: Densitometer not responding during 

Download 

Communication error as the densitometer does not send a 

feedback message at the beginning of the Download. 


Check connections and cables 

ERPPDMDL0002 

5515593 

PP: Densitometer sends an invalid 

feedback message upon Download 

Communication problem between PP-CPU and the 

densitometer during the Download. 


Check connections and cables 

ERPPDMDL0003 

5515594 

PP: Check sum error of the densitometer 


Faulty check sum upon Download. 


Check plug, cable and file for the Download 

ERPPDMDL0004 

5515595 

PP: Wrong file selected for densitometer 

Download 

Size of the Download file checked. It is not correct. 


Check the file size and select the correct file 

ERPPLNSH0002 

5515532 

PP: Fold down the Sorter 

The Sorter was folded up. For this reason, the machine does 

not work. 


Check LSMS01 

ERPPPCPU0002 

5515533 

PP: Flash Rom Delete / Write error upon 

Download 

Flash-ROM defective. 


Replace the Flash-ROM 

ERPPPCPU0003 

5515534 

PP: Check sum error during Download Firmware version file (SW) damaged or wrong. 

Select the correct file and try again. 


Repeat the Download manually 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-47

Software 



ERPPPCPU0004 

5515535 

PP: EEPROM Write error during Download Service engineer: 

Insert a new (empty) EEPROM and start again 

ERPPPCPU0005 

5515536 

PP: Communication problem with the 


PA does not get a reply from the Paper Processor CPU. 


Check the connection 

ERPPPCPU0008 PA: Reload the machine settings, they are The machine settings were overwritten with the Default 

5515602 defective 

settings. The machine then works with the faulty standard 

values. Load the last correct data backup in the menu item 

Settings > Load settings > Machine settings. 


Check the MC data of the assembly group in the cfg files. If it 

is correct, set the parameter VALID to 1. Then save it and 

load it into the assembly group and into the data base. 

ERPPPDRY0002 

5515537 

PP: Malfunction of the paper dryer fan The sensor does not detect a movement of the fan 500mS 

after switch-on. 


Check DHAL01, DHFA01 

ERPPPDRY0003 

5515538 

PP: Close the paper dryer lid 


Check DHMS01 

ERPPPPDR0001 PP: Paper Processor door open 

When the Paper Processor door is open, the bottom Sorter 

5515597 

belt is blocked so that no order stacks can fall down. All 

orders are sorted into the front print tray of the Sorter until 

the door is closed. 


Check MFMS01 

ERPPPPDS0002 PP: Punch cutter in docking system The cutter is not seen in home position 10 sec. after its 

5515539 

jammed 

actuation. The machine goes into emergency mode after 

confirmation of the error. 



ERPPPPDS0003 

5515540 

PP: Docking fault paper box, punch cutter 

not in home position 

Cutter jammed, check mechanism 



ERPPPPDS0004 

5515541 

PP: Mount paper box 


Check DSLS03 

ERPPPPDS0005 

5515542 

PP: Mount paper box correctly 

A full paper box is recognized while the docking door is open. 


Check DSLS03, DSMS02 

ERPPPPDS0006 

5515543 

PP: Close docking door 


Check DSMS01 

ERPPPPDS0007 

5515544 

PP: Docking door cannot be unlocked Check mechanism 



ERPPPPDS0008 

5515545 

PP: Docking door cannot be locked Check mechanism 



ERPPPPEF0001 

5515546 

PP: Empty CD effluent tank 



Check ETFS01 

3-48 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERPPPPEF0002 

5515547 

PP: Empty BX effluent tank 



Check ETFS02 

ERPPPPEF0003 

5515548 

PP: Empty SB effluent tank 



Check ETFS03 

ERPPPPEF0004 

5515549 

PP: Empty effluent tank 



Check ETFS01 

ERPPPPHT0001 

5515550 

PP: CD heater in Paper Processor 

defective 

The temperature rises less than 5°C per hour during 

preheating. 



ERPPPPHT0002 

5515551 

PP: BX heater in the Paper Processor 

defective 


preheating. 



ERPPPPHT0003 

5515552 

PP: SB heater in the Paper Processor 

defective 


preheating. 


Check CTHS03, CTHT03, CTHT04 

ERPPPPHT0004 

5515553 

PP: Dryer heater in the Paper Processor 

defective 

The temperature rises less than 5°C in 5 min. during 

preheating. 


Check DRHS01, DHHT01, DHHT02, DHHT03 

ERPPPPMR0002 

5515554 

PP: Reset the emergency run on the 


A fatal error has occurred during the docking sequence. 

Inform the service engineer. 


Check the docking unit, reset the emergency run 

ERPPPPMR0003 

5515555 

PP: Filling level error in the replenisher 

tanks 

Calibration value of the replenishment pump exceeded 

by 115%. 


Check pumps, valves and hosing. Then drain all tanks, reset 

the pumps and start the docking sequence again. 

ERPPPPMR0004 PP: Docking error: Drain ALL replenisher An error has occurred while the replenisher tanks were 

5515599 

tanks (blue, red, yellow) of the Paper pumped empty. Normal operation is possible after emptying 

Processor 

the replenisher tanks. For this, plug a short piece of hose on 

the drain cocks of the tanks concerned and empty the 

contents completely into a recipient kept ready. 

If the error reoccurs, a machine error is present, call in a 



Check the replenisher tanks, pumps, sensors, valves, cables 

and the hosing. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-49

Software 



ERPPPPMR0005 

5515600 

ERPPPPMR0006 

5515607 

ERPPPPMR0008 

5515601 

ERPPPPPW0001 

5515556 

ERPPPPPW0004 

5515557 

ERPPPPPW0005 

5515558 

ERPPPPPW0006 

5515559 

ERPPPPPW0007 

5515560 

PP: Docking error: Drain ALL replenisher 

tanks (blue, red, yellow) of the Paper 

Processor 

PP: No Docking since 2 Docking cycles 

=> Replenishment stopped ! 

PP: Docking error: Drain ALL replenisher 

tanks (blue, red, yellow) of the Paper 

Processor 

PP: Fill up the water tank in the Paper 

Processor 

PP: Fill up the water tank in the Paper 

Processor 

PP: Malfunction of the CD water valve 

PP: Malfunction of the BX water valve 

PP: Malfunction of the SB water valve 



tanks. For this, plug a short piece of hose on the drain cocks 

of the tanks concerned and empty the contents completely 

into a recipient kept ready. 

If the error reoccurs, a machine error is present, call in a 





No Docking has happened although Docking should have 

taken place already twice acc. to the number of pump cycles. 

Cause: Manual filling of the replenisher tanks to save box 

chemistry. This is not allowed - replenishment stopped. 

An error has occurred while the replenisher tanks were filled 

(one of the overflow sensors triggered). Normal operation is 

possible after emptying the replenisher tanks. For this, plug a 

short piece of hose on the drain cocks of the tanks concerned 

and empty the contents completely into a recipient kept 

ready. 

If the error reoccurs, a machine error is present: call in a 






Check RWFS01 

The water tank must be topped up before the docking 

sequence is started. 


Check RWFS03 

Timeout when filling the replenisher tank. The process can be 

repeated, then the machine goes into emergency mode. 



remove the air, briefly open the water tank drain cock (PP 

side at the bottom) until water comes out. 

Check valve, hosing and RTFS04 

Timeout when filling the replenisher tank. The docking 

sequence is stopped and the machine goes into emergency 

mode. 





Check valve, hosing and RTFS05 

Timeout when filling the replenisher tank. The docking 

sequence is stopped and the machine goes into emergency 

mode. 





Check valve, hosing. and RTFS06 

3-50 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERPPPPPW0008 

5515598 

ERPPPPRK0001 

5515561 

ERPPPPRK0002 

5515562 

ERPPPPRK0003 

5515563 

ERPPPPRP0001 

5515564 

ERPPPPRP0002 

5515565 

ERPPPPRP0003 

5515566 

ERPPPPRP0004 

5515567 

ERPPPPRP0005 

5515608 

ERPPPPRP0008 

5515568 

ERPPPPTH0001 

5515569 

ERPPPPTH0002 

5515570 

ERPPPPTH0003 

5515501 

PP: Remove the malfunction of the 

automatic water replenishment (option) 

PP: Remove the paper jam between the 

CD and the dryer 

PP: Close the rack lid in the Paper 

Processor 

PP: Remove the paper jam in the dryer 

PP: CD replenisher tank empty 

PP: BX replenisher tank empty 

PP: SB replenisher tank empty 

PP: Fill up the replenisher tanks - not for 

box chemistry! 

PP: Close the tank lid of the replenisher 

tanks 

PP: Check mixer motor 

PP: Check CD heater temperature sensor 

PP: Check BX heater temperature sensor 

PP: Check temperature sensor SB heater 

Check the water supply and the solenoid valve. This message 

comes up if the top floater switch (RWFS03) does not 

respond 60 seconds after the switch of the bottom solenoid 

valve (RWFS01) has switched. As the filling takes places at 

intervals of 20 seconds, the water tank can also be filled via 

the top magnetic switch. 


Check RWFS03 and the solenoid valve, RWFS01 

The paper has not been recognized by the sensors within the 

expected time. 


Check POLS01, POLS02 


Check TKMS01 

The sensors have detected a paper jam in the dryer. 

Open the cover and remove the paper. 


Check POLS01, POLS02 


Check RTFS01 


Check RTFS02 


Check RTFS03 

More than 3 m² of paper have been developed since one of 

the replenisher tanks has been emptied. For safety reasons, 

normal operation is only possible after Docking has been 

finished successfully or after the replenisher tank has been 

filled up manually (machine without Docking). 

Fill up the water tank and put in the chemical box. 

The fault also occurs when at least one replenisher tank is 

empty at a new start of the machine. 

The replenishment of the chemistry is stopped until the tank 

lid is closed again. 

The sensor has not seen any movement within 10 sec. after 

the start of the motor. 


Check RTLS01, RTMO01 

The measured temperature difference is too important. 

Sensor defective. 


Check CTHS01 




Check CTHS02 




Check CTHS03 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-51

Software 



ERPPPPTH0004 

5515502 

ERPPPPTK0001 

5515503 

ERPPPPTK0002 

5515504 

ERPPPPTK0003 

5515505 

ERPPPPTK0004 

5515506 

ERPPPPTK0005 

5515507 

ERPPPPTK0006 

5515508 

ERPPPPTM0001 

5515509 

ERPPPPTM0002 

5515510 

ERPPPPTM0003 

5515511 

ERPPPPTM0004 

5515571 

ERPPPRMX0001 

5515572 

PP: Check the temperature sensor of the 

dryer heater 

PP: Fill the CD machine tank with water 

(not replenisher!) when PP is empty (Info 

window). 

PP: Fill the BX machine tank with water 


window). 

PP: Fill the SB1 machine tank with water 


window). 



window). 



window). 



window). 

PP: CD temperature out of tolerance 

PP: BX temperature out of tolerance 

PP: SB temperature out of tolerance 

PP: Dryer temperature out of tolerance 

PP: CD replenisher filling level error, 


The measured temperature is too low (101°C). Sensor defective. 


Check DRHS01 


Check TKFS01 


Check TKFS02 


Check TKFS03 


Check TKFS04 


Check TKFS05 


Check TKFS06 





Check CTHT01, CTHS01, PPMO01 





Check CTHT02, CTHS02, PPMO02 





Check CTHT03, CTHT04, CTHT05, CTHS03, PPMO03 to 

PPMO06 



Clean/replace air filter. 


Check DHHT01, DHHT02, DHHT03, DHHS01, DHFA01 

The pump volume is readjusted during the docking sequence. 

If the value differs by more than 30% from the initial value, 

the sequence is interrupted. 



3-52 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


ERPPPRMX0002 

5515573 

ERPPPRMX0003 

5515574 

ERPPPRMX0004 

5515575 

ERPPPRMX0005 

5515576 

ERPPPRMX0006 

5515577 

ERPPPRMX0007 

5515578 

ERPPPRMX0008 

5515579 

ERPPPROF0001 

5515580 

ERPPPROF0002 

5515581 

ERPPPROF0003 

5515582 

ERPPPROF0005 

5515603 

ERPPSORT0001 

5515583 

PP: BX replenisher filling level error, 


PP: SB replenisher filling level error, 


PP: Docking sequence Paper Processor 

running 

PP: CD replenisher tank cannot be 

pumped empty 

PP: BX replenisher tank cannot be 

pumped empty 

PP: SB replenisher tank cannot be 

pumped empty 

PP: Docking sequence was interrupted 

and will now be continued 

PP: CD replenisher tank too full 

PP: BX replenisher tank too full 

PP: SB replenisher tank too full 

PP: Replenisher tank too full, water valve 

defective 

PP: Remove the rocker failure in the 

Sorter 












— 

The replenisher tank is not emptied within 10 min. after the 

beginning of the Docking sequence. Sequence stopped. 


Check hosing, pump and RTFS01, RTFS04, RTFS07 









This message appears when the machine is reset from the 

emergency mode (INX) or when the voltage is switched off 

during the Docking sequence. 


0,5 sec. 


Check RTFS07 


0,5 sec. 


Check RTFS08 


0,5 sec. 


Check RTFS09 

The replenisher tank was filled too much during the Docking. 


Check the water valve and the sensors of the replenisher 

tanks 

Rocker in the Sorter not in reference position. 

Remove the paper and clear the path of the rocker. 


Check SOLS01 and SOMO1 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-53

Software 



ERPPSORT0002 

5515596 

PP: Remove the failure of the print stop 

flap in the Sorter 

Stop flap in the Sorter not in reference position. 

Remove the paper and clear the path of the stop flap. 


Check SOLS03 and SOMO03 

ERPPSORT0003 

5515606 

PP: Remove Sorter malfunction 

Check the Sorter mechanism. 

The sensor PPSOLS04 is not on ON: 3.2 seconds after the 

Sorter has been operated by motor PPSOMO01. 


Check PPSOLS04, PPSOMO01 

ERPPSORT0004 PP: Wrong Sorter mode 

The setting of the machine parameters does not match the 

5515609 

existing loads. Adjust the Sorter mode to the MC data of the 

Hardware. 


MCSOTYP is 2, but PPSOLS02 is OFF and not bridged. 

Check the MC data. 

ERPPSORT0005 

5515610 

PP: Sorter Initialization failed -> check 

the Sorter and the MC data 

The Sorter could not be initialized 3 times in a succession. 


Check the Sorter sensors and the MC data. 

If the MC data is default, reimport the MC data. 

ERPPUNKN0001 

5515500 

PP: Unknown error - inform the service — 

3-54 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 

3.2.6 Timer (TI) 


ERTIUNKN0001 

5518500 

TI: Unknown error from Timer board Service engineer: 

Replace the Timer board 

ERTITCPU0002 

5518501 

TI: EEPROM Delete/Write error 



ERTITCPU0003 

5518502 

TI: EEPROM Download error 



ERTITCPU0004 

5518503 

TI: EEPROM write error 



AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-55

Software 


3.2.7 Messages (Custom Errors) 

3.2.7.1 Film Prozessor (FP), only d-lab.1 allrounder 

Error_ID Message Description / Remedy 

5512000 Internal Film Processor error Internal Film Processor error 

5512001 Film Processor: Initialization faulty Film Processor: Initialization faulty 

5512002 Wait... Film Processor Reset being performed — 

5512003 Unknown command received from Film Processor Unknown command received from Film Processor 

5512004 Internal Film Processor data error Internal Film Processor data error 

5512005 Film Processor Timeout Communication with the machine has failed. 

5512006 Film Processor proxy has discovered an invalid 

action 

The machine or the Software has an internal error. 

Start the machine again. 

5512499 Unknown error from Film Processor Unknown error from Film Processor 

3.2.7.2 Scanner (SC) 


5516000 Internal Scanner error — 

5516001 Initialization of the Scanner failed — 

5516002 Wait... Scanner Reset running — 

5516003 Unknown command received from Scanner — 

5516004 Internal Scanner data error — 

5516005 Scanner Timeout Communication with the machine failed. 

5516006 Scanner proxy has discovered an invalid process The machine or the Software have an internal error. 


5516007 Mounted film mask unknown Remove the film mask and mount an original 

accessory film mask. 

5516008 Film handling error of the order. Order stopped. 

5516499 Unknown error from Scanner — 

3.2.7.3 Exposure Controller (EC) 


5511000 Internal error from Exposure Controller — 

5511001 Initialization of the Exposure Controller failed — 

5511002 Wait... EC Reset running — 

5511003 Unknown command received from Exposure 

Controller 

— 

5511004 Internal data error in the Exposure Controller — 

5511499 Unknown error from Exposure Controller (EC) — 

3-56 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 

3.2.7.4 Paper Advance (PA) 


5514000 Internal paper transport fault — 

5514001 Initialization of the paper transport failed — 

5514002 Wait... Paper transport reset running — 

5514003 Unknown command received from paper transport — 

5514004 Internal paper transport data error — 

5514005 Paper transport Timeout Communication with the machine failed. 

5514006 Paper transport proxy has discovered an invalid 

process 

The machine or the Software have an internal error. 


5514007 Unknown paper configuration in magazine LHS Check the switch positions on the paper magazine 

and in the Software. 

5514008 Unknown paper configuration in magazine RHS Check the switch positions on the paper magazine 

and in the Software. 

5514009 The above paper is required for this order. Mount the required paper magazine as soon as the 

pilot lamp lights green. 

5514010 Paper handling error for this order. Order stopped. 

5514011 PA: Close the Printer door The Printer door was opened. 

5514012 PA: Close the Printer door The Printer door was opened. 

5514499 Unknown paper transport fault — 

3.2.7.5 Paper Processor (PP) 


5515000 Internal Paper Processor error. — 

5515001 Initialization of the Paper Processor failed — 

5515002 Wait... Paper Processor Reset running — 

5515003 Unknown command received from Paper Processor — 

5515004 Internal Paper Processor data error — 

5515499 Unknown error from Paper Processor — 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-57

Software 


3.2.7.6 IP / IPP 


5513000 Internal IP error Internal IP error 

5513001 LVDS card cannot be initialized — 

5513002 Prescan data transfer Timeout in the indicated order — 

5513003 Mainscan data transfer Timeout in the indicated order — 

5513004 Prescan data transfer error in the indicated order — 

5513005 Mainscan data transfer error in the indicated order — 

5513006 General error from LVDS card The LVDS card does not report an 'Alive' command 

to IP. Start the machine again. 


Replace the LVDS card 

5513007 Error when exposing the indicated order (error cause) — 

5513008 Error from Exposure Controller. Exposure stopped. — 

5513009 Error from exposures Software. Exposure stopped. — 

5513010 General error when exposing. Exposure stopped. — 

5513011 Wait with film processing ..., SC transfer not ensured The Scan memory is almost full. For this reason, 

other films from the Film Processor may not be 

scanned at once. They may be exited through the 

emergency exit. 

Print scanned orders or delete them to ensure 

transfer. 

5513012 Scan buffer full: Print films The Scan memory is completely full. For this reason, 

no other films from the Film Processor can be 

scanned at once. They are exited through the 

emergency exit. 

5513013 Error encountered in the IPA The IPA Software has an internal bug and must be 

started again. 

5513014 Faulty paper calibration data in the IP (error cause) An error has occurred during the paper calibration. 


Reset, remove error, start calibration again 

5513015 IP has discovered an invalid process The IP Software has an internal error and must be 

started again. 

5513016 Handling error of order %1 in the IP. Order stopped. 

5513017 Handling error of the indicated order in the IPA. Order stopped. 

5513018 No or wrong Scanner calibration data for the inserted 

film mask. Order stopped. 

The Scanner calibration module cannot supply 

correct calibration data for the mounted film mask. 

The order is stopped. 


New start of the Software/Reset and request of a 

new Scanner calibration for the corresponding film 

mask 

5513019 A file of the order cannot be printed The indicated file is not found or cannot be read 

correctly and is therefore not printed. 

Order continued. 

5513020 Some preview images of order %1 cannot be The order is not stopped and can be printed. 

calculated (mostly for lack of memory). 

5513021 Handling error of the order %1 in the IPA. The Index cannot be printed. 

Order stopped. 

3-58 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


5513022 Handling error of the order %1 in the IPA. Index/Combiprint Layout file not existing in the 

indicated directory. Order stopped. 

5513023 Handling error of the order %1 in the IPA. No storage space available any more. 


5513024 Handling error of the order %1 in the IPA. TFS cannot be calculated. 


Service engineer:Check the LVDS cable 

5513025 Handling error of the order %1 in the IPA. TFS has found 0 frames on the film. 

The film may have been inserted the wrong way. 


Service engineer:Check the LVDS cable 

5513026 Memory for digital input completely full: Print images The "Digital Scan" memory is completely full. For 

this reason, no other digital orders can be loaded at 

once. 

Print digital orders or delete them to ensure 

transfer. 

5513027 Order %1 does not contain printable images. For film: all frames have been selected, the film is 

empty. 

For digital: the order does not comprise image files 

or non of the indicated image files can be loaded. 

The order is deleted. 

5513028 The selected stored order cannot be fully restored and 

is therefore deleted. 

5513029 Initialization of the DM module (DataManagement) 

failed. 

Possible causes: Incompatibility with the current 

version, defective files or incomplete archiving. 

Operation of the d-lab is not possible. 

Start the Software again, reinstall it if necessary. 

5513030 Initialization of the IPCalib module failed. Operation of the d-lab is not possible. Switch off the 

machine and start the Software again. 


Reinstall IP, delete *.done 

5513031 Not enough memory to restore the saved order. Order %1 is interrupted. The selected saved order 

remains in the archive! 

Try again after storage space has become available 

after printing/deleting active orders. 

5513032 Starting the Print thread failed: The d-lab cannot be operated. 

Start the Software again, or reinstall it if necessary. 

5513033 Format indication error for signal processing. Print/preview %1 not printed. 

The indications for Input/Output are wrong, 

including among others Input Scan size, paper 

width, paper length, border width, Autosave size etc. 

5513034 Signal processing error. Frame %1 not printed. 

5513035 Signal processing error. Order %1 stopped. 

5513036 Error data base query. Order %1 stopped. 

5513037 One or several LUTs for signal processing not ok Order %1 stopped. 

The LUT files are either inexistent or illegible, they 

may have wrong contents or sizes etc. 

5513038 Signal processing error. Order %1 stopped. Possible cause: 

Scanner calibration not existing or defective. 


Perform a complete Scanner calibration. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-59

Software 



5513039 Slide Scan buffer completely full. Please touch End of 

order in the slide mode. 

5513499 Unknown IP-error — 

As no other slide Scan can be created, the machine 

is at the stop if End of order is not triggered at once. 

Then print or delete other orders, if any. 

3.2.7.7 Software 


5517000 Internal Software bug — 

5517001 Action failed — 

5517002 Software not terminated correctly during the last 

session. 

The last configuration identified as being functional 

is used. 

5517003 The data base cannot be opened. The last configuration identified as being functional 

is used. 

5517004 The data base cannot be opened. The Software is shut down. 

5517005 The Scan management has detected an invalid 

process. 

All running orders are stopped. 

The machine is reset. 

5517006 The Print management has detected an invalid 

process. 

All current orders are stopped. 

The machine is reset. 

5517007 Error when handling the order. Order stopped. 

5517008 The Download file for the indicated component of 

the main module is not found 

— 

5517009 Invalid order configuration This data base holds an invalid order configuration. 

5517010 No connection possible to d-workflow. Autosave 

cannot be performed. 

— 

5517011 Pico - Scanner calibration failed — 

5517012 Firmware upgrade not possible for one or several 

main modules as their successful initialization is not 

— 

possible. 

5517013 Internal Timeout - normal operation possible One of the main assembly groups has not finished 

an operation within the preset time. For more 

information see the machine-internal recordings 

(Log files). Inform a service engineer if the problem 

occurs repeatedly. 

5517014 Error when writing in the remote Autosave directory. Autosave cannot be performed. 

Check the directory for enable and access rights. 

5517015 Remove the box and reinsert the control strip! Control strip not drawn in correctly. 

5517016 Pico stopped The creation of the Scanner calibration data was 

stopped by STOP or "Order Reset". 

5517017 Pico not finished successfully. The creation of the Scanner calibration data was not 

finished successfully. 

5517018 Pico not finished successfully. The creation of the Scanner calibration data was 

stopped by a Hardware problem. 

5517019 CD burning failed — 

5517020 Wait... paper transport cannot handle a control strip 

at present 

— 

3-60 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


5517021 Remove film mask Insertion of film mask not allowed 

5517022 Invalid combination of film mask and print mode The inserted film mask does not match the selected 

print mode: 

Change the film mask or select a different print mode. 

5517023 Unrepairable error in order control Service engineer: 

Analyze the Log files 

5517024 The normal Shutdown terminated with faults. Pushing the button "Switch-off" again will switch off 

the machine. Check whether there is paper in the 

paper transport (PA) and the Paper Processor (PP) or 

film material in the Film Processor (FP) and the 

Scanner (SC): Remove them if necessary. 

5517025 The film material was removed again soon after 

the order was started. 

Possible reasons: 

– Incomplete film pick-up 

– Film strip pulled manually 

– APS cassette Feeder unlocked manually 

– Film advance STOP key operated 

5517026 Automatic Scanner calibration failed. Trigger the complete calibration by hand under 

Test > Pico! 

It was not possible to perform a successful Scanner 

calibration upon machine startup. 

All Pico versions must be executed by hand under 

Test > Pico. 

5517027 License FILMONCD_ON_BOARD not existing. CD burning stopped. 

5517028 There is a general unrepairable problem when 

burning a CD. 

5517029 Image data synchronization between IP and EC 

failed 

5517030 Orders can be scanned again only after the current 

digital order has been finished. 

5517031 Unauthorized order envelope number — 

5517032 Unauthorized configuration data — 

5517499 Unknown Software bug — 

The process is stopped. 


Analyze main.log 

— 

— 

3.2.7.8 Timer 


5518000 Internal error from the Timer board — 

5518001 Initialization of the Timer failed — 

5518002 Wait... Timer Reset running — 

5518003 Unknown command received from Timer — 

5518004 Internal Timer data error Internal Timer data error 

5518005 Timer board Timeout Communication with the machine failed. 

5518006 Timer board proxy has discovered an invalid 

process 

5518499 Unknown error from the Timer board — 

The machine or the Software has an internal error. 


AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-61

Software 


3.2.8 Messages (Custom Info) 


5530001 This function is not available at present. — 

5530002 Firmware Download Do not switch off the machine! 

5530003 Wait... Modifications successful, will be 

adopted 

The Firmware is updated. Wait until the operation is finished. 

Do not switch off the machine! 

The Firmware transfer is finished. The Software is validated. 

Wait until the operation is finished. 

5530004 Firmware versions being checked... Before the Firmware is updated, the actual status is recorded 

and checked. 

5530011 The Software versions of the main module 

%1 do not belong to this installation 

The Software versions of the main module %1 do not belong to 

this installation. 

The Firmware found does not belong to the supplied Software 

version. 

5530012 Pico running... Scanner calibration being performed 

5530013 Printer calibration being performed — 

5530014 No information about the Software package The automatic Software installation cannot be performed 

because important information is missing. For more advice see 

the Log file. 

5530015 Scanner has unrepaired errors Reset of the Scanner error failed 

5530016 Timer board has unrepaired errors Reset of the Timer board error failed 

5530017 Film Processor has unrepaired errors Reset of the Film Processor error failed 

5530018 Paper transport has unrepaired errors Reset of the paper transport error failed 

5530019 Wait... Software being installed Installation of a new Software package started. 

5530020 Wait... Fallback running Fallback to an earlier Software version started. 

5530021 Wait... Error of the Paper Processor being 

reset 

5530022 Wait... Error of the paper transport being 

reset 

The status of the assembly group is checked after confirmation 

of the previous error message. This may take some time. 


of the previous error message. This may take some time 

5530023 Wait... Error of the print engine being reset The status of the assembly group is checked after confirmation 


5530024 Wait... Error of the Scanner being reset The status of the assembly group is checked after confirmation 


5530025 Wait... Error of the Film Processor being 

reset 



5530026 Wait... Error of the Timer board being reset The status of the assembly group is checked after confirmation 


5530027 Initialization ... — 

5530028 Readiness being checked ... — 

5530029 The Paper Processor has not yet reached its Paper cannot be calibrated! 

operating temperature. 

5530030 Perform paper cut in RH magazine ? The cut will be jumped after the indicated time. 

Should the paper tip be cut? If no selection is made, no cut will 

be performed. 

5530031 Perform paper cut in RH magazine ? The cut will be jumped after the indicated time. 

Should the paper tip be cut? If no selection is made, no cut will 

be performed. 

3-62 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 


5530032 Initialization finished — 

5530033 Put the indicated paper in the LH paper 

magazine 

5530034 Put the indicated paper in the RH paper 

magazine 

The paper needed for the order has not been loaded. 

The paper needed for the order has not been loaded. 

5530035 Scanner stopped. The current process is stopped by this. 

5530036 Paper transport not ready The message appears in the following cases: 

5530037 Paper magazine LHS empty, magazine RHS 

is used 

5530038 Paper magazine RHS empty, magazine LHS 

is used 

1. The reference temperatures were ignored upon startup. 

Attempt to make prints before the operating temperature has 

been reached. 

2. The Printer door was opened. Attempt to make prints during 

the initialization although the paper transport is not yet ready. 

Push the ON key in case of repeated appearance. 

— 

— 

5530039 Del. order — 

5530040 Scanner deactivated or not installed — 

5530041 DX code read error, insert the film correctly Put the film in the Scanner with the emulsion side turned 

down 

5530042 Component not existing The main assembly group was not found when the machine 

was started (display in the progress dialog). 

5530043 Wait until the insertion of the control strip 

box is prompted 

— 

5530044 Insert the control strip box and close the 

Printer door 

— 

5530045 Remove control strip box — 

5530046 Film mask determination The part of the film mask is defined that can be illuminated. 

5530047 Start Pico active This calibration will be triggered automatically about 1 hour 

after the system start of the film transport (FL). 

5530048 Light Pico active This calibration can only be started manually. It defines the 

color channel dependency of the Scanner calibration data. 

5530049 Dark Pico active The dark value calibration is just being performed. This is part 

of the Scanner calibration and is triggered automatically by the 

Scanner. 

5530050 Reference Pico active The white reference times are being determined. This is part of 

the Scanner calibration. 

5530051 Insert writeable CD-R/RW. Data cannot be recorded if no writeable CD is in the CD burner. 

CDs in the UDF format (e.g. formatted with DirectCD or InCD) 

cannot be burned. 

5530052 No paper name given for PBL/MBL. Process stopped. 

5530053 System switched off due to a fatal error. — 

5530054 Data base Backup recorded on CD ... The data base Backup is just being burned on a CD. 

5530055 Log files saved on CD ... The Log files are just being burned on a CD. 

5530056 Log files saved on CD. The recording of the Log files on a CD is finished. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-63

Software 



5530057 Backup of the Log files on a CD has failed. — 

5530058 Backup of the Log files on a CD is finished. 

Not all Log files could be saved. 

5530059 Paper calibration failed. One of the measured 

values is out of tolerance. 

Composition of all Log files prior to the burning has failed. 

Only available Log files were saved. 

One of the measured values is out of tolerance. All values 

found are rejected. 

Clean the densitometer measuring plate and try again. 

5530060 MBL finished successfully. — 

5530061 Paper calibration failed. One of the measured values is out of tolerance. All values 

found are rejected. 

Clean the densitometer measuring plate and try again. 

5530062 PBL finished successfully. — 

5530064 Grey scales not within the tolerance range - 

PBL stopped 

5530065 Gray scales not within the tolerance range - 

MBL stopped 

Repeat the operation. If the error reappears check the 

condition of the chemistry, replace it if necessary. 

Repeat the operation. If the error reappears check the 

condition of the chemistry, replace it if necessary. 

5530066 The inserted CD for the order is not empty! Do you really want to burn on the inserted CD ? 

Data was found on the CD. If a wrong CD is in the drive, 

remove the CD now. Burning on an inserted CD starts after 

touching "Start burning". 

5530068 Not enough free storage space available on 

the CD. Please insert a different storage 

medium or stop the operation. 

Not enough free storage space available on the CD. Please 

insert a different storage medium or stop the operation. 

5530069 Autosave on CD finished successfully. Autosave on CD finished successfully. 

5530070 Autosave on CD failed Autosave on CD failed 

5530071 

up to 

5530135 

PBL of magazine 0 finished successfully. 

(. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 to 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .) 



(. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 to 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .) 


5530136 Error: External Printer — 

5530137 Gradient correction started ... — 

5530138 Gradient correction finished successfully. 1. Recalibrate the Master Paper (MBL) 

2. Assign the Master Paper anew (Auto MBL) 

3. Recalibrate all papers (PBL) 

5530139 Gradient correction failed — 

5530140 No paper name indicated for gradient Process stopped. 

correction. 

5530141 Gradient correction in tolerance. — 

5530999 Unknown Information (Custom) — 

3-64 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Software 

3.3 Production Statistics (Clickrate) 

The Clickrate Software component is provided to get a statistic of all products produced 

on the d-lab and use them for own evaluations. 

3.3.1 Recorded Data 

The following statistical data is recorded during the operation of the d-lab.1: 

– Order number, date and time of each order 

– Film length, film type and type (Normal, Reorder, film processing ...) of each order 

– Number of Scans and number of prints (with paper width, length and surface) of each 

order 

– Number of Indexprints and names of the Indexprint configurations 

– Number of Autosaves (saved files) and names of the Autosave configurations 

3.3.2 Type of Saving 

The data mentioned above is saved in a data base created by the d-lab and running on an 

MS Data Engine (MSDE, SQL Server). As this data base can only use limited space on the 

hard disk, the data has to be compressed from time to time (e.g.. each time it is fetched). 

This means that, for example, only the total number of prints of a certain paper 

configuration and the total number of all Scans remain stored. 

3.3.3 Export of Data 

Every time the machine is shut down, the data of the MSDE data base is exported to an 

Access file (ClickRate.mdb). This file holds the statistical data in a relational data base 

structure. The access to the statistical data is by means of an MS Access Installation or 

e.g. via ODBC by means of the Jet Engine and self-programmed applications. This way, 

Reports can be created, or the data can be set into any other desired form. 

To protect the ClickRate.mdb file from manipulations, a check sum is generated when it is 

created. The algorithm used for this is only known to AgfaPhoto. The conformity of the file 

with the check sum can be checked with an additional tool (ClickrateChecker.exe). 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 3-65

Software 


3.3.4 Fetching Data 

The file clickrate.mdb can be found on the d-lab in the directory D:\Data\Statistic and 

can be fetched via a network or Remote connection. 

When this file is fetched by the machine, this must be confirmed by an acknowledgement 

file (Receipt.dat). When the machine is started for the next time, all data older than the 

date in the acknowledgement file is collected in an overview in the d-lab data base and 

the detailed data is deleted. It is then no longer available for other exports. 

The acknowledgement file (Receipt.dat) contains the date and the time in a clear text. In 

addition, there may be a string supplied by the one who fetches the data that contains 

again the date and the time in a coded form. 

The created ClickRate.mdb contains the date and an additional string for all 

acknowledgement files found within a certain period of time. This way, it is possible to 

check whether the date found in the clear text corresponds to the coded string. 

3.3.5 Installation and Deinstallation of the Software Clickrate 

The function exists already in the Main Software. The installation is done by the entry of a 

license code, as is the case for other licensed components. 

Note: 

The enabling remains active in case of a Software Update. After a new installation of 

the Main Software, the program must be enabled again by reentering the license code. 

When Clickrate has been activated once (clickrate_enable), the deinstallation must be 

performed acc. to the same procedure: A license code (clickrate_disable) must be 

entered to switch off the Clickrate. 

3.3.6 Additional Tools supplied by AgfaPhoto 

3.3.6.1 ClickrateReport.mdb 

This Access application allows the selection and opening of fetched ClickRate.mdb files. 

Various example evaluations are offered. 

However, this tool should only be considered as example application for possible own 

evaluation tools. 

3.3.6.2 ClickrateChecker.exe 

This Windows application allows the check of the check sum contained in the file 

Clickrate.mdb. 

This application allows in addition the creation of an acknowledgement file (Receipt.dat) 

■ 

3-66 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Service / Diagnosis 

4 Service / Diagnosis 

4.1 Scripts 

The script language daisy developed for the d-lab is used to create test routines. Finished 

test routines are available in the directory Scripts for the control and check of sensors 

and loads. For this reason, modifying / creating scripts should only become necessary in 

exceptional cases. 

4.1.1 Overview of the Script Folder 

The folder Scripts for Service structures all scripts acc. to their association with the 

main assembly groups. 

These scripts have specially been composed for the work of the service engineer. They 

include the major scripts for the service work. 

These are copies of scripts from the corresponding script folders of assembly groups. It is 

unimportant for the use of the scripts from which storage location they are executed. 

Exposure Controller 


General 

Initialization 

Paper Drive 


Scanner 

Setup 

Comprises scripts to collect information about an exposure controller, to restore the 

µStepper calibration data from the PD EEPROM to the MZ Controller, to eliminate ghost 

effects in prints. 

d-lab.1 Versions with Film Processor: Comprises scripts to control all actuators and 

sensors, film drive simulations and the replenishment system and solution control 

monitoring. 

Comprises scripts to convert files, process of single print cycles and version checks. 

Comprises scripts for the initialization. 

Comprises scripts to check the assembly groups of the paper transport in the Printer part 

Comprises scripts to control all actuators and sensors, paper transport simulations and the 

replenishment system and solution control monitoring as well as the control of the Sorter 

components. 

Not netlab.1: Comprises scripts to check the components of the film drive and the 

Scanner and to create part and test cycles in the film drive and the Scanner area. 

Comprises scripts for data Backup and Setup of the Film Processor, the Printer and the 

Paper Processor. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-1



4.2 Scripts for Service (Folder) 

4.2.1 Exposure Controller 

Get_Expusure_Information.daisy 

Collection of all information about an exposure controller. 

The following information is collected: 

– Board number 

– Serial number 

– System parameters 

Restore_MZ_Calib_Data.daisy 

Restoration of the µStepper calibration data from the PD EEPROM to the MZ Controller. 

Required after a replacement of the MZ Controller. 

Printcycle_GS.daisy 

Printcycle_Delay.daisy 

Write_GS_to_EEPROM.daisy 

Write_Delay_to_EEPROM.daisy 

Run the scripts to compensate double image effects / ghost effects in prints. 

Note: 

Use 8 inch glossy paper for the test. 

Fault Description Reference Script 

Ghost up to 4 mm shifted double image see figure 1 Printcycle_GS.daisy 

DelayCount up to 1 mm shifted double image see figure 2 Printcycle_Delay.daisy 

none no ghost effect see figure 3 — 

4-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Copy the images GhostTest.bmp and 

DelayCount.bmps from CD to D:\Images on 

the MainPC 

Call up the Service functions 

Scripts for Service\General: 

Perform script Image_to_ABD.daisy 

Select image GhostTest.bmp or 

DelayCountTest.bmp depending on the 

distance of the shifted image 

Select zoom position 1 

figure 1: ghost 

figure 2: delay count 

Scripts for Service\Exposure Controller: 

Depending on the drift of the shift perform 

script Printcycle_GS.daisy (5 prints) or script 

Printcycle_Delay.daisy (8 prints) 

FN Number of Exposure is a 5-digit number 

on the front of the exposure unit 

Assess the testprints of Printcycle_GS.daisy 

or Printcycle_Delay.daisy 

Note down the GS Parameter: xx or 

delay=xxx number of the back print on the 

print on which the ghost effect is not visible. 

If the ghost effect is not visible on several 

prints, take the print in the middle of this 

series. 


Perform script 

Write_GS_to_EEPROM.daisy or 

Write_Delay_to_EEPROM.daisy 

Enter the number of the GS-Parameter 

or the number of the delay=xxx of the 

print without the ghost effect under 

Optimal delay value 

Exit the Service functions 

figure 3: no ghost effect 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-3



4.2.2 Film Processor 

Actuator_Control_FP.daisy 

The script allows the check of the condition and the function of the components in the 

Film Processor. 

After the execution of the script, a selection menu is offered that branches into the single 

assembly groups of the Film Processor: 

docking_system 

Switches ON/OFF the LED, the locking magnet and the cutter motor 

ATTENTION! 

RISK OF DESTRUCTION! 

The cutter blades will hit the cover plate if they are activated while the docking 

station is open. 

dryer 

dryer_heater 

leader_cutter 

loading 

mainframe 

processor_drive 

pump 

replenishment_pump 

Switches ON/OFF the dryer fan 

Switches ON/OFF both dryer heaters 

Switches the Leader Cutter from Home to Cut position 

Switches ON/OFF the LED display, the cutter, the shutters, the locking and the transport 

motor 

Switches ON/OFF the cooling fan for the solution pumps 

Switches ON/OFF the FP main drive motor 

Switches ON/OFF the circulation pumps of the solutions and the aeration pump 

Switches ON/OFF the individual replenishment pumps 

CAUTION! 

It should switch all replenishment pumps because otherwise there may be 

docking faults. 

replenishment_tanks 

replenishment_water 

scanner 

tanks 

temperature_control 

water_pump 

Switches ON/OFF the replenisher mixing pumps 

Switches ON/OFF the water supply pumps 

Switches ON/OFF the film stocker flap and the film drive 

Switches ON/OFF the cooling fan 

Switches ON/OFF the CD/BL/SB heaters 

Switches ON/OFF the solenoid valve for the water inlet in the replenisher tanks 

Note: 

The Default setting is 20, corresponding to 2 sec. A change of the setting does not 

cause a change of the time. 

4-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



FP_Simulation_With_Sensor.daisy 

(no information yet) 

Reset_From_Emergency_Mode_FP.daisy 

– If not all replenisher tanks are empty prior to the docking procedure, the machine goes 

into the emergency mode. 

– After the tanks have been emptied, the emergency mode can be exited with this script. 

Note: 

To start the new docking procedure automatically, it must be ensured that the new 

chemical boxes are in the docking station already before the script is run. 

If this is not the case, a system Reset must be initiated with the ON key. 

Sensor_Watchdog_FP.daisy 

– Shows the status and the changes of the sensors in the Film Processor an. 

– When the script is called up, the current status of the sensors is shown. Every change 

of the status of a sensor in the Film Processor is shown. 

Sensor_Watchdog_FP_partial.daisy 



film_load_unit_list 

leader_cutter_list 

– Shows the status and the changes of the sensors of the individual assembly groups in 

the Film Processor. 


of the status of a sensor of the corresponding assembly group in the Film Processor is 

shown. 

Sensor_Watchdog_Stop_FP.daisy 

– Stops all outputs of the sensor status. 

Note: 

This script should always be run after the execution of the scripts 

Sensor_Watchdog_FP.daisy and 

Sensor_Watchdog_FP_partial.daisy. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-5



4.2.3 General 

arptoabdconv.daisy 

Converts arp files into abd files 

bmporjpgtoabdconv.daisy 

Converts bmp or jpg files into abd files 

pbl.daisy 

A PBL test print can be initiated with the script 

printcycle.daisy 

An exposure cycle can be initiated with the script 

printcycle_single_choice.daisy 


Printcycle_With_PA_Sensor.daisy 


Versions_Request.daisy 

This script checks the Firmware versions of the individual assembly groups and shows 

them on the display. 

Note: 

Only functions if the assembly groups have been initialized. 

4-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



4.2.4 Initialization 

Init_dLab.daisy 


functional procedures of the d-lab: 

Menu option 

Function 

AGFA Power OFF Switches off the voltages of the Scanner and the Print Engine. 

AGFA Power OFF/ON & 

RESET & INIT Printer & 

Scanner 

Switches off the voltage of the Scanner and the Print Engine, performs a Reset and 

reinitializes the Printer. The voltage for the Scanner and the Print Engine is switched on 

again. 

AGFA Power On Switches on the voltages of the Scanner and the Print Engine. 

Forced Shutdown — 

INIT FP 

Reinitializes the Film Processor 

INIT Printer 

Reinitializes the Printer 

INIT Scanner 

Reinitializes the Scanner 

Scanner RESET& INIT — 

Scanner 

Shutdown FP 

Switches off the Film Processor 

Shutdown PA 

Switches off the Printer part 

Shutdown Scanner Switches off the Scanner 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-7



4.2.5 Paper Advance (Paper Drive) 

Actuator_Control_PA.daisy 

After the execution of the script, a selection menu is offered that branches into 

the single assembly groups of the Printer part. 

auxilary_drive 

back_printer 

exposure_table 

PAPAMG01 

PAPAMO01 

PABPMO01 

PABPPH01 

PAVCFA01 

PAVCMO01 

The commands UPP and DWN operate the solenoid of the change-over flap. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the transport motor. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the motor of the ink ribbon transport. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the push button of the back printer. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the vacuum fans. 

The commands OFF, ONM, ONN, ONP switch the transport motor. 

OFF = OFF 

ONM = transport from left to right 

ONP = transport from right to left 

ONN = Command to be used between ONM and ONP and vice versa 

Note: 

At present the Service GUI must be left for switch-off. 

lane_distributor PALDMC01 The commands OFF and ONN switch the coupling for the parallel transport. 

PALDMO01 The commands OFF and ONN switch the transport motor in the feed area of 

the LD. 

PALDMO02 The commands ONN, ONP and ONM lift the pressure plate for the back 

printer and create the counter-pressure for the paper rotation. 

PALDMO03 The commands ONP and ONM switch the motor for the paper rotation. 

ONP = turning cw 

ONM = turning ccw 

PALDMO04 The command ONN executes a movement center → home. 

PALDMO05 The commands ONN and OFF switch the paper transport motor in the Lane 

Distributor. 

PALDMO06 The commands OFF and ONN switch the transport motor in the LD exit. 

PALDMO07 omitted 

PALDMO08 The commands OFF and ONN switch the transport motor from the LD to the 


lh_cutter PAPCMO02 The command ONN triggers a cut movement. 

4-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



magazine_left 

PAMDLA03 

PAMDLA04 

PAMDMC03 

PAMDMC04 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the red LED of the left magazine drive. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the green LED of the left magazine 

drive. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the coupling of the magazine drive. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the coupling of the paper length 

metering. 

PAMDMO03 The commands OFF, ONM and ONP switch the paper extraction motor of the 

magazine drive. 

OFF = OFF 

ONM = Transport direction backward 

ONP = Transport direction forward 

PAMDMO04 The commands OFF, ONM and ONP switch the motor of the paper winding 

drive. 

OFF = OFF 



magazine_right PAMDLA01 The commands OFF and ONN switch the red LED of the right magazine 

drive. 

PAMDLA02 The commands OFF and ONN switch the green LED of the right magazine 

drive. 

PAMDMC01 The commands OFF and ONN switch the coupling of the magazine drive. 

PAMDMC02 The commands OFF and ONN switch the coupling of the paper length 

metering. 

PAMDMO01 The commands OFF, ONM and ONP switch the paper extraction motor of the 

magazine drive. 

OFF = OFF 



PAMDMO02 The commands OFF, ONM and ONP switch the motor of the paper winding 

drive. 

OFF = OFF 



rh_cutter PAPCMO01 The command ONN triggers a cut movement. 

shutter PASLMG01 The commands DWN and UPP move the shutter between the Printer and 

the Paper Processor up or down. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-9



Backprinter_Current_Setting.daisy 


Connecting_X_Drive.daisy 


Paper_Shift_Series.daisy 


Printcycle_With_PA_Sensor.daisy 


Sensor_Detector.daisy 

– Shows the status and the changes of the sensors. 


of the status of a sensor is shown. 

Sensor_Watchdog_PA.daisy 

– Shows the status and the changes of the sensors in the Printer. 


of the status of a sensor in the Printer is shown. 

Sensor_Watchdog_PA_partial.daisy 

Shows the status and the changes of the sensors of the individual assembly groups in the 

Printer: 

cutter_list 

exp_table_list 

lane_dist_list 

papermag_list 

When the script is called up, the current status of the sensors is shown. Every change of 

the status of a sensor of the corresponding assembly group in the Printer is shown. 

4-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Sensor_Watchdog_Stop_PA.daisy 

– Stops all outputs of the sensor status. 

Note: 


Sensor_Watchdog_PP.daisy and 

Sensor_Watchdog_PP_partial.daisy. 

Set_Backprinter_Current.daisy 


AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-11



4.2.6 Paper Processor 

Actuator_Control_PP.daisy 

The script allows the check of the condition and the function of the components in the 




densitometer 

docking_system 

PPIDCL01 

PPIDMA01 

PPDSLA01 

PPDSMG01 

PPDSMO01 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the calibration signal. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the "Paper up" signal. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the indicator LED. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the door locking magnet. 

The commands ONMHP, ONMNX, ONPHP and ONPNX switch the cutter 

drive motor. 

ONMHP = Transport direction backward – Home position 

ONPHP = Transport direction forward – Home position 

ONMNX = Transport direction backward – next Cut position 

ONPNX = Transport direction forward – next Cut position 

ATTENTION! 

RISK OF DESTRUCTION! 

The cutter blades will hit the cover plate if they are activated 

while the docking station is open. 

dryer_heater PPDHHT01 The commands OFF and ONN switch the dryer heater1. 

PPDHHT02 The commands OFF and ONN switch the dryer heater2. 

PPDHHT03 The commands OFF and ONN switch the dryer heater1. 

PPDHFA01 The commands OFF and ONN switch the dryer fan. 

lane_shifter PPLSMO01 The commands ONP and ONM switch the drive motor. 

ONP = forward 

ONM = backward 

option PPOPMG01 The commands OFF and ONN switch the water solenoid valve. 

print_outlet 

PPPOMG01 The commands OFF and ONN switch the densitometer pressure magnet. 

PPPOMO01 The commands OFF and ONN switch the drive motor. 

Processor_drive PPPDMO01 The commands OFF and ONN switch the drive motor. 

replenishment_pump PPRPMO01 The commands OFF and ONN switch the replenishment pump for the CD. 

PPRPMO02 The commands OFF and ONN switch the replenishment pump for the BX. 

PPRPMO03 The commands OFF and ONN switch the replenishment pump for the SB. 

4-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



replenishment_tanks PPRTMO01 The commands OFF and ONN switch the replenisher mixing pump. 

replenishment_water 

sorter 

tanks 

temperature_control 

water_pump 

PPRWMO01 The commands OFF and ONN switch the water supply pump for the CD. 



PPSOMO01 

PPSOMO02 

PPSOMO03 

PPTKFA01 

PPTKFA02 

PPTKFA03 

PPCTHT01 

PPCTHT02 

PPCTHT03 

The commands UPP and DWN switch the slide. 

The command ONN moves the bottom belt. 

The command ONN moves the top belt (command does not exist) 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the cooling fan for the CD. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the cooling fan for the BX. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the cooling fan for the SB. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the heater element for the CD. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the heater element for the BX. 

The commands OFF and ONN switch the heater element for the SB. 

PPWPMG01 The command ONNxxx opens the water valve for the replenisher tank CD. 

Default setting: 20 = 2sec. 

PPWPMG02 The command ONNxxx opens the water valve for the replenisher tank BX. 


PPWPMG03 The command ONNxxx opens the water valve for the replenisher tank SB. 


AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-13



Printcycle_Outlet_Sensor.daisy 

An exposure cycle can be initiated with the script. 

The sensors of the outlet unit are checked. 

Connecting_X_Drive.daisy 


Reset_From_Emergency_Mode_PP.daisy 

– If not all replenisher tanks are empty prior to the docking procedure, the machine goes 

into the emergency mode 

– After the tanks have been emptied, the emergency mode can be exited with this script. 

Note: 

To start the new docking procedure automatically, it must be ensured that the new 

chemical boxes are in the docking station already before the script is run. 

If this is not the case, a system Reset must be initiated with the ON key. 

Sensor_Watchdog_PP.daisy 

– Shows the status and the changes of the sensors in the Paper Processor. 


of the status of a sensor in the Paper Processor is shown. 

Sensor_Watchdog_PP_partial.daisy 


assembly groups of the Paper Processor: 

sorter_list 

– Shows the status and the changes of the sensors of the individual assembly groups in 

the Paper Processor. 


of the status of a sensor of the corresponding assembly group in the Paper Processor is 

shown. 

Sensor_Watchdog_Stop_PP.daisy 

Stops all outputs of the sensor status. 

Note: 


Sensor_Watchdog_PP.daisy and 

Sensor_Watchdog_PP_partial.daisy. 

4-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



4.2.7 Scanner 

4_colour_scan_neg_V1.0.daisy 

Used to adjust the CCD. 

Four-color scan (negative) is executed and saved. The user enters the exposure times, 

however default values should be used. The result is a *.bmp which can be evaluated 

immediately. The created *.ars files are stored in X:/scriptscans. 

Prior to the script start connect the X drive 

(\\dlab\imagepc) via the Windows Explorer. 

Start the script with the left one of the two 

Execute buttons 

4_colour_scan_slide_ V1.0.daisy 

Used to adjust the CCD. 

Four-color scan (slide) is executed and saved. The user enters the exposure times, however 

default values should be used. The result is a *.bmp which can be evaluated immediately; 

it is not necessary to mount the slide carrier just for this script. The created *.ars files are 

stored in X:/scriptscans. 





auto_scan_V1.0.daisy 

Execute a 4-color scan with half the white reference time. This script should be preferred 

to the normal 4-color scan, since here no exposure times can be changed. The result 

should be a gray sheet (= positive result). 



AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-15



dark_scans_V1.0.daisy 

Dark scans with short or long exposure times are executed. Data collection for R&R; no 

evaluation on site. The created *.ars files are stored in X:/scriptscans. 





Filmdrive_Offset_2004.03.36.daisy 

The Film Drive Offset can be set. 



Filmfeeder_Offset_V1.01.2004.02.16.daisy 

The Film Feeder Offset can be set with the film or the film gage and saved. 



intensity_main_CCD_V1.0.daisy 

Comparison of the white reference times with TL values of the main CCD. Evaluation on 

site; TL values are displayed in the message box at the end of the script, for comparison 

with the measured values. 



intensity_prescanner_V1.0.daisy 

With this script you will get the white references from the Prescanner. The script runs 

only with film mask 135, IX240 (APS) or 110. 



Turn on Ignore Errors ! 

Results will be shown in a message box and 

written in a log file 

4-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



linearity_scans_V1.0.daisy 

Checks the linearity of the CCD chip. 

Several scans with different exposure times are executed and saved. The script should 

only be executed upon explicit request by R&D. The data for evaluation are in the 

X:/scriptscans/linearity directory. 



log_scans_scan_V1.0.daisy 

After execution of the script and restart of the d-lab, the Prescan data and Main scans will 

be logged onto HD. 

The Files are found in X:/d-lab.1xxxx/bin/*.raw 

IMPORTANT ! 

The Script has to be executed a second time to undo the settings. 

The data on HD should be deleted (disk space!). 

Start the script 

Choose, if you want to log pre- and main 

scan data 

Restart machine with ON button 

Make prints in autoprint or reorder, scan data 

will be logged 

Start script again and choose NO to undo the 

settings 

one_colour_V1.0.daisy 

Individual color channels are scanned with default values (accept the values as they are). 

Script for data collection for R&D. Evaluation on site is not possible: The created *.ars 

files are stored in X:/scriptscans. 






AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-17



position_prescanner_V1.0.daisy 

With this script you can analyze the position of the Prescanner (ccd line); for film mask 

IX240 (APS) and 135. 






read_eeproms_V1.0.daisy 

Read-out of manufacturing and function relevant data of all EEPROMs (5) for the R&D 

and/or productions. 

File containing the information is saved: \logfiles\EEPROMinfo.log 



read_prescanner_V1.0.daisy 

This script reads the CCD line (Prescanner) R/G/B pixel by pixel (without binning). 






Note: 

The shape of the created graphic should be similar to the one 

above. 

4-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



test_LED_V1.0.daisy 

Checks the LED´s. 

Remove the mirror box 

Follow script messages 

Watch the LEDs (for example with a mirror) 

All LEDs flash several times for 2 sec 

test_scanner_V2.0.daisy 

General test for all assemblies and processes. 




write_eeproms_V1.1.2004.04.15.daisy 

All settings can be written individually. Values are entered by the user. It is possible to 

change several values at the same time. The old values are logged and the new values 

are written at the same time. 

Note: 

We recommend to execute the script 

read_eeproms before 




AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-19



4.2.8 Setup 

Backup_MC_data.daisy 

Script for production: EEPROM data is read out and stored in a *.daisy file: 

C:/dlab1/current version/scripts 




Create_Change_FN.daisy 

Script for production: Creation of a file (FN number + type number) in: 

C:/dlab1/current version/PA 

Access to this file by other scripts. 




MCBackupandcfgcreate.daisy 

Script for production: Collection of EEPROM data; creation of a *.cfg file to write to the 

database and/or EEPROM. Storing of the *.cfg file in: 

C:/ dlab1/current version/PA and/or FP and/or PP and/or SC 




Printer_Setup_Set_FP.daisy 

Script for production: Read-out and immediate restore / modification of individual 

EEPROM data. 




4-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Printer_Setup_Set_PA.daisy 


EEPROM data. 




Printer_Setup_Set_PP.daisy 


EEPROM data. 




AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-21



4.3 Passwords 

Machine / area Name Password Rights Note 

MPU 

System Admin Administrator none or 

DLABSERVICE 

Administrator 

System default User dlab dlab Administrator 

BIOS 

Supervisor 

IPU 

SERVICE 

Default User dlab dlab 

Super User 

rescue login 

BIOS 

Supervisor 

Kiosk Software 

linux 

root 

AGFA 

Level 2 Password Operator operator 

All passwords can be changed in the 

Level 3 Password Retailer level3retail 

configuration menu. 

Version 5 does not have the 

passwords for Level 2 and 3 any more. 

Level 4 Password Service eboxservice Access to the configuration menus: 

It is recommended to change the 

preset password. 

Cashier's password (no presetting) Services enabled: 

Minilab 

Instant Printer 

Create CD 

image box 

(no presetting) 

workstation 

Windows XP 

embedded 

Remote Diagnosis 

via Modem and 

Netsupport 

Manager 

Empty upon delivery / new 

installation 

The password for the Administrator is 

empty upon delivery / new 

installation. 

Image MSC Administrator As the User "Image" has 

Administrator rights, all modifications 

can be performed with this User, with 

a few exceptions (Registry). 

REMOTESERVICE 

4-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



4.4 Remote Diagnosis via Modem 

The possibility of remote diagnosis via modem and the Netsupport Manager software 

should minimize the on-site service calls. For this reason the Client part of this software 

is installed on every machine. 

Via PC in the Service Organization dial in to the d-lab is possible: 

– Machine parameters, log files, and database entries can be checked, copied and 

collected. 

– Production settings can be checked and edited. 

– Software levels can be checked. 

– Functions on the machine can be demonstrated for the technicians. 

– Machine functions can be initiated. 

Note: 

Access to the machine should be protected by the customer with suitable means 

(password, modem not active …) to avoid manipulation by unauthorized persons. 

See 4.3 Passwords. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-23



4.4.1 Netsupport Manager for the d-lab 

4.4.1.1 Prerequisites 

– d-lab.1 family: modem installed and configured 

– Remote Service station: PCI-Netsupport 

4.4.1.2 Setup in the d-lab 

Configuration PCI Netsupport Manager 

Start Windows Explorer: 

Start d-lab Watchdog: + 

Enlarge the display with control. 

wd_001 

Start Windows Explorer with execute. 

Leave the Watchdog task control with hide 

wd_002 

4-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Change to directory 

C:\Program Files\NetSupport Manager. 

Start the file pcicfgui.exe 

Select the Advanced option in the window. 

The configuration is started by double-click 

on Master Profile or by selecting the icon. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-25



Check if TCP/IP has been selected. 

Check if port 5405 is set. 

B_SW101 

If required press Change to open the 

following window for password check. 

B_SW102 

Edit, add, or delete password. 

B_SW103 

4-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Set Max Color Depth on 16. 

Set Cache Size on 8 MB. 

B_SW104 

Activate Load Bridge on Startup. 

Select the connected modem under 

Modem/ISDN. 

Note: 

All other settings remain on default value. 

B_SW105 

Leave the configuration with File > Exit. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-27



The question if you want to save the 

modifications must be answered with Yes 

otherwise all changes made before will be 

lost again. 

The question if you want to restart the 

Client must be answered with Yes. 

If the question about restarting the Client 

fails to come, the previous settings must be 

checked since it is possible that a program 

error occurred. 

4-28 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



4.4.1.3 Deactivate Timer Card Watchdog ON for Remote Access via Modem 

For the time of the remote access the “Timer Card Watchdog“ function must be 

deactivated on the d-lab if the d-lab Software is running. Switching off is temporarily up 

to the next software start. 

If the remote session is terminated during the running time, the function must be 

activated again. 

Start Windows Explorer: 

Start d-lab Watchdog 

Enlarge the display with control. 

wd_001 

Deactivate Timer Card Watchdog ON: 

Remove the checkmark from the TIMER 

CARD Watchdog ON checkbox. 

Hide the Watchdog with hide. 

wd_002 

During standby (after shutdown of the d-lab program until switch off time – set up in the 

Switch on menu of the user GUI) no settings must be changed for the function remote 

via modem. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-29



4.5 Log Views and Log Levels 

Log files can be viewed with the Logview program. Filter functions are available to find 

the desired information which can be linked in case of need. See also the following 

sections in this chapter: 

4.6.5 System Logb 

4.6.5.1 Change of Log settings during operation 

4.6.5.2 Browsing through the Logbook 

4.6.5.3 Overview of the existing filter functions 

There are two different ways to change the Log level: 

1. Temporarily via the Watchdog: 

Log levels should be increased only in case of need (selective troubleshooting). This 

should always be done in the way described in the section Watchdog (see 4.6 

Watchdog). In this case, always the standard settings are used after a new software 

start. Performance or storage problems owing to large data volumes are thus avoided. 


2. Persistently in the Registry: 

The Log level settings can be saved permanently in the Registry (see the following 

description). 

Set Log level : 

Start up the d-lab Watchdog: + 

Call up the Registry 

Set the Log levels in the current (running) 

version: 

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\ 

Agfa d-lab.1\DLabSettings\Version 

LK1Db, LK1Gui, LK1Main, LK1Watchdog 

to 4 

LK1IP to 5 

paramlog to 1 

In the Win-Explorer: 

under C:\dlab1\current version\export 

main pc\etc\HKEY local machine.conf 

under 

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\ 

Agfa lab.1\DLabSettings\Version\LXIp] 

set loglevel = dword: 0000005 

Note: 

The Log files of the last 5 software starts are 

saved: LK1Watchdog\WDbackuplimit (5). 

If required, the number can be increased here, 

too. 

Start the machine again by pressing ON. 

4-30 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Save the Log files : 

Burn the Log files on CD under Settings > 

Burning Log files on CD: 

The Log files of MPU and IPU are saved on 

CD. 

The Log files of the Imagepc can also be 

copied manually and burned on CD: 

Connect the network: 

\\imagepc\dlab 

Update on the IP: 

Version\bin\logfiles 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-31



4.6 Watchdog 

4.6.1 Introduction 

A Multitasking operating system like Microsoft Windows 2000 offers the possibility to 

distribute control functions over several processes and capsulate them in this way. Each 

process has its own address area and communicates with other processes by means of 

messages. This communication is ensured in the project of the d-lab control software by 

the Framework. 

Sequenced and synchronized start and end are a problem in such a system. Two or several 

processes might wait for each other, leading to a deadlock in the system. 

For this reason, the main task of the Watchdog process is to start the control processes in 

a fixed order, to monitor them while the d-lab is operating and to provide for correct 

termination of all processes upon system shutdown. This means that the Watchdog is also 

responsible for the synchronization of the startup, the operating and the Shutdown 

conditions between the Software on the Windows PC and the SW on the LINUX PC. 

Another task includes the maintenance of a system logbook (LK1.log) because the 

Watchdog process is ready to work immediately after the start of the Windows operating 

system. In the same way, the Watchdog is the last active d-lab process upon Shutdown 

and is therefore able to enter the end of work on the d-lab into the Log file. In the general 

d-lab system, it is then possible thanks to a programmable Timer plug-in card, to switch 

the d-lab completely on and off at specific times. The programming of this card is ensured 

by the Watchdog as well. 

Besides this actual timing function, the Timer card makes is also possible to boot the d- 

lab again in case of a system error. For this, a Watch function has been implemented on 

the card which checks the WinPC system indirectly at preset intervals by serial 

communication of the Watchdog process with the Timer card. 

4.6.2 Operation and User Interface 

4.6.2.1 Overview 

Besides the interfaces of LK1gui.exe and the DLABServiceGUI.dll, the Watchdog is the 

only other d-lab process to offer a user interface. This allows the modification of special 

properties and behaviors of the Watchdog and/or the general software (system startup, 

Shell, Windows- Shutdown etc.) on the one hand, and on the other hand there are tools 

integrated for the analysis of the system status. 

4-32 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



4.6.2.2 Startup screen 

It takes some time until the normal desktop of the d-lab appears because all processes 

must first have been started, initialized and become ready. 

In order to illustrate the start process of the general software during this time, the 

Watchdog displays a splash screen. 

When this screen appears, the Watchdog has performed already several system checks. 

Besides the progress indication, the splash screen also shows brief information messages 

of a more internal type. The following messages may appear on the status bar, see 

Table on the next page. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-33



Message Moment Type / 

appearance 

There are already DLAB 

applications running. 

WARNING! This is not an 

official d-lab installation... 

Significance 

Startup Error The Watchdog has found lk1*.exe in the Task list 

before it has started processes itself. 

Automatic new start running. 

Startup Problem No d-lab computer system. 

d-lab.1 01.00D Startup Standard Display of the general system version found in the 

descriptive file dlabversions.daisy 

Gabba Gabba Hey Startup Problem The file dlabversions.daisy is not complete, an 

official software packet name cannot be displayed. 

It is probably not a software released for 

installation. 

Updating system.... Startup First start of 

the d-lab 

Software 

Various actions (registrations etc.) are executed by 

the WD at the first start of a SW packet. 

Saving system data.... Startup Standard The log files are saved, the registration is updated. 

IPC power on... Startup Standard The external LINUX PC (ImagePC) is switched on 

Dispatcher init sequence... Startup Standard The d-lab communication network (Framework) is 

initialized 

Launching machine control Startup Standard Successful start of lk1main.exe 

Launching image processing Startup Standard Successful start of lk1ip.exe 

Launching user interface Startup Standard Successful start of lk1gui.exe 

Launching data base Startup Standard Successful start of lk1db.exe 

Init sequence of machine Startup Standard Waiting for APP_RUNNING of Lk1main 

control 

Init sequence of image Startup Standard Waiting for APP_RUNNING of Lk1ip 

processing 

Init sequence of user Startup Standard Waiting for APP_RUNNING of Lk1gui 

interface 

Init sequence of data base Startup Standard Waiting for APP_RUNNING of Lk1db 

Start up of image pc Startup Standard Voltage for the Linux PC switched on, LINUX should 

boot now 

Init sequence of image pc Startup Standard Waiting for the end of the Linux Booting 

Connecting to image PC Startup Standard Waiting for APP_RUNNING of LXIp (Linux side) 

ERROR D-LAB BOOT FAILURE Startup Error A process has not reported ‚ready’ within the preset 

time after startup. The IPC voltage is switched off, 

Restart is tried. 

ERROR IMAGE PC FAILURE Startup Error Error message received by the Linux PC 

(LXWatchdog) after the start. Restart is tried. 


Timer card cannot switch on the IPC voltages 

LXIp process cannot be started or is not running 

any more 

4-34 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Message Moment Type/appeara 

nce 

Significance 

ERROR IMAGE PC FAILURE Operation Error Message from LXWatchdog: 

LXIp process not running any more (crashed) 

ERROR xyz NOT RUNNING Operation Error d-lab.1 process xyz crashed. Restart is tried. 

ERROR xyz NOT 

RESPONDING 

++ DLAB shutdown 

sequence ++ 

Operation Error dlab.1 process xyz does not contact the Watchdog 

any more. Restart is tried. 

Shutdown Standard Shutdown request from MAIN confirmed by the 

Watchdog 

Closing DLAB applications Shutdown Standard Shutdown part I 

++ TIMEOUT ++ Shutdown Error Timeout during Shutdown 

++ Terminating DLAB ++ Shutdown Standard Shutdown part II 

++ Cleaning up ++ Shutdown Only on slow 

systems 

System restart in 5 

seconds....please wait. 

Restart 

Only during 

restart after 

error 

The Watchdog has still found processes in the task 

list after all "Ready" messages. After 40 seconds of 

this display, the remaining lk1*.exe are terminated 

by "kill". 

The user can stop the restart during this time by 

making entries 

DLAB system restart active Restart Only during Initializations for restart are performed 

restart after 

error 

Setup finished, please wait... Update Standard Setup has copied all files, the Watchdog starts the 

new SW version 

Please wait, rebooting 

system... 

Update Standard Restart after Update 

Watchdog running alone... Startup Only for 

processing 

The Watchdog runs without all other d-lab 

processes. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-35



4.6.2.3 Standard operator interface 

The normal Watchdog's operator interface comes up upon operator request. This can be 

done by alternative means: 

– double-click on the system bar 

– context menu on the WD Icon 

– direct access via the keyboard or 

– by means of the Watchdog symbol on the service interface 

watchdog1 

Watchdog buttons 

The standard operator interface offers the user: 

– information about the current general status (errors etc.) 

– access to the extended functions of the Watchdog (control) 

– the possibility to close the software without shutting down the d-lab hardware (exit), 

see also Note below. 

– the possibility to close just the Watchdog window but not the program itself (hide), 

see also Note below. 

Notes: 

Normal procedure: use hide if the watchdog window should not be displayed. The 

watchdog is still active, only the window will be hidden. 

In contrast to the exit button, the Watchdog closes the software directly by means of a 

"kill" access when is operated in the dialogue, i.e. it does not close it in a regular 

way. The key combination has the same effect here as . 

Watchdog symbol 

Depending on the system status, the Watchdog symbol is represented differently in the 

dialogue: 

Symbol Color Status 

green during normal operation 

yellow 

red 

when the Watchdog is just performing an action, 

e.g. Startup, finding the Task list) 

in case of error conditions 

4-36 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



4.6.3 Extended operator interface 

After pressing the control button, the dialog expands and shows the extended 

setting options of the Watchdog. 

wd_003 

Note: 

As several setting combinations are possible that should only be performed on 

condition that one knows exactly what to do, a few operator controls are deactivated in 

the Release version of the software (the figure shows the Release version). 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-37



Operator controls 

standard 

exit 

hide 

DEBUGMODE 

SYSTEM SHUTDOWN ENABLED 

SW UPGRADE 

Logbook 

version 

reboot 

shell 

Launch GUI, DB, IP, MAIN, IP 

watch GUI, DB, IP, MAIN, IP Extern 

refresh 

logon 

execute 

Process list 

Selection list Explorer,... 

TIMER CARD WATCHDOG ON 

Function 

The dialog appears again in the standard view (small) 

The software is closed (without Hardware Shutdown) 

The Watchdog is hidden again (otherwise always "topmost") 

Activates a simpler error handling (no automatic restart), the Watchdog is not 

entered automatically as shell, Windows is not closed. 

The computer is switched off completely when the SW is closed (except via 

, + ) 

The software checks the Firmware upon initialization and performs automatic 

updates (Downloads) when required 

The system logbook is displayed (file LK1.log) 

The overview of the installed PC software is displayed 

This button triggers a pure new start 

The entered shell is modified. If the Explorer is active at this moment, it is 

then the current Watchdog. An inquiry comes up prior to the change. 

The start of the process concerned is activated (light) or deactivated. 

Deactivation only makes sense for troubleshooting, hence deactivated in the 

Release. 

The monitoring of the process concerned is activated (light) or deactivated. 

Deactivation only makes sense for troubleshooting, hence deactivated in the 

Release. 

Update of the task list (otherwise refreshed every 10 seconds) and validation 

of the current settings in the dialog 

Shows the dialog for the management of the automatic Logon User 

Performs the process shown in the selection box. 

Shows all presently running processes (same as the Task Manager) 

Shows the process to be started with execute. 

cmd shell> Input prompt 

explorer > Windows Explorer 

regedit > Registration editor 

regedit32.exe > Registration editor 32 

taskmanager > Windows Task Manager 

notepad > Text Editor 

perfmonitor > Windows Performance Monitor 

systeminfo > Windows Diagnostic 

eventviewer > Windows Event Display 

usermanager > Windows User Manager 

mspaint.exe > MS Paint to save Screenshots (push button) 

Activation of the monitoring of the WD by the external Timer card. If a 

message fails, the Timer card starts the PC again automatically. This case can 

be recognized by the Timer card lamp flashing several times. 

4-38 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



4.6.4 Keyboard Hooks 

If Windows runs with the "normal" Explorer shell, the Watchdog is accessible via an Icon in 

the System Tray. 

But as the user interface is maximized during normal use of the software and appears 

above all other windows, another mechanism has been provided for access. 

Alt+ Windows brings up the version information and Alt+ Menu right shows the 

Logbook. + (left or right) calls up the Watchdog main dialog (always the 

left key is meant). 

These key combinations are independent of the application in the foreground and 'hooks' 

into the processing of all keyboard entries. 

Note: 

To use this function, the library wd_hook.dll must exist in the directory of the Watchdog. 

The handling of the automatic appearance of an application window has been changed 

under Windows 2000. The standard setting is now such that no application has this right. 

To correct this standard behavior, two codes must be modified in the registration for the 

current user: 

HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Control Panel\Desktop\ ForegroundFlashCount = 0 

HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Control Panel\Desktop\ ForegroundLockTimeout = 0 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-39



4.6.5 System Logbook 

To get access to information in the system Log file LK1.log during operation, it is 

sufficient to press the ALT menu and the Logbook will the shown. There, it is possible to 

modify the Log settings of the running processes and browse through the current 

Logbook. 

In view of a quick display, only the last current 40.000 Bytes are represented. 

4-40 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto




The Log settings of the running d-lab processes are shown on the right side of the system 

Logbook. At the top, a process can be selected and the current settings are checked and 

displayed. 

It is then possible for troubleshooting to work at first with the standard Log settings (Level 

ERROR or BOOK) and open the Logbook shortly before the error appears and then set it to 

INFO or ENTRY. 

Operation: 

Select the process (e.g. MAIN), select Log level (e.g. INFO) and press apply. The Log 

displays turn gray for a short while until the previously changed and then requested 

settings are displayed again (like in the figure: MAIN has the current Log Level INFO). 

Notes: 

No entries are shown below the Level JOBS in the system Logbook. For lower Log 

levels an effect only results from the process Log files lk1main.log, l1kip.log ... These 

files can be viewed on the service desktop. 

The option PARAM switches the parameter Logging (xml files in the Log folder) on or 

off collectively for all d-lab processes. 

In the software versions < 7.00F the setting is kept. But this is no longer valid as of 

software version 7.00F, i.e. the Paramlog settings of the registration are valid again 

after a new start of the software (e.g. for the Watchdog 

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Agfa d-lab.1\DLabSettings\RBv_xyz\ 

LK1Watchdog\ParamLog =1). 

4.6.5.2 Browsing through the Logbook 

It is possible for a faster analysis of the system status to use some filter functions in the 

system Logbook. 

Select tools in the logbook window 

Activate the desired filter 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-41



4.6.5.3 Overview of the existing filter functions 

filter complete file 

• Filter "selected thread" 

• Filter "selected process" 

• Filter "error messages" 

• Filter "all serial comm" 

• Filter "scanner" 

• Filter "printer" 

• Filter "film prosser" 

• Filter "ZA control" 

• Filter "complete Logfile" 

• Filter "only last entries" 

• Filter "only entries with" 

When this box is activated, not only the contents shown in the log window is filtered, 

but ALWAYS the whole Logbook dlab.log on the hard disk. 

Select a line in the Logbook, press filter "apply", only the entries of this single thread 

are shown. 

Select a line in the Logbook, press filter "apply", only the entries of this single process 

are shown. 

All entries of the type FXLOGERROR or with the contents "ERROR" are shown. 

Only the serial communication to PR, SC and FP is shown. 

Only the serial communication to SC is shown. 

Only the serial communication to PR/PP is shown. 

Only the serial communication to FP is shown. 

Only the actions of the cycle control are shown. 

No filtering, no limitation of the displayed data to 40.000 Bytes. 

Loads the last current 20.000 Bytes again. As the filter functions always affect the 

currently displayed contents, it may have to be performed again prior to every filter 

action. 

Only entries containing freely editable text are displayed, the check box "case 

sensitive" being taken into consideration. The text can contain the link of several 

expressions that should be contained at will (logic OR). The vertical stroke should be 

used as separator, e.g. "PP|LP" finds all entries with "PP" or "LP". 

Action buttons: 

• (black symbol) closes the filter dialog 

• (red symbol) strops the current action 

(green symbol) starts the selected filter action 

Basically, it is also possible by means of the Update button to reload the Logbook with 

the last 20.000 Bytes and brows through it again with . 

The number of currently read Bytes is also shown on the status bar. 

The tools to browse through the system Logbook are only intended for quick access on 

the machine. 

4-42 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



4.6.5.4 Display of the software versions 

To get access to the information of the currently d-lab MAIN software running on the PC, 

only the keys + Windows have to be pressed and the versions are displayed. 

modules 

The official designation of the d-lab system is displayed at the top in the dialog, as is 

indicated in the file dlabversions.daisy (in this case a "RBv_xxx" designation). 

The Watchdog performs a comparison of the module versions found (.exe, .dll) with the 

versions indicated in the file mainversions.daisy and belonging to the SW release 

(Package). It results from the above example that the SW has been modified (patched), 

therefore the display of the system version is red. 

The SW shown in the figure belonged originally to the general packet RBv0800_51; this is 

a Debug version and all modules have been modified. "patched" means in the status 

display that this module has at least been linked again (the translation information 

getting lost so that the Build Field is empty) and that the original function may still be 

identical. It might also be possible that only the version was not stepped up upon the 

modification, but that the software is completely different. Such modifications should 

therefore be avoided. 

The status Modified identifies a replaced module because both the version and the 

translation information have changed (see dlabproxy.dll: the packet included version 

1.118.14, but the examples show version 1.118.14). 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-43



4.6.5.5 Registration codes 

The following shows a list of the Watchdog codes in the registration and explains their 

significance. 

Version management 

Always the code with the name of the software entered under RunningVersion is used, e.g. 

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Agfa\DLabSettings \RunningVersion\Version = 

RB_1000_04_debug. 

This value is managed and set by the Watchdog and contains in general the name of the 

software version of the file Mainversions.daisy. In the example, the active branch is thus 

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Agfa\DLabSettings\RB_1000_04_debug\LK1Watchdog] 

WD code Standard value Significance / notes 

loglevel dword:00000001 Significance: Sets the Log detail depth in lk1watchdog.log 

(ERROR=1, BOOK=2,JOBS=3, INFO=4, ENTRY=5) 

Note: Values greater than four should not figure here on customer 

machines, otherwise the Log file would be unnecessarily big. 

IP name LK1ip Significance: Name of the image processing process. 

Note: Only settable for Debug purposes (Purify) 

ZA name LK1main Significance: Name of the cycle control. 


GUI name Lk1gui Significance: Name of the user interface process. 


DB name LK1db Significance: Name of the database process. 


ZA watch enabled dword:00000001 Significance: Deactivation of the process monitoring for the run time 

(Task list) 

Note: Do not deactivate! Only for Debug purposes, R&D intern. 

IP watch enabled dword:00000001 Significance: Deactivation of the process monitoring for the run time 

(Task list) 


GUI watch enabled dword:00000001 Significance: Deactivation of the process monitoring for the run time 

(Task list) 


DB watch enabled dword:00000001 Significance: Deactivation of the process monitoring for the run time 

(Task list) 


ZA start enabled dword:00000001 Significance: Deactivation of the control by the Watchdog. 


IP start enabled dword:00000001 Significance: Deactivation of the control by the Watchdog. 


GUI start enabled dword:00000001 Significance: Deactivation of the control by the Watchdog. 


DB start enabled dword:00000001 Significance: Deactivation of the control by the Watchdog. 


IP EXTERN PWR 

off on error 

dword:00000001 

Significance: In case of communication errors with the external 

Linux PC, the PC is switched off and boots again before the Windows 

software starts again. 

Note: Should always remain switched on. 

4-44 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



WD code Standard value Significance / Notes 

IP EXTERN watch 

enabled 

dword:00000001 Significance: This code is used to inform the Watchdog that an external 

Linux PC exists and must be included in the start process. 

Notes: Preparation for a system with only one computer and two IP 

processes under Windows. Must always remain switched on on 

systems with ME status. 

Start SerialConsole 

Thread 

dword:00000000 

Significance: On systems with a second Linux PC, an additional 

Logging of the Linux operating system is activated. The information is 

transmitted via the serial interface from the SerialConsole Port. 

Notes: Only for the Lab/Service. Transfer of information of the Linux 

operating system before the Windows Watchdog is running (Bootinfo) 

SerialConsole Port COM1 Significance: See Start SerialConsole Thread. 

Notes: Only for the Lab/Service. 

Start Syslogd 

Thread 

dword:00000001 Significance: On systems with a second Linux PC, additional system 

information of the Linux operating system is activated when this code 

is set to ON (=1). 

RAS process leer Significance: Here a process can be entered the WD should carry out 

after Shutdown of the d-lab (Remote access etc). 

WD debug mode dword:00000000 Significance: Activation of the Debug mode for the Watchdog. Notes: 

Should ALWAYS be deactivated at customers because some automatic 

functions are not active otherwise (automatic Reboot, PC shutdown 

etc). 

Splash screen 

enabled 

dword:00000001 Significance: To switch off the AGFA start screen. 

Notes: Only useful for convenient Debugging, LGESW internal. 

WD watch time dword:0000000a Significance: Time interval for the check of the Win Task list. 

Notes: Only useful for convenient Debugging, LGESW internal. 

ZA sgui enabled dword:00000000 Significance: Start of the dlabmain process directly in the Service-GUI. 

Notes: No customer function, not released. 

WD watch enabled dword:00000001 Significance: Deactivation of the COMPLETE control by the Watchdog. 

Notes: Do not deactivate! Only for Debug purposes, R&D intern. 

TRY_CATCH dword:00000001 Significance: no function. 

Notes: Standard code not used. 

WD Timer 

watchdog enabled 

dword:00000001 

Significance: Activation of the control by the Timer card. 

Notes: Can also be switched on and off via the Watchdog dialog. 

WD disk warning dword:00000050 Significance: Indication of free residual space on the installation hard 

disk from which the user will be warned (hard disk full). 

Notes: Is reloaded several times during operation (hence editable 

without closing the d-lab SW). 

WD disk full dword:00000010 Significance: Indication of minimum free residual space on the 

installation hard disk. 

Notes: Is reloaded several times during operation (hence editable 

without closing the d-lab SW). The SW is not started any more if this 

value is not reached! 

If the value is zero, the hard disk space monitoring is switched off. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-45



WD code Standard value Significance / Notes 

Logoptions 

>



4.6.6 Structure of the Software 

LX 

IP Process 

TI Mailbox 

Message 

TI Proxy 

DLABPROXY.DLL 

ALIVE 

"Alive" 

Logging 

WATCHDOG 

Control 

WATCH 

Mailbox 

Control 

LOG Mailbox 

Logging 

RS232 

Info 

LX 

Watchdog 

"Alive" 

"Alive" 

"Alive" 

"Alive" 

Logging 

ZA Process 

DB Process 

TIMER card 

in the PC 

IP Process 

GUI Process 

LINUX-PC 

WINDOWS 2000 

Current on/off 

Power supply 

Current on/off 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-47



4.6.6.1 Interface interprocess communication 

The interface of the Watchdog process to the other processes is described by Framework 

messages and Windows messages. All messages are listed in the following table. 

Message Data Application Receiver 

WM_REQ_APP_CLOSING LPARAM 

Shutdown- Sequence Windows BROADCAST; LPARAM 

(Windows Message) Receiver ENUM Part1, start 

WM_ACK_APP_CLOSING 

(Windows Message) 

WM_MSG_APP_CLOSE 


WM_MSG_APP_EXIT 


MSG_APP_RUNNING 

MSG_WD_ALIVE 

REQ_WD_WATCH_ENABLE 

ACK_WD_WATCH_ENABLE 

MSG_WD_SHUTDOWN 

LPARAM 

Sender ENUM 

LPARAM 

Receiver ENUM 

LPARAM 

Sender ENUM 

Sender name 

(Procssmail ox) 

Sender name 


Sender name 


Sender name 

(Processmail ox) 

ZA Process or 

Watchdog internal 

Shutdown- Sequence 

Part1, end 


Part1, start 


Part2, end 

Boot sequence 

confirmation 

d-lab normal operation 

Not used 

Not used 

Shutdown Sequence start 

Windows BROADCAST; LPARAM 



MB_WD_WATCH 

MB_WD_WATCH 

MB_WD_WATCH 

Sender mailbox 

MB_WD_WATCH 

MSG_WD_WINDOWS Watchdog internal MB_WD_WATCH 

REQ_LOG_ENABLE Not used Dispatcher mailbox 

ACK_LOG_ENABLE Not used MB_WD_LOG 

REQ_LOG_SETTINGS Mailbox name Check of the current Log Dispatcher mailbox 

settings 

ACK_LOG_SETTINGS String (Vector) Current Log settings MB_WD_LOG 

REQ_WD_SOFTWARE_INFO None Version check request MB_WD_WATCH 

ACK_WD_SOFTWARE_INFO ACK_WD_SOFTWARE_ 

Sender mailbox 

INFO_Struct 

MSG_WD_LOG Logtext Entry in the Log file MB_WD_LOG 

WM_MSG_SETUP_FINISHED None 

File copying of the d-lab 

Setup finished, the WD 

boots and starts the 

newly installed SW 

Windows BROADCAST 

4-48 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



4.6.6.2 Interface to the Timer card 

Communication with the Timer card is exclusively performed by Framework messages to 

the pertaining Proxy of the Timer card TIP. The messages and the structure of a proxy are 

described in the documentation of dlabproxy.dll. 

To give a brief overview, the functions used by the Watchdog in the TIP are listed here. 

Function 

Setting the time on TI 

REQ_TI_SETTIME 

Hardware – Watchdog function 

REQ_TI_WATCHENABLE 

MSG_TI_TRIGGER 

REQ_TI_PCSHUTDOWN 

Application 

The Timer card has its own clock to be synchronized with the clock of the PCs. 

As the user can only set the PC clock on the desktop, the Watchdog 

synchronizes TI and the PC at startup. 

On the RS232 interface this corresponds to the command [SC]. 

The Timer card can monitor the functions of the operating system in that the 

Watchdog regularly sends commands to the card. For this, a monitoring interval 

is to be set which must have received at least one "Alive" message. 

On the RS232 interface this corresponds to the command [TO]. 

ALIVE message sent by the Watchdog to the Timer card (at present every 

10 seconds) 

On the RS232 interface this corresponds to the command [TW]. 

Orders the Timer card to SWITCH OFF the PC after expiry of a certain time 

(120 seconds is standard). 

On the RS232 interface this corresponds to the command [SD]. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-49



4.6.7 Sequence diagram 

4.6.7.1 d-lab.1 startup 

The Watchdog starts all d-lab processes via the Windows API function 

CreateProcess(). This leads to an entry IsRunning=TRUE in the Watchdoginternal 

control structure. As soon as the corresponding process is ready, it sends a 

MSG_APP_RUNNING message to the Watchdog. In the control class of the WD, this is 

indicated by the status m_CtrlData[index].Status = E_PROC_WORKING. 

MSG_APP_RUNNING 

MB_WD_WATCH 

ZA IP 

GUI DB 

In the message, each process also sends the Handle to its main window. This way, 

Windows message mechanisms with direct addressees (i.e. without Windows Broadcast) 

can be used upon shutdown. 

As soon as all MSG_APP_RUNNING messages of the processes to be monitored have 

arrived, the Watchdog informs each sender mailbox by sending a MSG_SYS_RUNNING 

that the startup phase of the software (not the machine!) is now finished. 

The splash screen disappears. 

4.6.7.2 Watch function 

The Watchdog checks at the interval of the preset watch time (10 seconds) whether all 

processes to be monitored are listed in the task list. And the processes have to report to 

the Watchdog within this stipulated time period by sending the message 

MSG_WD_ALIVE. 

4-50 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



4.6.7.3 d-lab.1 Shutdown 

The d-lab is shut down by selecting Shutdown on the desktop. 

The cycle control then sends the message MSG_WD_SHUTDOWN to the Watchdog and 

the Shutdown sequence starts. 

The Watchdog confirms the message by sending the inquiry WM_REQ_APP_CLOSING 

to the process of the cycle control (Windows Broadcast, LPARAM containing the 

addressee "ZA"). Following this inquiry, the actual machine shutdown is started, i.e. all 

main assembly groups get Shutdown requests etc. When this phase is finished 

successfully, the cycle control replies by WM_ACK_APP_CLOSING and the Watchdog 

sends WM_REQ_APP_CLOSING to all other processes (IP, GUI, DB). 

After all processes have sent the reply WM_ACK_APP_CLOSING (Timeout for this is 

set at present to 40 seconds), the last phase of the Shutdown is initiated. For this, the 

Watchdog sends the same message WM_MSG_APP_CLOSE concurrently to all 

processes; this means the request to definitively terminate the corresponding application 

(a new start could happen after WM_ACK_APP_CLOSING). Inter-process communication 

does not take place any more after this and all processes have to send a 

WM_MSG_APP_EXIT to the Watchdog as last message. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-51



MB_ZA_MC MSG_WD_SHUTDOWN MB_WD_WATCH 

ZA hWnd WM_REQ_APP_CLOSING (ZA) WD hWnd 

ZA hWnd WM_ACK_APP_CLOSING (ZA) WD hWnd 

SHUTDOWN 

DLAB 

IP hWnd WM_REQ_APP_CLOSING (IP) WD hWnd 

GUI hWnd WM_REQ_APP_CLOSING (GUI) WD hWnd 

DB hWnd WM_REQ_APP_CLOSING (DB) WD hWnd 

IP hWnd WM_ACK_APP_CLOSING (IP) WD hWnd 

GUI hWnd WM_ACK_APP_CLOSING (GUI) WD hWnd 

DB hWnd WM_ACK_APP_CLOSING (DB) WD hWnd 

EXIT DLAB 

ALLE WM_MSG_APP_CLOSE WD hWnd 

ALLE WM_MSG_APP_EXIT WD hWnd 

The Watchdog process waits until all d-lab applications have sent this EXIT message and 

have definitively disappeared from the Task list. Upon this, the Watchdog closes itself 

(and shuts down the system). 

The PC is then switched off by the Timer card put in charge of this by the Watchdog by 

means of the corresponding Power Off command. 

Apart from this standard method, the d-lab software can also be closed in the menu item 

"Close", in the system menu of the Watchdog interface (or + ). In this 

case, the Watchdog assumes an error condition of the system and the d-lab applications 

are terminated directly by means of the "kill" access. 

4-52 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



4.7 MC Data 

This is the machine-specific data. At every startup, the data is transmitted to the 

respective computer and stored in the pertaining EEPROM. A new start is then required so 

that a possible change of the data becomes effective. 

The Flash Rom also holds standard values (Default values). If the data of the EEPROM is 

defective or if no data is available, the standard values are used until the main CPU sends 

new data. 

Note: 

The data indicated here is based on software version 1.08 (FP, PP) and 1.09 (PA). As 

new variables are added or others are removed or modified with every new version, it 

cannot be guaranteed that the following lists are of the latest status. 

4.7.1 Modify and save MC Data 

MCtoDB 

Select the .cfg file to be modified and carry 

out the modification 

Save the changes in the cfg. file (1) 

Confirm Load (2) 

Confirm ImporttoDatabase (3): 

Display in the window at the bottom right 

CFG File Import finished 

Confirm ExportfromDatabase (4): 

Display in the window at the bottom right 

CFG Generation finished 

Click on any other .cfg file, then return to 

the modified .cfg file: 

It only contains the data saved in the 

database (visible modification of the file, 

depending on the modification done). 

Check that the relevant data in the .cfg file 

corresponds to the data on the existing 

Backup hardcopies. 

Exit ServiceGUI 

Start the system again with the ON key: 

All parameters of the database are copied to 

the Backup database. 

Create a database Backup 

Open Settings 

Enter the name of the Backup database 

under Settings 

Start the data backup (on CD or another 

suitable storage medium) 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-53



4.7.2 FP MC Data Lists (only d-lab.1 allrounder) 

Power 

frequency 

Temperature 

control 

Replenishment 

Code Format Description Unit Min Max Default 

CYCLE n Adjustment of the mains frequency 0 = 50 Hz 0 1 0 

1 = 60 Hz 

DVSET nnn CD temperature 0.1°C 335 420 378 

BLSET nnn BL temperature 0.1°C 300 450 365 

SBSET nnn SB temperature 0.1°C 300 450 360 

DYSET nnn Dryer temperature 0.1°C 300 700 600 

PDSET nnn Dryer pre-heating temperature 0.1°C 300 700 300 

DVRNG nnn CD temperature tolerance range 0.1°C 1 100 2 

BLRNG nnn BL temperature tolerance range 0.1°C 1 100 15 

SBRNG nnn SB temperature tolerance range 0.1°C 1 100 20 

DYRNG nnn Dryer temperature tolerance range 0.1°C 1 200 80 

DVSNS ±nn Calibration: CD temperature sensor 0,1 °C -12 12 0 

BLSNS ±nn Calibration: BL temperature sensor 0,1 °C -50 50 0 

SBSNS ±nn Calibration: SB temperature sensor 0,1 °C -50 50 0 

DRYUP nnn Increased temperature in dryer for 0,1 °C 0 200 100 

120 film 

DYAPS nnn Increased temperature in dryer for 0,1 °C 0 300 100 

IX240 film 

DOCAT n Docking start mode 0 = auto 

0 1 0 

1 = manual 

DSMOD n Docking (pump error and content 0 = error 

0 1 1 

error) error clear mode 

cannot 

be cleared 

1 = error can 

be cleared 

DLOWP nnnnn CD water replenishment rate 0.1ml/m 2 0 30000 0 

BLOWP nnnnn BL water replenishment rate 0.1ml/m 2 0 30000 0 

FLOWP nnnnn FX water replenishment rate 0.1ml/m 2 0 30000 0 

SLOWP nnnnn SB water replenishment rate 0.1ml/m 2 0 30000 5587 

DMXTM nnn Mixing time of CD replenisher tanks sec 60 900 180 

FMXTM nnn Mixing time of FX replenisher tanks sec 60 900 180 

4-54 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Replenishment: 

Through-put 

dependent 

Water 

replenishment 


DLOWI nnnnn CD water replenishment rate 

when throughput < SQMIN 

BLOWI nnnnn BL water replenishment rate 


FLOWI nnnnn FX water replenishment rate 


SLOWI nnnnn SB water replenishment rate 


DLOWM nnnnn CD water replenishment rate 

when throughput < SQMAX 

BLOWM nnnnn BL water replenishment rate 


FLOWM nnnnn FX water replenishment rate 


SLOWM nnnnn SB water replenishment rate 


RERAT nnn Increase rate of chemical replenishment 

when throughput ≥ SQMIN 

REINC nnn Increase rate of chemical replenishment 


REMAX nnn Increase rate of chemical replenishment 


SQMIN nnnn Throughput level 1 

(increased replenishment) 

0.1ml/m 2 0 30000 0 

0.1ml/m 2 0 30000 0 

0.1ml/m 2 0 30000 0 

0.1ml/m 2 0 30000 7263 

0.1ml/m 2 0 30000 0 

0.1ml/m 2 0 30000 0 

0.1ml/m 2 0 30000 0 

0.1ml/m 2 0 30000 9497 

% 0 300 100 

% 0 300 130 

% 0 300 170 

0.001m 2 358 644 465 

SQMAX nnnn Throughput level 2 

(maximum replenishment) 

0.001m 2 107 358 215 

MAXDY nnnn Maximum actual daily throughput 0.001m 2 0 9999 1000 

DWADJ nnn Calibration of the CD water 

% 70 130 100 

replenishing pump 

BWADJ nnn Calibration of the BL water 

% 70 130 100 


FWADJ nnn Calibration of the FX water 

% 70 130 100 


SWADJ nnn Calibration of the SB water 

% 70 130 100 


WRINT nnn Interval of the water inlet min 1 999 60 

DWPRP nnn Quantity of water added every 3 hours ml/3h 0 200 40 

to CD 

BWPRP nnn Quantity of water added every 3 hours ml/3h 0 85 17 

to BL 

FWPRP nnn Quantity of water added every 3 hours ml/3h 0 200 40 

to FX 

SWPRP nnn Quantity of water added every 3 hours ml/3h 0 300 60 

to SB 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-55



Cont.: 

Water 

replenishment 

Konica 

effluent 

processor 

Timing 


DWRAT nn Rate of water added to CD tank at 

startup (DWRAT * shutoff time) 

BWRAT nn Rate of water added to BL tank at 

startup (BWRAT * shutoff time) 

FWRAT nn Rate of water added to FIX tank at 

startup (FWRAT * shutoff time) 

SWRAT nn Rate of water added to SB tank at 

startup (SWRAT * shutoff time) 

DWPRP nnn Maximum amount of water 

replenishment at startup (CD pump) 

BWPRP nnn Maximum amount of water 

replenishment at startup (BL pump) 

ml/hour 0 20 7 




ml 0 600 168 

ml 0 600 120 

FWPRP nnn Maximum amount of water 

replenishment at startup (FX pump) 

mL 0 600 240 

SWPRP nnn Maximum amount of water 

ml 0 600 288 

replenishment at startup (SB pump) 

XCR40 n Use of the Konica ACR40 0 = no 0 1 0 

1 = yes 

INTFM nnn Minimum film interval time sec 15 600 30 

WAIRN nn Timing of CO command. sec 5 60 30 

0 = basic 0 99 1 

model 

1 = w/o 

BL/SB 

effluent 

tank 

Hardware MCREV nn Machine level 

(w/o = without) 

Data check VALID n Data reliability 0 = no 

1 = yes 

0 1 1 

4-56 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



4.7.3 PA MC Data List 

Processor 

speed 

Paper cut 

length 


SPEED n Processing speed 0 = 1414 mm/min 0 1 0 

1 = 989 mm/min 

RCUTP ±nn Cutting length correction for 0.25 mm -20 20 0 

the first print (R) 

LCUTP ±nn Cutting length correction for 0.25 mm -20 20 0 

the first print (L) 

RCUTZ nnnn Cutting length correction right 0,0001 mm 2000 3000 2500 

LCUTZ nnnn Cutting length correction left 0,0001 mm 2000 3000 2500 

RCUTS nnnn Cutting length correction right: 

l ≤ 165 

0,0001 mm 2000 3000 2500 

LCUTS nnnn Cutting length correction left: 0,0001 mm 2000 3000 2500 

l ≤ 165 

Paper end PEMOD n Paper END mode 0 = returned to 

magazine 

1 = goes to 

exposure table 

Exposure 

position 

Exposure 

Timing 

VCACR ±nn Right centre position of the 0,25 mm -20 20 0 

suction belt 

VCACL ±nn Left centre position of the 

suction belt 

0,25 mm -20 20 0 

Movement correction of the 0,0001 mm 2000 3000 2500 

exposure table 

PPTIM nnn PX command transmitting time ms 0 600 100 

Thin paper THINP n Use of thin paper 0 = no 

0 1 0 

1 = yes 

Back print BPLAN n Back print character set 0 = Other than 0 1 0 

Japanese 

1 = Japanese 

BPTXT n Select the backprint text type 0= unicode 

1= ASCII code 

0 1 0 

BPHTM nnn Control of the current loading 3.3 µs 50 104 104 

time for the head 

Sort SORCN nn Sorter movement counter prints 0 50 43 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-57




Hardware 

LDREV n Lane Distributor level 0 1 1 

RMSNS nnn 

Distance of right sensors for 

measurement of diameter 

LMSNS nnn Distance of left sensors for 

measurement of diameter 

MDPER nnn 

Looseness adjustment inside the 

paper magazine. 

This command will be used for 

machines without the new 

diameter measurement system. 

mm 100 500 260 

mm 100 500 337 

% 103 120 105 

MDADD n Additional amount of looseness % 0 9 0 

when the paper diameter is 

120 mm or less. 

This command will be used for 

machines without the new 

diameter measurement system. 

MCREV nn Machine level 0= without 

microstep 

1= with microstep 

2= new pad 

movement for 

paper rotation 

0 99 2 

LDTYP n LD type (position of the clutch) 0= auto 

0 2 0 

1= rear 

see table below 

2= front 


1 = yes 

0 1 1 

Hardware 

with Film Processor and 

with Docking 

Machine Versions 

without FP and 

with Docking 


without Docking 

Sorter Sorter Sorter 

Single tray 6 inch 8 inch Single tray 6 inch 8 inch Single tray 

LDTYP 0 or 1 

Default = 0 

0 0 0 0 0 0 

4-58 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



4.7.4 PP MC Data List 

Power 

frequency 

Processor 

speed 

Temperature 

control 

Replenishment 


CYCLE n Adjustment of the mains 0 = 50 Hz 

0 1 0 

frequency 

1 = 60 Hz 

SPEED n Processing speed 

see table below 

0 = 1414mm/min 

1 = 1697mm/min 

0 1 0 

DVSET nnn CD temperature 0.1°C 335 420 380 

BFSET nnn BF temperature 0.1°C 300 450 380 

SBSET nnn SB temperature 0.1°C 300 450 380 

DYSET nnn Dryer temperature 0.1°C 500 750 650 

PDSET nnn Dryer preheating temperature 0.1°C 300 700 400 

DVRNG nnn CD temperature tolerance range 0.1°C 1 100 3 

BFRNG nnn BF temperature tolerance range 0.1°C 1 100 20 

SBRNG nnn SB temperature tolerance range 0.1°C 1 100 20 

DYRNG nnn Dryer temperature tolerance 0.1°C 1 200 80 

range 

DVSNS ±nn Calibration CD temperature 0.1 °C -12 12 0 

sensor 

BFSNS ±nn Calibration BF temperature 0.1 °C -50 50 0 

sensor 

SBSNS ±nn Calibration SB temperature 0.1 °C -50 50 0 

sensor 

DRYMD n Dryer temperature control mode 0 = auto 

0 1 0 

(with 1 the temperature always 1 = manual 

remains the same, irrespective of 

the print size) 

DOCAT n Docking start mode 0 = auto 

0 1 0 

1 = manual 

DSMOD n Docking (pump error and content 

error) error clear mode 

MIXTM nnn Mixing time of chemistry in 

replenisher tanks 

MXWTM nnn Waiting time after mixing started 

before replenishment is resumed 

0 = error 

cannot 

be cleared 

1 = error can 

be cleared 

0 1 1 

sec 60 900 180 

sec 0 999 180 

DRREP nnn CD replenishment rate ml/m 2 0 999 41 

BRREP nnn BF replenishment rate ml/m 2 0 999 68 

SRREP nnn SB replenishment rate ml/m 2 0 999 41 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-59



Water 

replenishment 

Throughput 

dependent 

replenishment 


DWADJ nnn Calibration CD water replenishing pump % 70 130 100 

BWADJ nnn Calibration BF water replenishing pump % 70 130 100 

SWADJ nnn Calibration SB water replenishing pump % 70 130 100 

WRINT nnn Interval of the water inlet min 1 999 60 

DWPRP nnn Quantity of water added every 3 hours to CD ml/3h 0 300 60 

BWPRP nnn Quantity of water added every 3 hours to BF ml/3h 0 250 50 

SWPRP nnn Quantity of water added every 3 hours to SB ml/3h 0 999 230 

DWRAT nn Rate of water added to CD tank at startup 

(DWRAT * shutoff time) 

BWRAT nn Rate of water added to BX tank at startup 

(BWRAT * shutoff time) 


ml/hour 0 20 12 

SWRAT nn Rate of water added to SB tank at startup 

(SWRAT * shutoff time) 


WRLIM nnn Maximum amount of water replenishment at ml 0 600 390 

startup (per pump) 

DLOWP nnn CD water replenishment rate 

ml/m 2 0 50 10 


BLOWP nnn BX water replenishment rate 

ml/m 2 0 50 0 


SLOWP nnn SB water replenishment rate 

ml/m 2 0 400 159 


DLOWI nnn CD water replenishment rate 

ml/m 2 0 50 14 


BLOWI nnn BX water replenishment rate 

ml/m 2 0 50 0 


SLOWI nnn SB water replenishment rate 

ml/m 2 0 400 233 


DLOWM nnn CD water replenishment rate 

ml/m 2 0 50 16 


BLOWM nnn BX water replenishment rate 

ml/m 2 0 50 0 


SLOWM nnn SB water replenishment rate 

ml/m 2 0 400 254 


RERAT nnn Increase rate of chemical replenishment % 0 300 100 


REINC nnn Increase rate of chemical replenishment % 0 300 140 


REMAX nnn Increase rate of chemical replenishment % 0 300 160 


SQMIN nn Throughput level 1 

m 2 1 15 7 

(increased replenishment) 

SQMAX nn Throughput level 2 

m 2 1 10 4 

(maximum replenishment) 

MAXDY nn Maximum actual daily throughput m 2 0 99 20 

4-60 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto




Konica 

effluent 

processor 

XCR40 n Use of the Konica 

ACR40 

0 = no 

1 = yes 

0 1 0 

Sorter SORMD n Sort mode 0 = 

1,2,3 = paper alignment 

4 = width 152 mm 

length > 178 mm 

go to tray 

0 9 3 

Hardware 

On-demand 

MCREV nn Machine level 0 = basic model 

1 = with stopper plate 

2 = with processor door sw 

3 = dryer high temp.modif. 

without proc. door sw 

DOTYP n Kind of docking 0 = with docking, with 

water replenishment 

1 = without docking, without 

water replenishm. 

SOTYP n Kind of sorter 0 = 6 inch sorter (belt tray) 

1 = 8 inch sorter (10 trays) 

2 = single tray sorter 

SBTYP n SB4 rack 0 = with SB4 

1 = without SB4 

PPDRV nnnn Main motor on time in 

on-demand mode 

PPSTP nnnn Main motor off time in 

on-demand mode 

0 99 

0 1 

0 2 

0 1 

see 

table 

below 

sec 0 9999 600 

sec 0 9999 3600 

Processor 

door 

PPDOR n when processor door 

open mode 

0 = no sort move 

1 = sort move 

0 5 0 


1 = yes 

0 1 1 

Hardware 

Processor 

speed 

with Film Processor and 

with Docking 

Machine Versions 


with Docking 


without Docking 

Sorter Sorter Sorter 

Single tray 6 inch 8 inch Single tray 6 inch 8 inch Single tray 

0 0 0 0 or 1 0 0 1 or 0 

MCREV 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 

DOTYP 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 

SOTYP 0 1 2 0 1 2 2 

SBTYP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 4-61



■ 

4-62 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Power Supply Units and PCBs 

5 Power Supply Units and PCBs 

5.1 Power Supply Units – Overview 

The d-lab.1 family provides two power supply systems: 

– Main power supply in the Paper Processor (1) 

– Film Processor power supply (2) 

3002_061 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 5-1



5.2 Power Supply System 

5.2.1 Power ON Sequence 

The pilot+8V, pilot+24V and FP+24V voltages are switched on by operating the circuit 

breaker. The Timer CPU runs at PL+8V. 

The Timer CPU switches all control channels except /FDMPS for the AGFA DC voltages. 

The MPU (Main Computer Unit) only controls the switching on of /FDMPS. 

After the Main Software has been started, the MPU can control all voltage supplies by 

means of the ON/OFF signals to the Timer CPU. 

The following figure shows a power on sequence: 

3002_124 

5-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



The following figure shows the block diagram of the control lines for the power supply 

– PA-CPU (90A-CPU) controls AC 200V, DC +24V, +5V for the Paper Processor 

– FP-CPU (90P-CPU) controls AC 100V, AC 200V, +36V (l/C) for the Film Processor 

– PA (PP) Power Supply and FP Power Supply are autonomous and have their own 

voltage control 

– Other power supply units are controlled by the Timer card (90A-TIM PCB) 

90A-PWD PCB 

90A-TIM PCB 

90A-0701 

RY3 

TR ? 

TR15 

TR16 

/MAMPS 

PNP 

TR 2 

90A-0701 

RY4 

MAIN-PC, EXT.POWER 

npn_D 

TR12 

TR13 

/IMMPS 

PNP 

TR 24 

IMAGE-PC 

TR10 

/FDMPS 

PC8, PC11, PC10, PC9 

+6.5V, -15V, +18V, +24V(AGFA) 

(PC8) (PC11) (PC10) (PC9) 

PHOTOCOUPLER 

/CDMPS 

PC7, PC3, PC1 

PA+36V, PA+24V, +5V 

(PC7) (PC3) (PC1) 

PHOTOCOUPLER 

90A-0701 

SSR2 

90A-CPU 

PCB(PA) 

NPN 

TR 6 

IN+ 

IN- 

LOAD 

LOAD 

AC100V(BASE) 

TR 5 

/FAEXT 

TR 20 

EXT.FAN 

npn_D 

NPN 

K1 

/PAMPS 

/PAMPS 

PC4, PC2 

PHOTOCOUPLER 

90A-0701 

RY1, RY2 

PP+24V, +5.2V 

(PC4) 

(PC2) 

90P-CPU 

PCB(FP) 

PNP 

TR 8 

90F-0701 

RY1, RY2, RY 3 

PP_AC200V 

( RY 1; MAIN MOTOR) 

(RY2; HEATER) 

/FPMPS 

PNP 

TR 22 

FP_AC100V(MAIN MOTOR), FP_AC200V(HEATER), FP+36V 

(RY1) (RY2) (RY3) 

TR 1 

npn_D 

PA+36V, PA+24V, 

90A-MDV 

PCB(PA) 

RY INT 

3002_123 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 5-3



5.3 Main Power Supply 

3002_059 

5-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



3002_060 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 5-5



5.3.1 Components of the Main Power Supply 

Mains connections 

BK1 Switch Main breaker 

90A-TB1 Terminal block Mains connections 

90A-TB2 Terminal block Distribution phases 

90A-TB3 Terminal block Distribution mains voltage 

90A-TB4 Terminal block Adaptation transformer (90AT-1) 

LBK1 Switch GFI switch 

NF1 Noise filter Noise filter 

AC Supply 

90A-FUS PCB Fuses of the main power supply, AC 200V 

RY1 Relay Heater + circulation pumps of the Paper Processor, AC 100V/200V 

RY2 Relay Dryer Paper Processor, AC 200V 

RY3 Relay Main computer system + external power supply, AC 200V 

RY4 Relay Image computer, AC 200V 

90AT-1 Main transformer 100V supply Film Processor + Paper Processor 

SSR 1 Semiconductor relay Dryer heater Paper Processor ON/OFF, AC 200V 

SSR 2 Semiconductor relay Main transformer (90AT-1) ON/OFF 



CP1 Fuse Dryer Paper Processor, AC 200V, 15A 

CP2 Fuse Primary coil of the Main transformer, AC 200–240V, 10A 

DC Supply 

PS 1 Power Supply Module SL1 (top) 

Module SL2 

Module SL3 

+8V (PL) 

+24V (PL) 

+5V (CD) 

Module SL4 +36V (PB) 

PS 2 Power Supply Module SL1 (top) +24V (PC) 

Module SL2 +24V (PA) 

PS 3 Power Supply Module SL1 (top) +6,5V (AD) 

Module SL2 +15V (AA) 

Module SL3 +18V (AA) 

Module SL4 +24V (FD) 

90A-LPS PCB Control LEDs, test points and fuses for all voltages 

90A-PWD PCB Power distribution 

Pilot voltage (via Timer card) 

Fan in the Timer mode 

Signal voltage of all PCBs 

Paper Processors + Paper Advance 

Loads of the Paper Advance (PA) 

Loads of the Paper Processors 

Loads of the Paper Advance (PA) 

Scanner, Print Engine + Densitometer 

Scanner + Print Engine 



5-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



5.3.2 Connections – Overview 

Source Target Plug Description 

0701... 

CN1 90P-CPU CN7 Dryer heater control input signal 

CN2 90A-TIM CN4 Control of power supply unit 

90A-CPU CN5 Control of power supply unit 

CN3 AGFA SF-GS01.ST19 –15V, +24V, +18V, +6.5V 

PE-GS01.ST3 –15V, +24V, +18V, +6.5V 

CN4 FP-PACN1 

90F-FPR CN1 +8V, +5V, ±12V 

90A-TIM CN1 +8V 

90A-CPU CN1 +5V 

90A-MDV CN13 +5V 

+24V and +36V are controlled by an interlock switch 

90A-PRT CN4 +24V is controlled by an interlock switch 

90A-MAD CN8 +5V, +24V, +36V 

CN5 AGFA CS-MPU AC200V 

CS-IPU AC200V 

AC OUTLET EXT POW AC200V passes through the current protector (CP EXT 5A) 

CN6 90P-CPU CN1 +5V, +6.5V, ±12V, 

90P-DSD CN12 +24V 

90P-MDV CN4 +5V, +24V 

PP DRY SW Dryer interlock switch 

PRO SW Processor interlock switch 

DRY HT Dryer thermostat 

EXHAUST FAN Exhaust fan 

CN7 90P-SSR CN2 AC200V 

CN3 

AC100V 

CN8 Dryer heater 

AC200V 

(Paper Processor) 

CN9 FP-PACN2 

P+24V, control signal 

90F-FPR 

CN1 

CN10 Film power supply 

90F-0701 

F05CN1 AC200V, AC100V 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 5-7



5.3.3 Fuses 

5.3.3.1 Fuses on AC Main Power Supply 

Fuse Max. Current Function 

CP1 15 A Dryer Paper Processor, AC 200 V 

CP2 10 A Primary coil of the main transformer, AC 200–240 V 

5.3.3.2 Fuses on 90A-FUS 


F1 T5A Main computer system, AC 200 V 

F2 T5A Image computer system, AC 200 V 

F3 T5A External power supply, AC 200 V 

F4 T6.5A Dryer heater Film Processor, AC 200 V 

5.3.3.3 Fuses on 90A-LPS 


F1 T2A SF_GS01 (Driver Sensor Board) Power supply: –15V (AA) 

F2 T2A PE_GS01 (Exposure Controller) Power supply: –15V (AA) 

F3 T4A SF_GS01 (Driver Sensor Board) Power supply: +24V (FD) 

F4 T4A PE_GS01 (Exposure Controller) Power supply: +24V (FD) 

F5 T4A SF_GS01 (Driver Sensor Board) Power supply: +18V (AA) 

F6 T4A PE_GS01 (Exposure Controller) Power supply: +18V (AA) 

F7 T4A SF_GS01 (Driver Sensor Board) Power supply: +6,5V (AD) 

F8 T4A PE_GS01 (Exposure Controller) Power supply: +6,5V (AD) 

5-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



5.3.4 Command of the Power Supply Units 

When the Main breaker is switched on, all power supply units are supplied by the mains 

voltage on the primary side. 

Each power supply unit has several modules (SL1 to SL4). One voltage is provided for each 

module. The modules can be activated or deactivated individually. 

Each power supply unit generates a control voltage of 12V which can be tapped on the 3- 

pole connector above the fan on the primary side (mains connection side) of the power 

supply unit (CN1). The voltage is present as soon as the primary side is supplied by the 

mains voltage (CN1; Pin 1: 0V, Pin 3: +12V). This voltage is used to activate the individual 

modules of the power supply unit. Activation is via the Pins 1 (RC+) and 2 (RC–) of the 

10-pole connector on the secondary side of each module (CN2). For this, the control 

voltage is carried across the PCB 90A-PWD and from there switched by signals of the PCB 

90A-CPU back to the Pins RC+ and RC– of the respective module. 

PCB 90A-CPU ensures the switching on of the following power supply units and modules. 

The trigger signals can be checked on connector 0701 CN 2. 

Note: 

The signals are „low-active“, i.e. the power supply units are switched on by 0V signals 

on connector 0701 CN2. 

Voltage Power supply / 

module 

Plug on module 

(with pins 

RC+ and RC–) 

Usage of the voltage 

+5V (CD) PS1 / SL3 CD5VCN2 Signal voltage of all PCBs 

Paper Processor + Paper Advance 

Pin no. / signal name 

(activation of 90A-CPU), 

plug 0701 CN2 

Pin 5 /CDMPS 

+36V (PB) PS1 / SL4 PB36VCN2 Loads of the Paper Advance (PA) Pin 5 /CDMPS 

+24V (PA) PS2 / SL2 PA24VCN2 Loads of the Paper Advance (PA) Pin 5 /CDMPS 

+24V (PC) PS2 / SL1 PC24VCN2 Loads of the Paper Processors Pin 3 /PAMPS 

+6,5V (AD) PS3 / SL1 AA6.5VCN2 Power supply Scanner, Print Engine Pin 7 /FDMPS 

+ Densitometer 

–15V (AA) PS3 / SL2 AA15VCN2 Power supply Scanner + Print Engine Pin 7 /FDMPS 

+18V (AA) PS3 / SL3 AA18VCN2 Power supply Scanner + Print Engine Pin 7 /FDMPS 

+24V (FD) PS3 / SL4 FD24VCN2 Power supply Scanner + Print Engine Pin 7 /FDMPS 

The following modules are not activated by the PCB 90A-CPU. They are switched on as 

soon as the mains voltage is present on the primary side. The Pins RC+ and RC– (P8VCN2, 

P24VCN2) are directly connected to the 12V control voltage. 

Voltage Power supply / 

module 

Plug on module 

(with pins 

RC+ and RC–) 

Usage 

+8 V (PL) PS1 / SL1 P8VCN2 Pilot voltage (via Timer card) 

+24 V (PL) PS1 / SL2 P24VCN2 Fan in the Timer mode 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 5-9



5.3.4.1 Connection diagram: Activation of Power Supply PS1 

3002_071 


3002_072 

5-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto




3002_073 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 5-11



5.3.5 PCB 90A-LPS 

PCB 90A-LPS contains control LEDs, test points and fuses for all voltages. 

3002_075 

5-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



5.3.6 Adjustment of the Power Supply Units 

3002_076 

Each module has a potentiometer allowing the adjustment of the output voltage. 

The set voltages can be checked on the test points TP1–TP20 of PCB 90A-LPS. 

The voltages measured there must show the following values: 

Voltage 

Rated 

voltage 

Min. 

voltage 

Max. 

voltage 

Measuring points on 

PCB 90A-LPS 

+ 8 V (PL) + 8.18 V + 7.93 V + 8.43 V TP1, TP2 (G) 

+ 24 V (PL) + 24.05 V + 23.33 V + 24.77 V TP3, TP4 (G) 

+ 5 V (CD) + 5.20 V + 5.20 V + 5.30 V TP5, TP6 (G) 

+ 36 V (PB) + 36.38 V + 35.29 V + 37.47 V TP11, TP12 (G) 

+ 24 V (PA) + 24.15 V + 23.43 V + 24.87 V TP7, TP8 (G) 

+ 24 V (PC) + 24.15 V + 23.43 V + 24.87 V TP10, TP11 (G) 

+ 6.5 V (AD) + 6.50 V + 6.31 V + 6.70 V TP21, TP22 (G) 

– 15 V (AA) – 15.05 V – 14.60 V – 15.50 V TP15, TP16 (G) 

+ 18 V (AA) + 18.05 V + 17.51 V + 18.59 V TP19, TP20 (G) 

+ 24 V (FD) + 24.20 V + 23.47 V + 24.93 V TP17, TP18 (G) 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 5-13



5.3.7 Connection diagrams: Pilot voltages 

5.3.7.1 Connection diagram +8V (PL) pilot voltage 

3002_062 

5.3.7.2 Connection diagram +24V (PL) pilot voltage 

3002_074 

5-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



5.3.8 Connection diagrams: Power Supply Units Paper Advance (PA) and Paper Processor (PP) 

5.3.8.1 Connection diagram +5V (CD) voltage 

3002_064 

5.3.8.2 Connection diagram +36V (PB) voltage 

3002_063 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 5-15



5.3.8.3 Connection diagram +24V (PC) voltage 

3002_066 

5.3.8.4 Connection diagram +24V (PA) voltage 

3002_065 

5-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



5.3.9 Connection diagrams: Power Supply Units Scanner (SC), Print Engine (PE) and Densitometer 

5.3.9.1 Connection diagram +6.5V (AD) voltage 

3002_070 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 5-17



5.3.9.2 Connection diagram –15V (AA) voltage 

3002_067 

5.3.9.3 Connection diagram +18V (AA) voltage 

3002_069 

5-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



5.3.9.4 Connection diagram +24V (FD) voltage 

3002_068 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 5-19



5.4 Film Processor Power Supply (only d-lab.1 with Film Processor) 

3002_097 

5-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



5.4.1 Components of the Film Processor Power Supply 

Components 

FPS1 Power Supply DC Power Supply +24V, Output voltage: 21.6V – 26.4V, 

controlled by FCPU (RY3) 

RY1 Relay Interlock switch for tank heater (AC 200V) and main motor (AC 100V) 

RY2 Relay Interlock switch for dryer heater (AC 200V) 

RY3 Relay Switch for DC 24V and DC 36V controlled by FCPU 

SSR1 Semiconductor relay Control (ON/OFF) for dryer heater (FPDHHT01) 

SSR2 Semiconductor relay Control (ON/OFF) for dryer heater (FPDHHT01) 

90F-FPR PCB Main Film Processor power relay 

90F-CTD PCB Cutter drive power and power failure detection 

90F-MD2 PCB Driver board for dilute valves, docking system, leader cutter motor and 

sensors 

90F-CPU PCB Film Processor CPU board 

90P-SSR PCB Board of solid state relays for pumps, heaters and motors 

5.4.2 Connections – Overview 

Source Target Plug Description 

F05CN1 Main Power Supply 0701CN10 AC200V, AC100V 

F05CN2 90P-SSR 

CN2 AC200V 

CN3 AC100V 

Dryer heater F05CN5 AC200V 

F05CN3 90F-CTD CN1 +24V 

F05CN4 90F-MD1 CN2 +24V 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 5-21



5.4.3 Fuses 

5.4.3.1 Fuses on 90P-SSR 


F1 2.5 A CD heater; AC 200 V 

F2 2.5 A BL,FX heater; AC 200 V 

F3 5 A SB heater; AC 200 V 

F4 2 A CD agitation pump, BL airation pump; AC 200 V 

F6 1 A CD mixing pump; AC 200 V 

F7 1 A FX mixing pump; AC 200 V 

F8 2 A Main drive motor; AC 200 V 

F10 2.5 A Circulation pump CD, BL, FX1-2, SB1-3; AC 200 V 

F11 1 A (not used) 

F12 2 A DS Cutter AC motor; AC 200V 

F14 1 A Replenisher pump CD, BL, FX, SB, 

Water pump CD, BL, FX, SB; AC 200 V 

5.4.4 Command of the Film Processor Power Supply Unit 

When the Main breaker is switched on, the power supply unit FPS1 is supplied by the 

mains voltage on the primary side. There will be a DC voltage of +24V on the secondary 

side. Via relay RY3 this voltage is distributed to the PCBs in the Film Processor (see 

Circuit Diagrams). The activation of relay RY3 is performed via PCB 90F-CPU. 

5-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



5.5 PCBs 

5.5.1 Functions of the most important PCBs 

Abbreviation Function Component Description 

90A-TIM Timer card Printer Power supply on/off sequence and time count 

90A-MDV PA Mechanical Drive Printer Motor driver board (Distribution unit, Sub paper 

advance, Exposure table, Shutter solenoid, Exposure 

Fan, Cutter L/R) 

90A-PRT Printer drive Printer Back printer driver 

90A-MAD Magazine drive Printer, FP Driver board for motors and light sensors of the paper 

magazine unit 

90P-CNR Connector PCB PP Float Switches and Temp Sensors are connected 

90P-DSD Docking System Drive PP Driver board for Dilute Valve, Dryer Fan, Mix unit LED, 

Cooling Fan, Option valve and Docking System 

90P-MDV PP Mechanical Drive PP Driver board for fans and motors of paper exit, sorter 

and lane shifter 

90P-SDV SUB Drive PP Driver board of the outlet motor 

90P-SSR Solid State PCB PP Board of the Solid State Relays (Pump, Heater and 

Motors) 

50A-WDT Width detection Printer, FP Detection of paper width code of the magazines 

50A-LED LED PCB Printer, FP Board with LED indication paper magazine 

90F-MD1 Mechanical Drive1 FP Motor driver board1 (Fan, Motors, Solenoid) 

90F-CTD Cutter Drive FP Cutter drive power and detect power failure 

90F-FPR Film power relay FP Main power relay film power 

90F-AMP Amp PCB FP Detect film sensor 

90F-DRY Dryer PCB FP Detect fan spin and relay dry sensor 

50F-PSN Photo sensor FP Detect film type and cartridge position 

90F-MD2 Mechanical Drive2 FP Driver board for dilute valve, docking system, leader 

cutter motor and sensor 

90A-PWD Power Drive total Power unit on/off drive, interlock drive power 

90A-LPS Limited power supply AgfaPhoto PWR Fuse and polyswitch board 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 5-23



5.5.2 Diagram: PCBs of the Paper Processor (PP), Paper Advance (PA) and Film Processor (FP) 

5-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



5.5.3 Functions: LEDs and DIP Switches of the CPU PCBs 

5.5.3.1 LEDs 

No. Film Processor 

90F-CPU 

1 – Quick flashing (150 ms): 

Download in progress 

– Slow flashing (1 s): 

Normal operation 

– Permanently ON or OFF: 

Failure occurred 


90A-TIM 

– Quick flashing (150 ms): 






Printer 

90A-CPU 







2 No function No function ON: Paper Processor 

ready to operate 

OFF: Paper Processor not 

ready (only if the 

exposure table door 

is open!) 


90P-CPU 







No function 

5.5.3.2 DIP Switches 

No. Position Film Processor 

90F-CPU 


90A-TIM 

Printer 

90A-CPU 


90P-CPU 

1 OFF Flash Rom deleted normal operation normal operation normal operation 

ON normal operation Flash Rom deleted Flash Rom deleted Flash Rom deleted 

2 OFF normal operation normal operation normal operation normal operation 


ON Flash Rom deleted no function no function Flash Rom deleted 


AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 5-25



5.5.3.3 Replacing CPU PCBs 

When replacing one of the CPU PCBs the DIP Switches have to be checked. 

Then the related firmware must be downloaded. 

wd_003 

Replace CPU PCB 

Check DIP Switches 

Start up d-lab 

Open Watchdog (Strg & Alt) 

Check SW UPGRADE 

Close Watchdog by pressing the hide button 

Restart d-lab by pressing the ON button 

(the d-lab starts up and executes an 

automatic firmware update) 

■ 

5-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Computer System 

6 Computer System 

The Computer System consists of two autonomous computer units. The Main Processor 

Unit (MPU) can be started automatically by the Timer board at a programmable time, or 

by pressing the Power ON key. The Image Processor Unit (IPU) is then started by the Main 

Processor Unit. 

6.1 Version dependent Computer Systems 

Version Computer System (CS) Machine Type 

Single Computer System 

one unit: 

on top of the printer 

With Film Processor: 



Order No.: 

10+9807090011 

8070/050 

8070/100 

Former Production: 

d-lab.1s basic 1 * 

d-lab.1s basic 2 * 

8070/300 

8070/200 

* see New Production 


Dual Computer System 

two units: 

one on top of the other 

in the cabinet for CS 

Order No.: 

MPU-S: 10+9807090310 

IPU-S: 10+0907090320 





8070/40 

8070/230 

8070/240 

8070/130 


Dual Computer System 

two units: 

side by side in the cabinet for 

CS and LH Paper Magazine 

Order No.: 

MPU-B: 10+9807090360 

IPU-B: 10+0907090370 


New Production: 



8070/300 

8070/200 

Order No.: 

MPU-P: 10+9807090380 

IPU-P: 10+0907090390 




8070/109 

8070/310 

8070/160 


AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-1



6.2 General Data 

6.2.1 Room conditions 

Conditions Temperatures Humidity of air 

Operation +15 °C to +30 °C 15% bis 85% 

Test +15 °C to +30 °C 

+15 °C to +35 °C 

Storage –25 °C (max. 72 h) 

+55 °C (max. 96 h) 

15% bis 90% 

15% bis 85% 

max. 95% 

6.2.2 Power distribution and power supply of the components 

Component 

+3.3 V 

(orange) 

+5 V 

(red) 

–5 V 

(lilac) 

+12 V 

(yellow) 

+12 V 

(brown) 

+24 V 

(yellow) 

Motherboard — — — — — — 

Hard disk drive — 0.6 A — 2A/0.6A — — 

CD-RW — 1.2 A — 1.0A — — 

Graphic board (ATI) — 0.3 A — — — — 

EtherNet — 0.3 A — — — — 

Total 2.7 A 15.3 A — 5.05 A — 2 A 

Power at the Power 

supply output stage 8.91 W 76.5 W — 60.6 W — 48 W 

6.2.3 Power distribution and power supply of the components 

Media Drive Letter Media No. Name in Explorer Remark 

A: Locked in BIOS 

B: Locked in BIOS 

HardDiskDrive (HDD) C: (System Partition) 

Program Operating System/Programs/Tools 

D: (Data Partition) 

Y: (Data Partition) 

?: (Backup/Restore) 

Data 

D-Order 

Hidden 

For future System recovery 

CD-ROM E: 

Card Reader F: 

G: 

H: 

I: 

J: 

K: (opt.) 

L: (opt.) 

M: (opt.) 

N: (opt.) 

Medium 31 

Medium 32 

Medium 33 

Medium 34 

Medium 35 

Medium 36 

Medium 37 

Medium 38 

Medium 39 

CF 

SM 

SD / MMC 

SMS 

PC-Card 

(XD) 

(Mini SD) 

(Mini MMC) 

(free) 

Compact Flash 

Smart Media 

Secure Device, Multy Media Card 

Sony Media Stick 

PCMCIA-Adapter 

6-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.2.4 Network settings 

Name/Number Passwort Rights 

Computer system D-LAB1 — — 

NetBios work group D-LAB — — 

IP address LAN-ext. 192.168.1.10 — — 

(class C) default 

IP subnet mask 255.255.255.0 — — 

LAN ext. 

IP address 

192.168.1.11 to — — 

res. range 

192.168.1.19 

IP address 

192.168.64.1 — — 

LAN int. MPU 

(class C) default 

IP address 

192.168.64.2 — — 

LAN int. IPU 

(C-Klasse) default 

IP subnet mask 255.255.255.0 — — 

LAN int. 

System admin Administrator none or 

— 

DLABSERVICE 

System admin default dlab dlab (* Administrator 

USER 

Network USER — — — 

Organization — — — 

6.2.5 Settings and Registry entries 

Language settings Arabic, Central Europe, Cyrillic, Hebrew, Japanese, Korean, Chinese 

Time zone 

GMT (Greenwich Mean Time, no automatic summertime) 

24h display or 12h display (with am/pm) hh.mm.ss 

Power option Power schemes: Presentation !All Users! 

Turn off monitor: 

never 

Turn off hard disks: 

never 

AutoLogon 

User: dlab 

automatic LOGIN for user dlab 

Prompt 

Branch to DOS Prompt in directory: press right button of computer mouse 

NumLock 

Num_Lock automatic ON 

AutoRun 

For all drives OFF 

Lmhosts 

Entry of ImagePC default IP-address in LMHOST 

\WinNT\SYSTEM32\Drivers\ETC 

Recycle Bin 

Password 

192.168.64.2 imagepc #PRE #IP-Adress IPU 

No deleted file in Recycle bin 

Never expires; user cannot change it 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-3



6.2.6 Product Security and Certificates 

The machines of the d-lab.1 family comply with the requirements of the standards and 

rules listed below: 

EG Directive for Low Voltage 

EG EMV Directive 

UL / cUL 

C-TICK 

Europe 

Europe 

USA / Canada 

Australia 

The limit values acc. to FCC must be met. 

Recyclable design acc. to VDI 2243, page 1. 

GS 

CE 

UL / cUL 

UL 1950 

All safety-relevant components (power supply units, drives, fans) carry a GS symbol (TÜV, VDE or 

test symbols of a EU inspection authority) acc. to the standard: 

EU guidelines for machinery (including EN 55022**, 05/1999 radio interference protection in 

residential area, class B). 

EN 60950* Safety of Information Technology Equipment 

EN 60825-1* Safety of Laser Equipment 

The machine safety is ensured for both closed (operation) and open condition 

(service/maintenance). 

(Declaration of Conformity) 

EN 50081-1** Interference protection (residential and business areas, small enterprises) 

EN 50082-2** Interference protection (industrial areas) 

with label (USA / Canada) 

Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including Electrical Business Equipment 

* Proof by examination in a European test lab with approval of drawings and production 

cxontrol 

** Examination by certified measuring lab 

6-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.3 Functional Description of the Main Processor Unit (MPU) 

MPU 

– Functions together with the d-lab Main 

Software as central control unit for operation 

and service 

– Controls via the Main Software the interaction 

of the major assembly groups: Film Processor, 

Scanner, Printer and Paper Processor 

– Serves as input medium for digital files 

(format jpg, tif, bmp) to be printed from CD 

– Coordinates the communication with the 

Frontend units (image box workstation, kiosk, 

pixtasy) that are used to enter digital files 

from usable media 

– Controls the monitor (graphic card) 

– Has an integrated timer for the machine 

control 

– Starts the Image Processor Unit 

3002_091 

Note: 

The position and the kind of Computer System (CS) depend on the version. 

one unit 

on top of the Printer 


Computer System (CS) 

two units, on top of each other, 


Versions with cabinet for CS 

two units, side by side, 

above the second/left paper magazine, 


Versions with a cabinet for CS and 

left paper magazine 







Former production: 


d-lab.1s starter oc and starter 



New Production 




New production: 


AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-5



6.3.1 Signal Diagram MPU 

14 

6-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Denomination Type Source Destination Signal Internal 

* (PC) 

LAN MP-IP Ethernet 1 MainBoard MPU MainBoard IP MPU_LAN int 1 X 

External 

** (PC) 

RS232 COM MP1 MainBoard MPU PricingPrinter X(opt.) 

RS232 COM MP2 

External 

*** 

RS232 COM MP3 4xSer. St. 1 MPU Scanner Controller CS_COM MPU 3 X 

RS232 COM MP4 4xSer. St. 2 MPU Copal FP CS_COM MPU 4 X 

RS232 COM MP5 4xSer. St. 3 MPU Copal PA/PP CS_COM MPU 5 X 

RS232 COM MP6 4xSer. St. 4 MPU Copal Timer CS_COM MPU 6 X 

TouchSensor USB 1 MainBoard MPU Monitor (GUI) X 

Modem USB 2 MainBoard MPU Modem X 

Key_Mouse USB 3 MainBoard MPU Keyboard/Mouse X 

BarCode USB 4 MainBoard MPU BarCode-Reader X 

LAN_Net Ethernet 2 Network SK MPU LAN (e.g.. e-box) CS_LAN ext. X 

Monitor VGA VGA Board MPU LCD Monitor X 

IDE1_primary IDE MainBoard MPU HDD1 MP MPU_IDE 1(0) X 

IDE1_secondary 

IDE2_primary IDE MainBoard MPU CD-RW MPU_IDE_2(1) X 


RS232 COM IP1 MainBoard IPU Exposure Controller CS_COM IPU 1 X 

RS232 COM IP2 

LVDS LVDSBoard IPU Scanner Controller CS_LVDS X 

DVI VGA-Board IPU LCD-Driver Board CS_DVI X 

LAN IP-MP Ethernet 1 MainBoard IPU MainBoard MP IPU_LAN int 2 X 

IDE1_primary IDE MainBoard IPU HDD1 IPU IPU_IDE_1(0) X 


IDE2_primary IDE MainBoard IPU HDD2 IPU MPU_IDE_2(1) X 


CS_Timer 

PowerON MP tbdf MainBoard MPU Timer board PS_ON-MPU X 

PowerON IP tbdf MainBoard IPU Timer board PS_ON-IPU X 

PowerState MP tbdf MainBoard MPU Timer board PG_MPU X 

PowerState IP tbdf MainBoard IPU Timer board PG_IPU X 

Reset MP tbdf MainBoard MPU Timer board RE_MPU X 

Reset IP Tbdf MainBoard IPU Timer board RE_IPU X 

User Power ON Computer modul Timer board UP_ON X 

Timer LED Computer modul Timer board T_LED X 

Film Stop Computer modul Film Drive F_STOP X 

Mains voltage MP Plug PS-Copal ATX-PS MPU CS_MPU X 

Mains voltage IP Plug PS-Copal ATX-PS IPU CS_IPU X 

Mains voltage TFT Plug ATX-PS MPU TFT X X 

User Power ON Computer modul Timer board UP_ON X 

TimerLED Computer modul Timer board T_LED X 

Film Stop Computer modul Film Drive F_STOP X 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-7



6.3.2 ON / OFF and Reset of the Computer System 

The d-lab.1 is switched on and off via the Timer board at a programmable time or by 

pressing the Power ON key on the computer module. 

The mains voltage can be connected separately to each computer. 

Before the computers are switched on, the mains voltage must have been supplied to the 

computers for at least 10 sec. 

Both computer units have separate relays (RY3 - MPU, RY4 - IPU) on the Timer board that 

are closed for 1 sec. during the corresponding switching sequence. 

The computer module is not reset via the Reset line of the main board. If a Reset 

becomes necessary, the mains voltage is switched off for one or both computers and then 

switched back on. 

The period between the switching off and the switching on of the mains voltage should 

be at least 10 sec long. 

Three Reset actions have so far been defined: 

– Timer board triggers Reset for MP and IP 

– MP requests a Reset for IP from the Timer board. IP is started individually 

– Reset triggered by the operator (hidden switch) 

In case of a system lock-up, the IP can be started again via a Watchdog or the Telnet. 

6-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.3.3 Interfaces / Connections 

Connections MPU (single CS) 

– LAN ext. – RJ 45 socket screened – Standard 

Ethernet connection 

– LAN int.1. – RJ 45 socket screened – Standard 

Ethernet connection communication MPU to 

IPU 

– TFT – Standard 15 pin Sub D socket (female) – 

LCD monitor 

– USB – Mouse, Keyboard 

– Multi I/O – Serial interfaces 

3002_092 

Connections MPU (dual CS) 

– LAN ext. – RJ 45 socket screened – Standard 

Ethernet connection 

– LAN int.1. – RJ 45 socket screened – Standard 

Ethernet connection communication MPU to 

IPU 

– TFT Monitor – Standard 15 pin Sub D socket 

(female) – LCD monitor 

– USB Ext. 1 / 2– Mouse, Keyboard 

– Multi I/O – Serial interfaces 

– Timer MPU – 9 pin SubD socket 

3002_176 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-9



– IEC 60320 socket – power supply 

Image03 

– Connection diagram Power Supply MPU 

Image15 

6-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



– Connection diagram Power Supply IPU 

3002_093 

6.3.3.1 Serial Interfaces / 4-fach SIO (RS232) 

For data exchange with PA/PP, FP scanner 

controller and timer board: 

– Multi I/O 

– MOXA C104H 4 COM Port 

– (19200 bit/s, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity) 

– COM3 RS 232 – ST01 – Scanner Controller 

– COM4 RS 232 – ST02 – PA/PP-Main 

– COM5 RS 232 – ST03 – FP-Main 

– COM6 RS 232 – ST04 – Main-TIM 

Image17 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-11



6.3.4 Drives 

The MPU is equipped with one IDE hard disk: 

HITACHI Deskstar 7K250 HDS722580VLAT20 80 GByte 

6.3.4.1 Dismounting the MPU drive 

Remove the board of the computer system 

on the right side under the monitor 

Disconnect the IDE cable 

Disconnect the power supply 

Slacken the knurled screw (1) 

Pull the RH hard disk holder for the IPU (3) 

to the front, lift it and pull it out to the front 

Push the LH hard disk holder for the MPU (2) 

to the back, lift it and pull it out to the front 

3002_020 

6.3.4.2 Jumper settings of the drive 

The hard disk has been jumpered as Master. 

1 

3002_021 

1 Jumper 

6.3.5 Graphic card 

Graphic card of the MPU: 

Graphic storage: 

AGP 2x/4x 

≥ 16 MByte (Herkules RAGE 128 pro) 

6.3.6 Ethernet cards 

Network cards of the MPU: 

1. 10/100 Base T, D-LinkDFE-530TX 

for external communication 

2. 1000 Base T Intel® Pro 1000MT 

for internal communication with the IPU 

6-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.3.7 Drive Module 

Drive Module is standard in netlab.1 allrounder, d-lab.1s starter, netlab.1 starter oc and 

d-lab.1 starter oc. It includes the CD-Writer PLEXWRITER 52/24/52A. 

The CD-Writer PLEXWRITER 52/24/52A is standard in the d-lab.1 allrounder 1 / 2 as well 

as in d-lab.1 basic 1 /2. 

6.3.7.1 Power Supply for Drive Module 

Power is supplied by MPU. Voltages of +5 / +12 Volt are provided by a 4 pin Molex 

connector. The Voltages are current limited. 

3002_300 

3002_301 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-13



6.3.7.2 Card Reader (optional) 

Old: 

Five Slot USB 1.1 Card Reader 

SCM, PDC-50N 

Input: +5V DC, 1,5A 

PCMCIA, CompactFlash, SmartMedia, SD / MMC, Memory Stick 

New: 

Six Slot USB 2.0 Card Reader 

SCM PCD/62U 

Input: +5V DC, 1,5A 

PCMCIA, CompactFlash, SmartMedia, SD / MMC, Memory Stick, xD 

6.3.8 MPU Mainboard 

Version Type Standard ATX board Working storage: CPU: 



4 x DDR DIMM sockets 

GIGABYTE GA-8IG1000 

Intel Pentium® 4≥ 

(with 2 x 512 Mbyte 

d-lab.1s basic 1 8070/300 Pro Rev.2 

2,8 GHz HyperThreading 

FSB 400 DDR PC) 




GIGABYTE GA-8IG1000 4 x DDR DIMM sockets 


d-lab.1s starter 8070/240 Pro Rev.2 


2,8 GHz 





d-lab.1s plus 8070/310 to be defined to be defined to be defined 


6-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.3.8.1 MPU Mainboard connections 

Pin Signal 

1 HardDiskActive LED + (1) 

3 HardDiskActive LED (2) 

5 Reset Switch (-) 

7 Reset Switch (+) 

2 Power LED + (1) 

4 Power LED (2) 

6 PowerSwitch (+) 

8 PowerSwitch (-) 

9; 14; 16; 18; 20: not used 

3002_025 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-15



6.3.9 Operating System 

Windows 2000 Professional®, Serv.Pack4 

6.3.10 Bios Settings 

Use the tools created for the loading of the prescribed BIOS and the associated BIOS 

settings. All required programs and tools are stored on the DLAB1 Basic Installation CD. 

All BIOS settings described in this chapter are based on the factory settings. These 

settings can be loaded from the main menu under the menu item . 

Settings that differ from the factory settings are highlighted in bold face in the respective 

menus in this chapter. 

If settings or windows of menus differ among the various main board types or if the BIOS 

were modified, then this is described under the name of the Main Board type and the 

revision level. 

Note: 

The access to the BIOS Setup is protected by a password. 

Supervisor password = AGFA 

To be set in the main menu of the CMOS Setup Utility. 

6-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Main Menu: GA-8IG1000 Pro 

CMOS Setup Utility - Copy right (C) 1984-2002 Award Software 

Standard CMOS Features 

Advanced BIOS Features 

Integrated Peripherals 

Power Management Setup 

PnP/PCI Configurations 

PC Health Status 

Frequency /Voltage Control 

Select Language 

Load Fail-Safe Defaults 

Load Optimized Defaults 

Set Supervisor Password 

Set User Password 

Save & Exit Setup 

Exit Without Saving 

ESC: Quit 

F8: Dual BIOS/Q-Flash 

F3: Select Language 

F10: Save & Exit Setup 

Time, Date, Hard Disk Type... 

Main Menu: GA-8GE667 Pro 















Top Performance 

ESC: Quit 





AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-17



Standard CMOS Features: GA-8IG1000 Pro, GA-8GE667 Pro 



Date (mm:dd:y y ) Wed, Apr 16 2003 

Time (hh:mm:ss) 23:31:24 

Item Help 

IDE Primary Master 

IDE Primary Slave 

IDE Secondary Master 

IDE Secondary Slave 

[IC35L060AVV207-0] 

[None] 

[Plextor CD-R PX-W4] 

[None] 

Drive A 

Drive B 

Floppy 3 Mode Support 

[None] 

[None] 

[Disabled] 

Halt On 

[All, But Disk/Key] 

Base Memory 

Extended Memory 

Total Memory 

640K 

130048K 

131072K 

6-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Advanced BIOS Features: GA-8IG1000 Pro 



First Boot Device [HDD-0 ] 

Second Boot Device [CDROM ] 

Third Boot Device [Disabled ] 

Password Check [Setup ] 

On-Chip Frame Buffer Size [16 MB] 

S.M.A.R.T. 

[Enabled] 

Item Help 

Advanced BIOS Features: GA-8GE667 Pro 



First Boot Device [HDD-0 ] 

Second Boot Device [CDROM ] 

Third Boot Device [Disabled ] 

Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled ] 


Init Display First [Onboard/AGP ] 

Graphics Aperture Size [128 MB ] 

Graphics Share Memory 

[8 MB] 

Item Help 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-19



Intergrated Peripherals: GA-8IG1000 Pro 


Intergrated Peripherals 

On-Chip Primary PCI IDE 

[Enabled] 

On-Chip Secondary PCI IDE [Enabled] 

On-Chip SATA 

[Disabled] 

x SATA Port 0 configure as SATA Port 0 

SATA Port 1 configure as SATA Port 1 

USB Controller 

[Enabled] 

USB 2.0 Controller 

[Enabled] 

USB Keyboard Support 

[Enabled] 

USB Mouse Support 

[Enabled] 

AC97 Audio 

[Auto] 

Onboard H/W 1394 

[Disabled] 

Onboard H/W LAN 

[Enabled] 

Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] 

Onboard Serial Port 1 

[3F8/IRQ4] 


[2F8/IRQ3] 

UART Mode Select 

[Normal] 

x UR2 Duplex Mode 

[Half] 

Onboard Parallel Port 

[378/IRQ7] 

Parallel Port Mode 

[SPP] 

x ECP Mode Use DMA [3] 

Game Port Address [201] 

Midi Port Address [330] 

Midi Port IRQ [10] 

CIR Port Address 

[Disabled] 

x CIR Port IRQ [11] 

Item Help 

6-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Intergrated Peripherals: GA-8GE667 Pro 




[Enabled] 


IDE1 Conductor Cable 

[Auto] 


[Auto] 


[Enabled] 


[Enabled] 


[Enabled] 

AC97 Audio 

[Auto] 


[Enabled] 



[3F8/IRQ4] 


[2F8/IRQ3] 


[Normal] 


[Half] 


[378/IRQ7] 


[SPP] 






[Disabled] 


Item Help 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-21



Power Management Setup: GA-8IG1000 Pro, GA-8GE667 Pro 



x 

x 

x 

ACPI Suspend Type 

Power LED in S1 State 

Soft-Off by PWR_BTTN 

PME Event Wake Up 

ModemRingOn/WakeOnLan 

Resume by Alarm 

Date (of Month) Alarm 

Time (hh:nn:ss) 

Power On By Mouse 

Power On By Keyboard 

KB Power ON Password 

AC BACK Function 

[S1(POS)] 

[Blinking] 

[Instant-Off] 

[Enabled] 

[Enabled] 

[Disabled] 

Everyday 

0 : 0 : 0 

[Disabled] 

[Disabled] 

[Enter] 

[Soft-Off] 

Item Help 

PnP/PCI Configurations: GA-8IG1000 Pro, GA-8GE667 Pro 



PCI 1/PCI 5 IRQ Assignment 


PCI 3 IRQ Assignment 


[Auto] 

[Auto] 

[Auto] 

[Auto] 

Item Help 

6.3.11 Touch Screen calibration 

Start the program: 

My computer / Control Panel / 

Elo Touchscreen Properties / Align 

Three buttons will be displayed (one after 

the other) in different areas of the screen: 

Touch each button. 

Calibration is completed. The program will 

be closed. 

6-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.4 Functional Description of the Image Processor System (IPU) 

IPU 

– Ensures the image processing and carries out 

the image editing and the corrections for the 

print engine 

– Saves the image data on two IDE hard disks of 

approx. 40 GB each 

– To increase the data throughput, each hard 

disk is addressed via a separate IDE channel. 

– Communication with the Main-MC is via an 

Ethernet interface integrated in the 

Motherboard. 

– Data exchange with the Exposure Controller of 

the print engine is ensured via one of the 

integrated COM interfaces. 

3002_091 

6.4.1 Signal Diagram IPU 

Image19 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-23



6.4.2 Interfaces / Connections 

Connections IPU (single CS) 

– COM IPU1 RS 232 – Pricing Printer 

– LAN int.2. – RJ 45 socket screened – 

Standard Ethernet connection 

Communication MPU to IPU 

– DVI/Exposure 

– LVDS/Scanner – RJ 45 socket screened 

Communication Scanner Controller to IPU 

– TIMER – 25 pin Sub D socket 

3002_092 

Connections IPU (dual CS) 

– COM IPU1 RS 232 – Pricing Printer 

– LAN int.2. – RJ 45 socket screened – 

Standard Ethernet connection 

Communication MPU to IPU 

– DVI/Exposure 

– LVDS/Scanner – RJ 45 socket screened 

Communication Scanner Controller to IPU 

– TIMER IPU – 9 pin Sub D socket 

3002_176 

6-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.4.2.1 Serial interface Timer board 

The connections on the Mainboards are used for switching on and off, Reset and for 

monitoring the switching conditions. 

For Versions with single Computer Unit: 

The control lines of both computers and the keyboard module to the Printer are combined 

in a 25-pole D-SUB which is mounted on the IPU as slot plate for transmission. 

For Versions with dual Computer Unit: 

The control lines of both computers and the keyboard module to the Printer are combined 

in a 25-pole D-SUB which is divided in two 9-pin D-SUB connectors, which are mounted 

on MPU and IPU as slot plate for transmission. 

Cable configuration for all machines with the Single Computer System 

See also 6.1 Version dependent Computer Systems 

MPU 

Signal 

PIN – 25 pole D-SUB 

PowerSwitch (1) MPU 1 

PowerSwitch (2) MPU 14 

ResetSwitch (1) MPU 2 

ResetSwitch (2) MPU 15 

PowerLED MPc + (Anode) 3 

PowerLED MPc - (Cathode) 16 

Res (e.g. HDD) 4 


image04 

IPU 

Signal 


PowerSwitch (1) IPU 5 

PowerSwitch (2) IPU 18 

ResetSwitch (1) IPU 6 

ResetSwitch (2) IPU 19 

PowerLED MPc + (Anode) 7 

PowerLED MPc - (Cathode) 20 



Key module 

Signal 


User Power ON (1) UP_ON 11 

User Power ON (2) UP_ON 23 

TimerLED + (Anode) 12 

TimerLED - (Cathode) 24 

Film Stop (1) 13 

Film Stop (2) 25 

Shield 

Connector housing 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-25



Cable configuration for all machines with the Dual Computer System 

See also 6.1 Version dependent Computer Systems 

Signal 

PIN 

DSUB-9 male 

PIN 

DSUB-25 male 

Signal 

MPU 

Power Switch (1) MPU 


1 

6 

1 

14 



Reset Switch (1) MPU 


2 

7 

2 

15 



Power LED MPc + (Anode) 

Power LED – (Cathode) 

3 

8 

3 

16 



Res (e.g. HDD) 


4 

9 

4 

17 



IPU 



1 

6 

5 

18 

Power Switch (1) IPU 

Power Switch (2) IPU 



2 

7 

6 

19 

Reset Switch (1) IPU 

Reset Switch (2) IPU 



3 

8 

7 

20 





4 

9 

8 

21 



Button Module 

Signal 

User Power ON (1) UP_ON 


Timer LED + (Anode) 

Timer LED - (Cathode) 

Film Stop (1) 

Film Stop (2) 

Connector 

10 pin 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

PIN 

DSUB-25 male 

11 

23 

12 

24 

13 

25 

Signal 



Timer LED + (Anode) 

Timer LED - (Cathode) 

Film Stop (1) 

Film Stop (2) 

Shield Connector Housing Connector Housing 

Signal 

PIN 

F-Panel 

PIN 

DSUB-9 female 

Signal 

F-Panel 

HardDiskActive LED + (1) 

HardDiskActive LED (2) 

1 

3 

4 

9 

HardDiskActive LED + (1) 

HardDiskActive LED (2) 

Reset Switch (-) 

Reset Switch (+) 

5 

7 

2 

7 

Reset Switch (-) 

Reset Switch (+) 

Power LED + (1) 

Power LED (2) 

2 

4 

3 

8 

Power LED + (1) 

Power LED (2) 

PowerSwitch (+) 

PowerSwitch (-) 

6 

8 

1 

6 

PowerSwitch (+) 

PowerSwitch (-) 

Not used 

9; 14; 16; 18; 20: not used 

6-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



3002_302 

3002_303 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-27



6.4.3 Drives 

The IPU is equipped with two IDE hard disks: 

HITACHI Deskstar 7K250 HDS722580VLAT20 80 GByte 

6.4.3.1 Dismounting the IPU drives 

Remove the board of the computer system 

on the right side under the monitor 

Disconnect the IDE cable 

Disconnect the power supply 

Slacken the knurled screw (1) 

Pull the RH hard disk holder of the IPU (3) to 

the front, lift it and pull it out to the front 

3002_020 

6.4.3.2 Jumper settings on the drives 

The hard disks are both jumpered as Master. 

1 

3002_021 

1 Jumper 

6-28 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.4.4 Graphic Card 

AGP 2x/4x 

Graphic memory 64 MByte 

Resolution: ≥ 1200x1600 (UXGA) 

Data transfer to VideoRam ≥ 150 MByte / Sec 

DVI 

The processed image data is output as partial images via a standard graphic card. Here, a 

difference is made between the colour to be exposed and the quadrant of the pixel shift, 

resulting in 12 partial images (3 colours x 4 quadrants = 12 partial images) for a Print. 

The graphic card is operated via the AGP port of the Motherboard. The digital video signal 

is output via a DVI digital interface. 

6.4.5 LVDS Card 

The image data, the data of the magnetic decoder and the APL data are sent by the 

Scanner to an LVDS-PCI plug-in board via a one-channel LVDS interface and a CAT5 or 

CAT6/7 cable with RJ45 plugs. 

The LVDS card will be equipped with a 32Mbyte memory and can thus record two 

complete four-colour scans. The buffering of the scan data on the board is necessary to 

correspond to the real-time request of the Scanner at the data output. 

Linux drivers (optionally also Windows 2000) are used to transfer the image data buffered 

on the LVDS card at DMA cycles to the main memory of the Image PC. The LVDS-PCI 

plug-in board will probably only be used for the buffering and the transfer of raw data and 

will not perform modifications or corrections of the data. 

6.4.6 Ethernet Card 

1000 Base T for internal communication with the MPU 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-29



6.4.7 IPU Mainboard 

Version Type Standard ATX board Working storage: CPU: 







d-lab.1s starter 8070/240 




d-lab.1s plus 8070/310 



Pro Rev.2 


Pro Rev.2 








2,8 GHz HyperThreading 


2,8 GHz 

to be defined to be defined to be defined 

6.4.7.1 IP Mainboard connections 

Pin Signal 

1 HardDiskActive LED + (1) 

3 HardDiskActive LED (2) 

5 ResetSwitch (-) 

7 ResetSwitch (+) 

2 Power LED + (1) 

4 Power LED (2) 

6 PowerSwitch (+) 

8 PowerSwitch (-) 

9; 14; 16; 18; 20: not used 

3002_094 

6-30 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.4.8 Operating System 

The installation and if necessary the update of the LINUX system are done automatically 

at every start of the Minilab. 

6.4.9 Bios Settings 

Use the tools created for the loading of the prescribed BIOS and the associated BIOS 

settings. All required programs and tools are stored on the DLAB1 Basic Installation CD. 

All BIOS settings described in the following are based on the factory settings. These 

settings can be loaded in the main menu under the menu item . 

Settings that differ from the factory settings are highlighted in bold face in the respective 

menus in this chapter. 

If settings or windows of menus differ among the various main board types or if the BIOS 

were modified, then this is described under the name of the Main Board type and the 

revision level. 

Note: 

The access to the BIOS Setup is protected by a password. 

Supervisor password = agfa 

To be set in the main menu of the CMOS Setup Utility. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-31



Main Menu 
















ESC: Quit 





6-32 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto






Date (mm:dd:y y ) Wed, Apr 16 2003 

Time (hh:mm:ss) 23:31:24 

Item Help 

IDE Primary Master 

IDE Primary Slave 

IDE Secondary Master 

IDE Secondary Slave 

[IC35L060AVV207-0] 

[None] 

[IC35L060AVV207-0] 

[None] 

Drive A 

Drive B 

Floppy 3 Mode Support 

[None] 

[None] 

[Disabled] 

Halt On 

[All, But Disk/Key] 

Base Memory 

Extended Memory 

Total Memory 

640K 

130048K 

131072K 




First Boot Device [USB-CDROM ] 

Second Boot Device [LAN ] 

Item Help 

Third Boot Device [HDD-0 ] 

Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled ] 


Init Display First 

[Onboard/AGP] 

Graphics Aperture Size [128 MB ] 

Graphics Share Memory 

[8 MB] 

S.M.A.R.T 

[Enabled] 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-33







[Enabled] 



[Auto] 


[Auto] 


[Enabled] 


[Enabled] 


[Enabled] 

AC97 Audio 

[Auto] 


[Enabled] 



[3F8/IRQ4] 


[2F8/IRQ3] 


[Normal] 


[Half] 


[378/IRQ7] 


[SPP] 






[Disabled] 


Item Help 

6-34 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto






x 

x 

x 

ACPI Suspend Type 

Power LED in S1 State 

Soft-Off by PWR_BTTN 

PME Event Wake Up 

ModemRingOn/WakeOnLan 

Resume by Alarm 

Date (of Month) Alarm 

Time (hh:nn:ss) 

Power On By Mouse 

Power On By Keyboard 

KB Power ON Password 

AC BACK Function 

[S1(POS)] 

[Blinking] 

[Instant-Off] 

[Enabled] 

[Enabled] 

[Disabled] 

Everyday 

0 : 0 : 0 

[Disabled] 

[Disabled] 

[Enter] 

[Soft-Off] 

Item Help 








[Auto] 

[Auto] 

[Auto] 

[Auto] 

Item Help 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-35



6.5 Troubleshooting 

6.5.1 IPU does not start 

Prior to a list of possible failures, the following chapter contains some necessary 

background information about the functionality of the IPU. 

6.5.1.1 Startup sequence of Computer system 

The computer system consists of two separate computers (MPU = main processing unit, 

IPU = image processing unit), which are switched individually via the timer board. 

Shortly after the programmed time is reached 

(when machine is in timer mode) or when the 

main breaker is switched on, the MPU will start. 

See also 6.5.1.9 Computer System Startup 

timing chart. 

After startup of Windows and the d-lab 

application a signal is send to the timer board to 

switch on the IPU. 

This will be indicated by IPC Power on ... in the 

splash screen 

IPC power on 

Now the IPU starts up. 

First indication is, that the power supply fan of 

the IPU starts turning (upper power supply at the 

left side of the computer system). 

Image03b 

6-36 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



The IPU will now establish a network connection 

to the dhcp server running on the MPU to find its 

boot sequence in the shared folder 

export_imagepc. 

Note: 

Each time the MPU watchdog is started, this 

sharing is checked and reinitialized if 

necessary. 

The corresponding screen on the MPU will give 

the message Connecting to image pc 

(MPU is checking whether the IPU is physically 

connected). 

Connecting to image pc 

Note: 

As the IPU itself is not bootable it has to get its 

boot sequence from the MPU. Therefore the 

First Boot Device has to be [LAN] in the IPU 

Bios settings. 

After all necessary sub-processes on the IPU have 

been started, the d-lab software (running on MPU) 

will start the corresponding software on the IPU. 

This will be indicated by Init sequence of image 

pc in the splash screen. 

Note: 

In case of a new software installation or update 

(see 6.5.1.2 Particularities during IPU 

software installation) this message may stay 

for 10-15 min as the contents of the IPU hard 

disc will be erased and the software will be 

reinstalled. 

Init sequence of image pc 

After that, the machine will proceed with the initialization of the subcomponents 

Filmprocessor ... 

Scanner ... 

Paperdrive ... 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-37



6.5.1.2 Particularities during IPU software installation 

During the installation or an update of the software the message Init sequence of image 

pc will remain on the screen. 

In the background the following sequences are performed: 

– The IPU checks the shared folder export_imagepc on the MPU for particular files (so 

called done-files) 

– As these files are missing after installation/update, the IPU will perform a complete 

new installation of the software. 

The creation of the done-files can be observed in 

an explorer window: 




Navigate to the directory export_imagepc 

of the currently installed Main Software 

Each installed software component is recorded 

successively by creating a corresponding .done 

file: 

– R*.done: HD partitioning and Linux components 

– L*.done: d-lab.1 software components 

done_files 

6.5.1.3 IP function test 

To check correct function of the IPU proceed as follows: 



Uncheck SYSTEM SHUTDOWN ENABLED 

and TIMER CARD WATCHDOG ON 


(Explorer will be used later) 

Click on exit to close the d-lab software: 

This will stop the d-lab software and 

shutdown the IPU. 

Watchdog_control 

Note: 

Do not use x to close the software, as the IPU 

will not be shut down ! 

6-38 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



MPU 

IPU 

3002_198 

When IPU is off (power supply fan stopped; 

usually about 30 sec after exit): 

Loosen the screws of the monitor cable (TFT), 

but leave the connector plugged in (it will be 

connected later to the IPU VGA connector) 

Unscrew and disconnect the connector 

DVI/Exp (graphic cable to the print engine). 

If a keyboard should be connected to the 

IPU, this should be done now. 

In Explorer navigate to desktop and 

double-click on the yellow icon of the 

currently installed d-lab software 

(starts with LK1Wd__*). 

Prepare to swap monitor cable (see next 

page) 

desktop 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-39



When the message IPC power on is 

displayed disconnect monitor cable from 

MPU-TFT and connect it to IPU-VGA (which is 

situated close to DVI/Exp.) 

IPC power on 

The following IPU sequences should appear: 

1. Memory test ... 

2. Hard disc detection ... 

3. Verifying DMI Pool Data … 

4. Initializing and establishing link ... 

5. DHCP ... (IPU tries to connect to MPU via LAN) 

6. Linux startup ... 

7. Black screen: 

The IPU has switched to the graphic mode which cannot be displayed on the built-in 

TFT monitor. 

Reconnect the monitor to the MPU 

Since the print engine is not correctly 

initialized: 

Shut down the IPU as described above: 

watchdog > exit 

Reconnect the DVI cable and restart the 

Main software 

6-40 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.5.1.4 Possible failures during IPU startup or operation 

If the IPU does not run properly, this will be indicated on the main screen by several error 

messages: 

EXTERNAL IP NOT RESPONDING: 

IPU watchdog is not communicating with MPU 

watchdog 

External IP not responding 


– IPU does not start at all 

– IPU is off 

– IPU watchdog is not running 

– No LAN connection between IPU and MPU 

– IPU already booted prior to MPU watchdog 

startup 

EXTERNAL IP NOT RUNNING: 

IPU watchdog has reported errors to MPU 

watchdog 

Possible cause: 

– IPU is running but the application has 

generated errors. In this case the main 

watchdog will initiate a reset together with an 

IPU reset and try to reconnect afterwards. 

– MPU does not communicate with Timer board 

External IP not running 

Also refer to chapter 4, section watchdog for a 

more detailed description of watchdog messages. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-41



6.5.1.5 Possible failures during IPU startup 

For troubleshooting, connect the monitor to the IPU (see 6.5.1.3 IP function test) to 

check the startup sequence of the IPU. 

Failure Cause Remedy 

IPU power supply fan 

does not turn on after 

IPC power on was sent 

No power is supplied to the IPU power 

supply 

In some cases it has been discovered that 

a power supply has been 'blocked' due to a 

previous power peak 

MPU does not communicate with Timer 

board 

One indication can be found in the logfile 

(lk1.log): 

If there is an entry: 

... TIP ERROR sending IS+ to COM6: 

the communication between MPU and 

timer board is interrupted. 

Normal communication will be: 

TIP->COM6: [IS+] (MPU to TI) 

TI->TIP [IS+] (feedback from TI) 

Check incoming power on IPU power 

supply 

Check fuse F2 on 90A-FUS board 

Disconnect power cord to IPU for 

about 30 seconds 

Reconnect power cord 

Restart machine 

Check connector Timer on the right 

side of the computer system for 

correct seating 

Check wiring between computer 

system and timer board 

(refer to 6.5.1.8 Connection diagram: 

Computer System) 

Connected monitor stays 

black although IPU power 

supply fan is running 

Memory test fails 

Hard disc detection fails 

Defective Timer board 

DVI cable still connected and grabs the 

graphic signal 

Defective IPU hardware: 

Replace timer board 

Make sure that the monitor cable is 

connected according to the steps 

described above 

– graphic board on IPU Remove graphic board (with label 

DVI/Exp - VGA) and connect monitor 

to onboard graphic connector. 

Restart IPU. If IPU starts up -> 

DVI/VGA graphic board defective 

– memory modules Try to reseat IPU memory modules 

– main board In case of main board failures, it has 

to be replaced 

– Bad contact between memory modules 

and mother board 

– Memory modules defective 

– Hard disc cannot be recognised 

– Hard disc defective 

Try to reconnect IPU memory 

modules 

Replace memory modules 

Check hard disc cables 

Replace hard disc 

6-42 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Failure Cause Remedy 

Message Verifying DMI 

Pool Data ... remains on 

the screen 

Note: 

This is the last BIOS 

message before the 

operating system is 

loaded from boot device. 

Wrong BIOS setting 

Check IPU BIOS settings (section 

Advanced BIOS Features): 

Second Boot Device has to be 

[LAN] 


Message Initializing and 

establishing link ... 

remains on the screen 

DHCP connection fails 

No network connection: 

– Network cable between MPU and IPU 

defective (LAN int. 1 LAN int. 2) 

– Network card MPU or IPU has bad 

contact or is defective 

MPU not running or d-lab software not 

started 

Network cable connected to wrong port 

Check/replace network cable 

Check (reconnect)/replace network 

card 

IPU will not start, when MPU is not 

present (important to know if IPU is 

started as a standalone system) 

Check that all network cables are 

connected to the right port: 

LAN int.1 LAN int.2 

LAN ext. -> to external network 

LVDS/Scanner -> to Scanner 

Linux startup fails Software corrupted If the IPU is up and running but there are 

problems with the Linux installation: 

Message rescue login 

remains on the screen 

(software from MPU could 

not be loaded) 

IPU hard disk not present or defective 

The IPU could be reinstalled by 

deleting the .done files, see 

6.5.1.6 Forced software installation 

of IPU. 

Check, whether hard disk is properly 

detected during BIOS-startup 

Check hard disc cables 


AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-43



6.5.1.6 Forced software installation of IPU 

When there are problems with the Linux-startup or operation (and only then) it might be 

necessary to delete the done-files (see 6.5.1.2 Particularities during IPU software 

installation) to reinstall the IPU software 

Switch to MPU 

In explorer navigate to the directory 

export_imagepc of the currently installed 

Main software 

Click on Type to sort the files by type 

Select all files with the extension .done and 

delete them 

Select all files with the extension .log and 

delete them. 

(If the software installation fails these files 

may indicate the reason) 

Notes: 

– Do not delete any directorys, since this 

will require a new Main software installation. 

– The only data which will be lost after 

deleting the done-files are the stored orders. 

done_files 

telnet imagepc 

Restart IPU: 

Open the task manager: 

+ + 

Select New Task: telnet imagepc: 

At the login prompt type dlab as login and 

dlab as password 

Logon as Superuser: type su (password linux) 

Type halt and press Enter: 

This will shutdown the IPU. 

Restart IPU: 

If d-lab software is still running, it has to be 

quit before. 

In explorer navigate to desktop and 

double-click on the yellow icon of the 

currently installed d-lab sofware 

(starts with LK1Wd__*). 

After startup the software installation routine 

starts, see also 6.5.1.2 Particularities during 

IPU software installation. 

Note: 

If you see rescue login instead of imagepc login you might have opened a telnet 

session too early or there is a problem with the IPU hard drive (see 6.5.1.5 Possible 

failures during IPU startup) 

6-44 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.5.1.7 Manual start of IPU or MPU 

In some cases (e.g. individual testing) it might be necessary to start the MPU or IPU 

manually. 

This can be done by simulating the switch-on signal (MPCPOW / IPCPOW) on the timerconnector 

by shortening the corresponding pins. 

3002_022_2 

Single Computer System: 

Connect an external power cable to the 

power supply of MPU or IPU 

Shorten following pins for about 1 sec: 

– 1 14 (brown/red) for MPU 

– 5 18 (orange/yellow) for IPU 

Note 

Starting the MPU without a running machine 

will result in an EXTERNAL IP NOT RUNNING 

error message, as there is no communication 

between MPU and timer board 

Dual Computer System: 

Connect an external power cable to the 

power supply of MPU or IPU 

Shorten following pins for about 1 sec: 

– 1 14 (brown/red) for MPU 

– 6 18 (orange/yellow) for IPU 

3002_196 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-45



6.5.1.8 Connection diagram: Computer System 

3002_150 

6-46 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.5.1.9 Computer System Startup timing chart 

To start up the computer system the MPU and IPU will be individually supplied with 

– 220 V 

– logic signal to switch power supply 

The following chart shows the timing of the startup sequence: 

cs-power_sequence 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-47



6.6 Tools for Computer System Check 

The Agfa OS Installer includes the following tools to check the Computer System: 

– COMTool 

– Drives 

– LAN Test 

– PuTTY 

Additional to the Tools delivered by the OS Installer, there are tools on the USB CS 

Servicestick, bootable; 10+9807090330. 

for a short description of the functions: 

– Flash MPU with current BIOS and current settings 

– Flash IPU with current BIOS and current settings 

– HGST Drive-Feature-Tool 

– HGST Drive-Fitness-Test 

– Maxtor Power-Max-Drivetest 

– Memorytest 

– Boot OS for advanced Test 

6.6.1 COMTool 

The COMTool can be used for switching the IPU on or off. 

This will only work if the d-lab.1 Main Software is not running. 

Open Windows Explorer 

C:\Agfa\Tools\COMTool 

Start SwitchOnIP.cmd through double click 

SwitchOnIP 

6-48 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



A DOS box opens with scriptinformation: 

This script executes the SwitchOnIP 

command 

SwitchOnIP_DOS 

Start SwitchOffIP.cmd through double click 

SwitchOffIP 

A DOS box opens with scriptinformation: 

This script executes the SwitchOffIP 

command 

SwitchOffIP_DOS 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-49



6.6.2 Drives 

Drives is a tool for detecting the drives of the Multi Slot Card Reader and writing drive 

letters into the registry. The result is stored in the CRD_Drives.txt file. 


C:\Agfa\Tools\Drives 

Double click Get_N-Check_Drives.exe 

Get_N-check_Drives 

6-50 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.6.3 LAN Test 

The LAN Test tool provides the IP and MAC address of each installed network interface. 


C:\Agfa\Tools\LAN Test 

Execute Adapterinfo2.exe through double 

click 

Adapterinfo 

A small window appears with the Adapter 

information, IP address and MAC address 

Adapterinfo_Infobox 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-51



6.6.4 PuTTY 

PuTTY is a free (MIT licensed) Win32 Telnet and SSH client. 

For advanced operation of PuTTY, read the copyright manual 

C:\Agfa\Tools\Putty\putty.hlp 

Start PuTTY 

Open Explorer\Desktop 

Double click PUTTY - IPU 

Putty_gh 

A DOS box will be opened: 

Type dlab as login 

Type dlab as password 

Putty_IPU connection 

6-52 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.6.5 Flash MPU with current BIOS and current settings 

Open Watchdog: 

+ 

Uncheck System shutdown enabled 

Press exit 

Watchdog window 

Open Task Manager: 

++ 

Select Shut Down 

Select Restart, press OK: 

Windows shuts down and restarts 

Press Del to enter BIOS 

Change BIOS: 


USB-HDD 

Connect the bootable USB stick 

(CM+9807090330) to the d-lab.1 MPU (front 

side of CS) 

Save Bios settings and exit: 

MPU boots and the menu Agfa Diagnostic 

Version 1.00 appears 

Select 1 – press Enter 

Bootscreen 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-53



6.6.6 Flash IPU with current BIOS and current settings 


+ 


Press exit 


Open CS cover on the right side 

Disconnect the DVI cable on IPU side 

Connect the keyboard to the IPU 

Connect the monitor cable on IPU side DVI 

board 


(CM+9807090330) to the d-lab.1 IPU (RH 

side of CS USB connectors on rear side) 

Shorten PIN 5 (orange wire) and 18 (yellow 

wire) on 25 PIN D-connector to Timer Board 

for IPU start up 

Press Del to open BIOS; Password: agfa 

Change BIOS 


USB-HDD 


IPU boots and the menu Agfa Diagnostic 



When Bios is flashed and IPU started up to 

PXE-M0F: Exiting Intel Boot Agent 

connect keyboard and monitor to MPU 

Open Explorer by using Task Manager 

Start d-lab.1 SW: double click on 

Explorer\Desktop\LK1Wd_Dlab1 dlab.1- 

DLAB1_xxx 

Reset IPU by shortening PIN 6 (violett wire) 

and 19 (grey wire) on 25 PIN D-connector to 

Timer Board after IPU Power on has been 

displayed in d-lab.1 start up screen 

Bootscreen 

6-54 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.6.7 HGST DFT Drive Fitness Test 

DFT is a DOS based utility offered by Hitachi to test hard disks while they remain inside a 

personal computer, even when the primary operating system is no longer bootable. 

Additional to the hard drive testing, DFT offers utilities, which provide the following 

actions: 

– S.M.A.R.T (Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology) to enable or disable 

erasure of the disk's Master Boot Sector 

– Total erasure of the data in the user area of the disk 

– Initializing corrupted sectors 

– Viewing useful information about the drive, e.g. Micro code Level, Specification 

Compliance 

Check MPU with DFT: 


+ 


Press exit 


Open Task Manager: 

++ 

Select Shut Down 

Select Restart, press OK 

Windows shuts down and restarts 

Press Del to enter BIOS 

Change BIOS: 


USB-HDD 


(CM+9807090330) to the d-lab.1 MPU (front 

side of CS) 


AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-55





Select 1 – press Enter: 

DFT will be loaded 

Select 2 - press Enter (ATA support only) 

Select I Agree (use 'left' and 'right' arrow 

keys) 

Bootscreen 

DFT presents the License Agreement screen 

Select I Agree – press Enter 

License 

6-56 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Note: 

The DFT tool can also be used in case of IPU HD problems. 


+ 


Press exit 


Open CS cover on the right side 

Disconnect the DVI cable on IPU side 

Connect the keyboard to the IPU 

Connect the monitor cable on IPU side DVI 

board 


(CM+9807090330) to the d-lab.1 IPU (RH 

side of CS USB connectors on rear side) 

Shorten PIN 5 and 18 on 25 PIN D-connector 

to Timer Board, for IPU start up 

Press Del to open BIOS; Password:agfa 

Change BIOS 


USB-HDD 


IPU boots and the menu Agfa Diagnostic 



DFT will be loaded 

Select 2 – press Enter (ATA support only) 

Bootscreen 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-57



DFT presents the License Agreement screen 

Select I Agree – press Enter 

DFT will progress and analyse the connected 

drives 

If the drives you wish to test are presented in 

the list, press yes, if not, press no: 

A new window will be displayed. 

License 

If you have chosen no you will be presented 

with the list on the left 

The list provides you with some information 

about cabling and jumper settings, which 

could have prevented the drive from being 

detected. 

23 

Check the items: 

Power off your system 

After having made all checks, restart the 

DFT test as described above 

If the disk can still not be detected, 

change the disk. 

24 

If your drive has been detected, you will see 

the DFT Test Menu screen 

Select the drive you want to test 

Select the test you want to perform: 

usually Quick Test is selected 

Press Quick Test 

25 

6-58 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



When Quick Test has been pressed, the 

start screen appears 

Press Start 

26 

27 

The Screen changes to the analyse screen 

Information about the drive and the 

performed test will be given 

This test takes approximately 3 minutes 

under most circumstances 

During this test user data are only read, no 

data will be overwritten 

Write operations will only be performed if 

you select the options to erase disk, erase 

MBR (Master Boot Record), or sector repair 

operation from the Utility Menu, which will 

be offered when a disk error has been 

detected 

If the drive passes the test without an error, 

you will see a screen similar to the example 

shown here 

A return code will be displayed 

Return Code = 0x00 (see Code description 

at the end of this chapter) 

28 

If the test fails due to a media error, e.g. 

writing error, you will see a screen similar to 

the example shown here 

The Repair Section of DFT offers 3 options: 

1. Run Erase Disk 

2. Run Sector Repair 

3. Return 

29 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-59



CAUTION! 

The option Sector Repair is not 

recovering data. Any data stored in 

the repaired sector(s) will be lost. 

Run Sector Repair (only supported for 

Hitachi disk drives): 

This option is primarily used to recover 

corrupt sectors, without the necessity to 

completely delete all data already 

stored on the disk and reinstalling the 

operating system. 

By selecting the repair sector option you 

are instructing DFT to initialize all 

sectors identified as corrupt. This 

process involves overwriting the corrupt 

sectors with zeros. 

Run Erase Disk: 

This option will be described below under 

Utility Section 

Return: 

If you cancel repairing the drive by 

selecting the Return option, or if the 

failure is not due to media defect, you 

will see a screen similar to the example 

shown here 

In all cases of test failure a screen will 

display a Technical Result Code: 

The meaning of this code is described at 

the end of this chapter. 

30 

If a test is stopped, e.g. by pressing the 

cancel, the screen shown here will appear. 

31 

6-60 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



If you select Yes, the test will be stopped 

(see screen on the left) 

Note: 

This screen only states that testing has not 

been completed. It is not at all a statement 

that the test has been either passed or failed. 

32 

Advanced Test 

This option is similar to the Quick Test, but 

the complete data area of the selected disk 

drive will be tested 

DFT only performs a read test in the user 

area, so no user data will be overwritten. 

The normal execution time of approximately 

40 minutes is only exceeded in case of very 

large capacity drives. 

33 

34 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-61



Advanced Topics 

Menu 

Use to access the menu items at the 

top of the main test screen 

Most of functions have been explained 

already, but there are several additional tests 

and utilities 

35 

The Exerciser test as shown in the screen on 

the LH side, is basically the advanced test. 

36 

It offers an additional drive test where the 

number of desired loops can be entered 

(30 min each) as shown in the screen on the 

LH side 

The pass, fail or abort functions are similar to 

the Quick Test 

37 

Utilities 

They provide access to several useful tools: 

Drive Info 

Erase Bootsector 

Erase Disk 

Corrupt Sector repair 

ATA Functions 

38 

6-62 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Selecting Drive Info will display useful 

information about the selected drive 

39 

Information about the selected drive is 

displayed as shown on the LH side 

The displayed information is useful for 

reporting problems with the drive to your 

service or drive vendor 

40 

The drive information displayed above, can 

be saved as a text file in the DATA 

subdirectory on your USB stick 

Default name of the file is DRIVEINFO.TXT 

41 

The screen shown on the LH side will be 

displayed to reassure, the file has been 

saved successfully 

42 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-63



CAUTION! 

Erase Boot Sector, Erase Disk and Corrupt Sector Repair will permanently 

delete data stored on your disk. 

The boot sector of a disk contains start-up information for the operating system, it also 

contains information about how your disk is partitioned. If this sector becomes corrupted 

in any way and this is your boot drive, you may not be able to start your system or access 

data on this drive. In a small number of cases a new installation of the operating system 

may not fix the problem. For these few cases you need to erase the boot sector, partition 

the drive and reinstall your operating system. This utility erases the boot sector by 

overwriting the original information in this sector with zeros. 

Erase Boot Sector 

Select desired disk 

Select Erase Boot Sector from the menu as 

shown here 

43 

As a result the screen shown here will be 

displayed 

Select Yes to continue 

44 

As a result the screen shown here will be 

displayed 

To start the Erase Boot Sector operation 

press Start: 

The utility overwrites the data on the 

hard drive! 

45 

6-64 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



If operation has been carried out 

successfully, the screen shown here will be 

displayed 

Press OK to leave the screen 

46 

The utility Erase Disk will write zeros to every sector of your hard drive including the 

boot sector. It has been designed to clean-up disks with errors written to the media 

(e.g. a system has been powered off while writing data out to the drive). This utility can 

take a long time to run (more than an hour) depending on the capacity of the drive and 

the system configuration. 

Select the desired disk 

Select Erase Disk from the menu 

47 

The screen shown here will be displayed 

Select Yes to continue 

48 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-65



The screen shown here will be displayed 

To start the Erase Disk operation, press 

Start 

This utility overwrites the data on your 

hard drive! 

49 

The progress of cleaning the disk will be 

displayed 

After completing the process, a sequential 

read of the disk is carried out, to verify that 

all sectors have been initialized 

50 

The screen on the LH side will be displayed 

when the operation has been completed 

successfully 

51 

6-66 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.6.8 Description of DFT Codes 

Code 

0x00 No Error 

0x10 Test aborted by user 

0x20 Selected device not present 

0x21 ATA Master device not present 

0x22 Device Protected 

0x23 Format Degraded 

0x30 Out of memory 

0x31 Wrong parameter 

0x33 Function cannot be executed on 

this device 

0x40 System interrupts the current 

operation 

0x41 Bad cable 

0x42 Drive temperature problem 

0x43 Pending SCSI request 

0x44 System Vibration 

Description 

Command complete successfully 

The current test was cancelled by user and cannot be completed. 

Rerun the test to conclusion. 

The selected device could not be found on the selected port. 

Check cabling and HDD connectors. If the drive is not seen by the BIOS 

or is not spinning. 

An attempt was made to test an ATA Slave device, but an ATA Master 

cannot be detected. A Master must be present to test a Slave. 

Check cabling and HDD connectors. 

Selected device is protected by a password. The drive is write and read 

protected and cannot be tested 

A SCSI low-level format was interrupted. 

There’s not enough memory to execute this program. 

There is a wrong or unknown parameter. 

— 

The System has interrupted the current operation, and the function was 

aborted. 

Exit the program and check if any Power Saving Modes or Cache 

Programs (like SMARTDRV.EXE) are active. Disable those features and 

start the program again. 

A data miss compare was detected during the cable test. 

The drive has exceeded the drive temperature limit. 

The ASPI Device driver could not complete the SCSI request block. 

Check the SCSI configuration (cabling, termination, Ids etc.). 

The level of vibration that the drive is experiencing is excessive. 

Check the mounting of the drive in the system and ensure it is rigidly 

mounted. If possible try mounting the drive in a different position. 

0x45 Low System Performance — 

0x70 Corrupted Sector 

A general hard disk drive problem was detected. 

You can run the Erase Disk utility. If a subsequent test fails again, the 

drive is defective and should be replaced. 

0x71 Device not ready 

The selected drive is not ready for operation. 

Check cabling and HDD connectors. 

0x72 Device S.M.A.R.T. Error The Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T.) has 

detected a drive problem. 

The drive may fail soon and should be replaced as soon as possible. 

0x73 Device damaged by shock This device was damaged by an excessive shock. 

0x74 S.M.A.R.T Self-test failed An error was detected during S.M.A.R.T. self-test. 

You can run the Erase Disk utility of DFT. If a subsequent test fails 

again, the drive is defective and should be replaced 

0x75 Defective Hard Disk Drive — 

Component 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-67



6.6.9 HGST Drive Feature Tool 

The Hitachi Feature Tool is a utility, which allows the user control over some of the 

parameters of today’s high performance ATA hard disk drives. 

The features supported by this release of the Feature Tool are: 

1. Change the Acoustic Level of the hard drive. 

This function is generally referred to as Automatic Acoustic Management ( AAM ) 

and is available on the newer Hitachi Global Storage Technologies ATA drives and 

Legacy IBM ATA Hard disk drives. The acoustic level of the drive can be modified to 

better suite the environment in which it is functioning. The drive performance may 

vary as the acoustic level changes with increased acoustic management. 

2. Changing the Capacity of the disk drive. 

Change the predefined capacity of the drive. This option can be used in situations 

where there is a BIOS limitation and the drive is not recognised. 

3. Change the Ultra DMA Mode that the drive is set to function at or to disable UDMA 

altogether. 

Modern ATA drives are currently designed to function at bus speed up to 

100 MB/sec. 

The bus speed associated with each Ultra DMA Mode is as follows. 

UDMA Mode 0 - ATA 16 ( 16.7 MB/sec ) 

UDMA Mode 1 - ATA 25 ( 25 MB/sec ) 





Some older (Legacy) motherboard and Plug-in ATA adapters may not support the 

higher bus speeds and installing one of these newer ATA hard disk drives could 

cause a malfunction of your system. To resolve this incompatibility it may be 

required to reduce the bus speed that the drive is operating at to one which is more 

compatible with the Motherboard/Plug-in adapter. 

4. Changing the Cache Settings. Read and write caching are performance 

enhancement features of hard disk drives. Write cache allows the drive to write 

data out to the disk media some time after reporting to the system that the write 

operation had been completed. This data is protected provided power isn’t removed 

from the drive. 

Read caching is where data is read form the disk media and kept in its buffer in 

anticipation that the data that the system next requires is already in the buffer. 

5. Advanced Power Mode. This feature allows you to change the default power saving 

mode of the drive. The device preserves the selected power mode across all forms 

of reset, that is Power on, Hardware and Software resets. 

6. Drive Temperature Monitoring. 

This feature displays the current temperature inside the disk drive. The temperature 

around the disk drive is normally about 5 °C lower. 

7. S.M.A.R.T. – Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology 

S.M.A.R.T. intends to protect user data by monitoring and storing critical 

performance and calibration parameters. SMART devices use sophisticated analysis 

algorithms to predict the likelihood of near-terminal degradation or fault 

conditions. 

6-68 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



We recommend to use only: 

– Drive Temperature Monitoring and 

– S.M.A.R.T. 

Therefore only these two items are described. 



Select 3 – press Enter: 

DFT test will be loaded 

Select I Agree 

52 

DFT will progress and analyse the connected 

drives 

The Drive list screen will be displayed. 

Itlists all the ATA devices installed in the 

system 

This list provides additional details for each 

such as serial number, firmware, capacity, 

current acoustic mode level and the Ultra 

DMA mode to which the drive is currently 

set. 

53 

Select the drive you want to modify (cursor 

keys or tab key) 

Open the pull down menu: 

or + key combination 

Select the feature you need (arrow keys) and 

press enter 

54 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-69



Drive Temperature Monitoring 

If Drive Temperature has been selected, 

the screen shown here will be displayed 

This screen which displays the current disk 

temperature will be updated every 30 sec. 

To simulate a high disk operation, select 

Test and press enter 

This test allows you to determine the 

maximum disk temperature in your system 

and environment 

55 

End Test by pressing enter key again 

56 

57 

S.M.A.R.T. 

S.M.A.R.T. - Self-Monitoring, Analysis and 

Reporting Technology is intended to protect 

user data and prevent unscheduled system 

downtime that may be caused by predictable 

degradation and/or fault of the disk device. 

S.M.A.R.T. can now be enabled or disabled on 

the selected drive by selecting the required 

function and hitting the enter key. When 

SMART is enabled you will see the status in 

the Status box. 

Note: 

On some systems, if SMART monitoring is 

enabled in the system BIOS, then disabling 

SMART with this utility will be effective only 

until the next re-boot. 

58 

6-70 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.7 Maxtor Power Max Drivetest 

This is a HDD Test similar to the DFT for Hitachi Drives. 

Available Tests: 

1. Installation Confirmation 

2. Basic Quick (90 Second) Test 

3. Advanced Test (Full Scan Test) 

4. Burn In Test 

5. Low Level Format (Quick) 

6. Low Level format (Full) 

How to proceed with the Test, see 

USB-STICK:\Service\Maxtor\powermax_guide_en.pdf 

6.7.1 Memorytest 

Select 6 

This opens the Memtest86 

Memtest86 runs 13 tests automatically. 

It also provides a small number of 

commands, which are listed in the 

README.TXT and accessible from the 

running program by typing < C > 

To use advanced test methods, read the 

README.TXT, stored on the stick under 

Service\MemTest 

Bootscreen 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-71



6.7.2 Boot OS for advanced tests 

Boot OS for advanced tests displays a screen which offers you 4 items: 

1. TO START INTEL DIAGNOSTICS FOR NETWORK-CARDS 

2. TO START INTEL BOOT-AGENT CONFIGURATION 

3. FOR COMMAND-PROMT 

4. TO REBOOT YOUR SYSTEM 

Select 1 

This opens the IntelPro Diagnostic Tool 

Startscreen Inteltest 

6-72 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.7.2.1 IntelPro DiagnosticTool 

Intel's diagnostic software lets you test the adapter to see if there are any problems with 

the adapter hardware, the cabling, or the network connection. You can also use 

diagnostics to isolate problems during troubleshooting. There are two test programs 

documented here. Both test Intel ® adapters and operate identically. 

– DIAGS.EXE runs under MS-DOS* v6.22 or later. (It will not run from a DOS window in 

IBM OS/2* or a Microsoft* Windows* product.) 

– DIAGS64.EFI runs in the EFI environment in Intel ® Itanium ® -based systems. 

These utilities are designed to test hardware operation and confirm the adapter's ability to 

communicate with another adapter in the same network, primarily confirming cabling. 

They are not throughput measurement tools. 

They can test the adapter for whether or not there is a responder on the network. In order 

to do a thorough test however, you should set-up a second system on the network as a 

responder prior to starting a test. 

59 

Starting the Test Utilities 

The test utility program automatically scans 

the hardware and lists all Intel-based 

adapters. 

They are listed as screen left. If you have 

only one network port in your system, this 

screen will be bypassed. If you have a dualor 

quad-port adapter, each port is listed 

separately starting with "Port A", then 

"Port B", etc. 

Select the adapter you want to test by 

moving the highlight and pressing . 

The test utility program displays its main 

menu (see screens below) 

View Adapter Configuration 

Selecting View Adapter Configuration will 

bring up the adapter configuration screen. 

This screen describes various properties of 

the adapter. 

Press to view additional information 

on the PCI slot occupied by the adapter. This 

is primarily used for troubleshooting by Intel 

technical support. 

Press to return to the main menu. 

60 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-73



Test Adapter Menu 

Selecting Test Adapter from the Main Menu 

brings up the Test Menu. This allows the user 

to test the adapter, select which tests to 

perform, set the adapter up as a network 

responder, or perform a continuous network 

sender test. 

61 

Begin Adapter Tests 

Select Begin Adapter Tests 

While tests are being performed, a rotating 

spinner is shown, indicating the application 

is still "alive." 

The results of the tests are displayed as each 

test is performed. If multiple test runs are 

selected, then the results contain a count of 

test failures. A list containing zeros means 

that all tests have been passed. 

If there is no responder on the network, the 

Network Test will indicate a failure. 

62 

6-74 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Change Test Options 

The test setup screen allows you to 

configure and select the specific tests 

desired. Each option is toggled by moving 

the cursor with the arrow keys and pressing 

to change the option. The number 

of tests is simply entered from the keyboard 

into the appropriate box. 

Diagnostic Log: normally disabled. If 

enabled, the program will ask for a directory 

for the log file. The file it stores there is 

named DIAG.LOG. 

63 

Note: 

The test program will test attributes that are 

applicable to your adapter. Only supported 

tests are displayed. The screen shown here is 

an example of the types of tests performed. 

Device Registers: writes, reads and verifies 

test patterns through the adapter's device 

registers to ensure proper functionality. 

FIFOs: writes test bit patterns to the 

adapter's FIFO buffers, to make sure the 

FIFOs are working correctly. 

EEPROM: tests the readability of the 

EEPROM as well as the integrity of the data 

stored in the EEPROM. It reads the EEPROM 

and calculates the checksum. This checksum 

is then compared to the checksum stored in 

the EEPROM. If the values are not the same, 

the test reports a failure. 

Interrupt: tests the adapter's ability to 

generate an interrupt and have it propagated 

through the system to the Programmable 

Interrupt Controller (PIC), that registers an 

interrupt. 

MAC Loopback and Phy Loopback: they 

are two internal loopback tests. These tests 

set the adapter in the appropriate loopback 

mode and send packets back through the 

adapter's receive circuitry and logic. 

Link: checks whether the adapter has a link 

or not. 

Network Test: looks for a responder, and 

then sends packets. If no responder is found, 

then the test reports a failure. If packets are 

received back from the responder, the test 

reports success. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-75



Set Up as Responder 

Selecting this option sets up the adapter as a 

responder, so that another system can 

perform the continuous network test. 

Selecting this brings up the transmit/receive 

screen (see left). This will fail if the adapter 

does not have a link. 

With this option you can use a variety of 

adapters as responder. 

Connect a second PC directly (with a 

crossover cable) or through a switch. 

64 

Start IntelPro Diagnostic Tool 

Ideal results are obtained with a an adapter 

of the same type. 

Press , to end the responder operation 

65 

Continuous Network Test 

This tests to make sure that the network is 

working correctly. The adapter will look for a 

responder. If none is found, the program will 

tell you. The transmit/receive screen 

appears as it does with the "Setup As 

Responder" menu option. 

When this test is running, the information in 

the screen (see left) is continuously updated 

Press to return to the Test Adapter 

menu. 

66 

6-76 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



67 

Display Diagnostic Log 

When the diagnostic log is enabled, test 

results are recorded in a log file named 

diags.log. If it does not already exist, the 

test utility creates it; otherwise new data is 

appended to it. This command displays the 

contents of the log file for your convenience. 

Each entry in the log file is time stamped. 

The test run banner identifies the tested 

adapter according to its bus slot address. 

See the example of a log file entry on the LH 

side. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-77



6.8 Dismount the Computer System 

Open the panels on the left (power supply) 

and right (connection panel): knurled screws 

Unscrew the allen screws (1) 

Disconnect the power supply cables 

Disconnect the data cable and slide it down 

Lift up the sorter 

Slide the Computer System to the right onto 

the Paper Processor 

3002_022 

6-78 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



6.9 Installation of the Card Reader 

Requirements: 

Installer OP System d-lab.1, version 1.05 or higher 10+9807090251 

Software d-lab.1, version 2.00C or higher 

CM+9807080006 

Multislot Card Reader (Hardware) Type no. 8070/399 ABC Code 5LGTL 

Licence Key for File Print on Board Type no. 8070/601 ABC Code 5LELU 

Installation rules: 

1. Mount Card Reader 

2. If Operating System is lower then 1.05 and Main Software is lower then 2.00C, 

Installer Operating System 1.05 or higher and Software 2.00C or higher must be 

installed. 

3. Save Customer Settings and Data Base using Save Settings in the GUI 

4. Copy to CD: 

D:\Data\Combiprints 

D:\Data\dbbackup 

D:\Data\Index 

D:\Data\Luts (ensure that offset_large1 - 4.ars, offset_small1 - 4.ars and 

LCD_Lut.txt are in this folder => 9 files) 

D:\Data\statisctics 

Save these folders to CD using Nero: 

C:\Program Files\Ahead\Nero\nero.exe 

5. After running d-lab.1 Operating System MPU 1.05 copy saved data back to MPU. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-79



6.9.1 Hardware Installation 

Shut down d-lab.1 

Open the panels on the left (power supply) 

and right (connection panel): knurled screws 

Remove the two screws (1) on the left side 

of the top panel 

Loosen the three screws (2) on the modem 

case 

Take out the modem case 

Disconnect the following cables: 

monitor power supply 

key panel 

CD-ROM drive (flat cable) 

Remove the two screws (3) on the left side 

of the drive carrier 

Remove the lower screw (4) on the right side 

of the drive carrier 

Pull out the carrier from the rear: 

Attention! 

Not all cables are disconnected! 

3002_113 

Remove the three screws (1) that secure the 

middle cover of the carrier 

Remove the middle cover 

Remove the lower screw (2) of the cable 

clamp (the nut is not longer used) 

3002_114 

6-80 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Insert the card reader mounted on the carrier 

Secure the card reader with four screws 

(1 and 2): 

Use the long screw (2) to fix both cable 

clamb and card reader. 

3002_115 

If cable (A) is already available in the 

machine, connect it to the card reader. 

Otherwise connect the supplied cable (B): 

Make sure the red cable (1) is connected 

to VCC+. 

3002_116 

3002_117 

Connect the other end of (B) to the MPU 

motherboard: 

Use the second USB connector (yellow) 

Make sure the red cable (1) is 

connected to + (upper row, first PIN on 

the right side) 

Connect the MPU power supply to the card 

reader. 

Reassemble the drive carrier and the modem 

case. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 6-81



■ 

6-82 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



7 Film Processor 

7.1 Functional description 

Note: 

d-lab.1s and netlab.1 machines without Film Processor 

The Film Processor consists of three main assembly groups, i.e. the Loading Unit, the 

Processing Unit and the Leader Cutter. 

The Loading Unit holds the film magazines for APS / 120 and 135 and transmits the films 

to the processing unit. After having passed the processing solutions, the Leader card is cut 

in the Leader Cutter and the film is sent directly to the Scanner, or the film and the 

Leader card are exited at the top of the Processor. 

7.2 Assembly Groups in the Film Processor 

7.2.1 Location 

1 Tank valve: 

to empty the tanks CD, BL, FIX, SB 

2 Effluent tanks: 

LHS: CD + BL 

RHS: FX + SB 

3002_158 

7.2.2 Designation and shortcuts 

Assembly group Shortcut Assembly group Shortcut 

Temperature Control Tank FPCT Replenishment Mixing Pump FPMP 

Docking Station FPDS Replenisher Dilution FPRI 

Dryer Heater FPDH Replenishment Pump FPRP 

Dryer FPDR Replenisher Tank FPRT 

Effluent Tank FPET Replenishment Water FPRW 

Film Exit FPFE Tank FPTK 

Main Frame FPMF Leader Cutter LC 

Processor Drive FPPD Scanner SC 

Loading Unit FPLD Water Pump WP 

Power Supply Unit 

FPPS 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 7-1



7.3 Actuators and Sensors in the Film Processor 

Note: 

See also Actuators and Sensors Overview and Tube diagram at the end of this 

chapter (pages A3) 

3002_099 

7-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



7.3.1 Designation and Shortcuts 

Example: FPRTMO02 

Position Designation 

1 and 2 FP for Film Processor 

3 and 4 Assembly group in which the component is mounted 

5 and 6 Function of the part 

7 and 8 Current number in the assembly group 

7.3.2 Funktion of the parts 

Function Shortcut Function Shortcut 

Fan FA Light Sensor LS 

Float Sensor FS Magnet / Solenoid MG 

Temperature Fuse FU Microswitch MS 

Heater HT Motor MO 

Heat Sensor HS Switch SW 

Lamp / LED LA Thermostat TH 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 7-3



7.3.3 Actuators and Sensors List 

Assembly group Name Category Function Movement 

(Device state) 

Processor 

drive 

Mainframe 

Tanks 

Pump 

Effluent tanks 

FPPDMO01 Actuator Film Processor transport motor ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPMFMS01 Sensor Detection of Interlock switch ONN: detects 

OFF: does not detect 

FPMFFA03 Actuator Cooling fan of circulation pumps ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPTKFS01 Sensor CD: Level detection temperature control tank ONN: needs water 

OFF: normal 

FPTKFS02 Sensor BL: Level detection temperature control tank ONN: needs water 

OFF: normal 

FPTKFS03 Sensor FX1: Level detection temperature control tank ONN: needs water 

OFF: normal 

FPTKFS04 Sensor FX2: Level detection temperature control tank ONN: needs water 

OFF: normal 

FPTKFS05 Sensor SB1: Level detection temperature control tank ONN: needs water 

OFF: normal 


OFF: normal 


OFF: normal 

FPTKFA01 Actuator CD: Cooling fan ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPPPMO01 

to 

FPPPMO04 

Actuator Chemical circulation pumps ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPPPMO08 Actuator CD / BL: Agitation pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPETFS01 Sensor CD / BL: Level detection effluent tank ONN: full 

OFF: not full 

FPETFS03 Sensor FX / SB: Level detection effluent tank ONN: full 

OFF: not full 

7-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto





Replenishment 

Replenishment 

pump 

Replenishment 

water tanks 

FPRTFS01 Sensor CD: Low level detection replenisher tank ONN: empty 

OFF: not empty 

FPRTFS02 Sensor BL: Low level detection replenisher tank ONN: empty 


FPRTFS03 Sensor FX: Low level detection replenisher tank ONN: empty 


FPRTFS04 Sensor SB: Low level detection replenisher tank ONN: empty 


FPRTFS05 Sensor CD: High level detection replenisher tank ONN: full 

OFF: not full 

FPRTFS06 Sensor BL: High level detection replenisher tank ONN: full 

OFF: not full 

FPRTFS07 Sensor FX: High level detection replenisher tank ONN: full 

OFF: not full 

FPRTFS08 Sensor SB: High level detection replenisher tank ONN: full 

OFF: not full 

FPRTFS09 Sensor CD: Overflow level detection replenisher tank ONN: overflow level 

OFF: normal 

FPRTFS10 Sensor BL: Overflow level detection replenisher tank ONN: overflow level 

OFF: normal 

FPRTFS11 Sensor FX: Overflow level detection replenisher tank ONN: overflow level 

OFF: normal 

FPRTFS12 Sensor SB: Overflow level detection replenisher tank ONN: overflow level 

OFF: normal 

FPRTMO01 Actuator CD: Mixing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPRTMO02 Actuator FX: Mixing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPRPMO01 Actuator CD: Replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPRPMO02 Actuator BL: Replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPRPMO03 Actuator FX: Replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPRPMO04 Actuator SB: Replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPRWMO01 Actuator CD: Water replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPRWMO02 Actuator BL: Water replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPRWMO03 Actuator FX: Water replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPRWMO04 Actuator SB: Water replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 7-5



Assembly group Name Category Function Movement (Device state) 

Temperature 

control tanks 

Dryer 

Dryer heater 

Dryer rack 

Docking system 

FPCTHS01 Sensor CD: Temperature sensor Temp. 

FPCTHS02 Sensor BL: Temperature sensor Temp. 

FPCTHS03 Sensor SB: Temperature sensor Temp. 

FPCTHT01 Heater CD: Heater element ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPCTHT02 Heater BL: Heater element ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPCTHT03 Heater SB: Heater element ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPDYMS01 Sensor Dryer position detection ONN: detects 


FPDYFA01 Actuator Dryer fan ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPDHAL01 Sensor Monitoring of FPDYFA01 ONN: during fan 

rotation 

OFF: when fan OFF 

FPDHHT01 Heater Dryer Heater 1 ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPDHHT02 Heater Dryer Heater 2 ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPDRHS01 Sensor Temperature sensor for Dryer Temp. 

FPDRLS01 Sensor Short Leader detection in the Dryer ONN: detects 


FPDSMS01 Sensor Card box door cover switch ONN: detects 


FPDSMS02 Sensor Card box door cover lock switch ONN: locked 

OFF: unlocked 

FPDSLS01 Sensor BL,FX,SB: Docking cutter home sensor ONN: detects 


FPDSLS02 Sensor BL,FX,SB: Docking cutter position sensor ONN: detects 


FPDSLS03 Sensor BL,FX,SB: Detection card box bottle ONN: detects 


FPDSLS04 Sensor CD: Docking cutter home sensor ONN: detects 


FPDSLS05 Sensor CD: Docking cutter position sensor ONN: detects 


FPDSLS06 Sensor CD: Detection card box bottle ONN: detects 


FPDSLA01 LED LED indication Docking system ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPDSMG01 Actuator Interlock of card box door ONN: locked 

OFF: unlocked 

FPDSMO01 Actuator Docking cutter drive motor 

(NX next cut position / HP home position) 

ONPXX: forward 

ONMXX: reverse XX 

NX next cut 

position 

7-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto





Water pump 

Loading 

FPWPMG01 Actuator CD: Replenishment tank add Water Valve ONNxxx: xx.x sec ON 

(004





Loading (cont.) 

Leader cutter 

Scanner 

FPLDMO01 Actuator Transport of Short Leader from magazine A ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPLDMO02 Actuator Transport of Short Leader from magazine B ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

FPLDMG01 Actuator Interlock of magazine A ONN: locked 

OFF: unlocked 

FPLDMG02 Actuator Interlock of magazine B ONN: locked 

OFF: unlocked 

FPLDMG03 Actuator Cutter operation magazine A ONN: cut 

OFF: stop 

FPLDMG04 Actuator Cutter operation magazine B ONN: cut 

OFF: stop 

FPLDMG05 Actuator Light shutter magazine A ONN: press 

OFF: release 

FPLDMG06 Actuator Light shutter magazine B ONN: press 

OFF: release 

FPLDMG07 Actuator Light shutter preceding the CD UPP: open 

DWN: close 

FPLCLS01 Sensor Film end detection (LC Stocker) ONN: detects 


FPLCLS02 Sensor Cutter position monitoring LC ONN: detects 


FPLCLS03 Sensor Cutter open LC ONN: detects 


FPLCMO01 Actuator Leader cutter motor ONP: cut position 

ONM: ground position 

FPSCIN01 Sensor CFP Scanner input ONN: Stocker free 

OFF: Stocker blocked 

FPSCOT01 Actuator CFP Scanner output ONN: Film transfer 

OFF: no film in FP 

7-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



7.4 Components of the Film Processor 

7.4.1 Main Drive 

7.4.1.1 Checking the main drive 

Check the drive motor fastening screws 

Check the axial backlash of the individual 

worm gears on the drive shaft: 

The driver pins must still be reliably in the 

groove of the worm gear at a maximum 

backlash. 

Check the tight seating of the sprocket gears 

on the motor shaft and the drive shaft. 

Check the toothed belt tension, if required 

tighten the tension by means of the motor 

bracket. 

fppd 

7.4.1.2 Replacing the main drive motor 

Remove the rear cover 

Unscrew the 4 screws (1) 

Remove the motor 

3009_100 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 7-9



7.4.1.3 Lubricating the chains and sprocket gears 

CAUTION! 

The Film Processor dryer is made of a 

plastic compound that is particularly 

sensitive to lubricants. The chains (1), (2) 

and (3) should therefore only be 

lubricated with Klueberalfa. 

Never use any other grease as otherwise 

the plastic will break! 

3002_017 

Lubricate the continuous chain (1) and the 

drive chain (2) with Klueberalfa 

Lubricate the main drive chain (3) with 

Klueberalfa: 

Use the crank handle to move the chain 

After lubricating the chain remove 

excess lubricant with a cloth 

Lubricate the motor gear to the 50/60 Hz 

gear with Klueberplex 

7.4.2 Gear for Frequency Adjustment 

7.4.2.1 Replacing the Gear 50 / 60 Hz 

Remove the rear cover of the Film Processor 



Replace the worn part: 

Gear for 50/60 Hz (1 x) 

Part no. CL+P3-86595 

ABC-Code 9B9TM 

3009_008 

7-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



7.4.3 Loading Unit 

7.4.3.1 Sensors 

Note: 

The service script Sensor_Control_FP.txt can be used to check the sensors. 

fpld_1 

Sensor 

FPLDMS01 

FPLDMS02 

FPLDMS03 

FPLDMS04 

FPLDLS01 

FPLDLS02 

FPLDLS03 

FPLDLS04 

FPLDLS05 

FPLDLS06 

FPLDLS07 

FPLDLS08 

FPLDLS09 

FPLDLS10 

Description 

Size detection magazine A 

Size detection magazine A 

Size detection magazine B 

Size detection magazine B 

Cartridge position detection magazine A 

Film end detection magazine A 

Film detection and film size scanning magazine A 



Cartridge position detection magazine B 

Film end detection magazine B 

Film detection and film size scanning magazine B 



AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 7-11



7.4.3.2 Actuators 

Note: 

The service script Actuator_Control_FP.txt can be used to check the actuators. 

Actuator 

FPLDLA01 

FPLDLA02 

FPLDLA03 

FPLDLA04 

FPLDMO01 

FPLDMO02 

Description 

LED indication magazine A (red) 

LED indication magazine A (green) 

LED indication magazine B (red) 

LED indication magazine B (green) 

Transport Short Leader from 

magazine A 

Transport Short Leader from 

magazine B 

fpld_2 

Actuator 

FPLDMG01 

FPLDMG02 

FPLDMG03 

FPLDMG04 

FPLDMG05 

FPLDMG06 

FPLDMG07 

Description 

Interlock magazine A 

Interlock magazine B 

Cutter operation magazine A 

Cutter operation magazine B 

Light shutter magazine A 

Light shutter magazine B 

Light shutter preceding CD 

fpld_3 

7-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



7.4.4 Leader Cutter 

7.4.4.1 Function 

The Leader Cutter is the output unit of the Film Processor. It offers two possibilities of the 

film transport; either directly via the Stocker and the film bridge to the Scanner with 

automatic cut-off of the Leader card, or indirectly with the film ejection at the top of the 

Processor dryer, the Leader card is not cut. 

Film speed: 0,648 m/min = 10.8 mm/s 

7.4.4.2 Actuators and Sensors 

Note: 

The service scripts Actuator_Control_FP.txt and Sensor_Control_FP.txt can be used 

to check the actuator and sensors. 

Actuator 

FPLCMO01 

Description 

Leader cutter motor 

Sensor 

FPLCLS02 

Description 

Leader card detection 

fplc_1 

Sensor 

FPLCLS01 

FPLCLS03 

Description 

Leader cutter position 

Film detection 

fplc_2 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 7-13



Name Category Function Movement 


FPLCLS01 Sensor Leader cutter position ONN: detects 


FPLCLS02 Sensor Leader card detection ONN: detects 


FPLCLS03 Sensor Film detection ONN: detects 


FPLCMO01 Actuator Leader cutter motor ONP: cut position 

ONM: ground position 

– The stepping motor drives the Leader Cutter. 

– In ground position, motor power is turned off, motor current is 0. 

– Only when a film is to be cut, power is turned on and the motor is moved from 

position 0 to position 3. 

– The signal from LS01 is checked. If it does not change within the step limits, an error 

has occurred. 

7.4.4.3 Motor positions (half steps) 

Nr. Steps Name Description Note 

0 0 Ground position LC falls to this position after power off 

0a 8 Ground position a LC is moved to this position on its way back 

1 4...40 LS01 Start Optical switch changes from OFF to ON in cutting direction ON = 5 V 

2 500..514 LS01 End Optical switch changes from ON to OFF in cutting direction OFF = 0 V 

3 515 Active position Leader Cutter in top position 

7-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



7.4.5 Processing Racks 

7.4.5.1 Replacing parts 

Check the racks for smooth movement 

Check the gears, roller shafts, slide bearings 

and springs on all racks for damage / wear 

and replace them if necessary 

Check all foam plastic rollers on the SB in 

the squeegee unit area and replace them if 

necessary 

Check the wearing parts and replace them if 

necessary: 

Sprocket gear (2 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P3-87159 

ABC Code 83GNS 

Stop rings (4 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P4-49901 

ABC Code YOL9S 

Bevel gear (8 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P4-87162 

ABC Code 89ECE 

Bush, metal (8 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P4-87163 

ABC Code 83GHH 


Part no. 

CL+P4-49902 

ABC Code YOW3R 

3002_001 

Check the roller of the SB3 rack and replace 

it if necessary: 

Roller (1 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P4-87186 

ABC Code 9BVJF 

3002_002 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 7-15



Check the inlet roller of the SB1 rack and 

replace it if necessary: 

Inlet roller (1 x) 

Part no. 

ABC Code 

CL+P4-87190 

93VKH 

3002_130 

7-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



7.4.6 Docking 

The filmprocessor needs two docking routines. One for opening the cardboard box 1 with 

the CD concentrate (every 400 films 135-24) and one for opening the cardboard box 2 

with the BL, FX and SB concentrates (every 200 films 135-24). 

When the first replenisher tank is detected as empty, the replenishing stops and the 

refilling procedure starts automatically. A certain amount of films (max. 10 films 135-24) 

can still be developed after replenishing stopped. If the refilling procedure is not 

completed after 10 films 135-24 passed the processor, the film input must stop. 

It is unlikely that all replenisher tanks are empty at the same time. If one replenisher tank 

is detected as empty the remaining amount in the other replenisher tanks (which tanks 

depend on which routine is currently in process) has to be pumped into the processor 

tanks until they also are detected as empty by the lower level sensor. If the remaining 

amount is too much it is likely that there is a mechanical error in the machine and an 

according message occurs. All replenisher pumps are calibrated automatically after each 

refilling procedure if necessary. 

The only tasks the operator has to perform are refilling the water tank until the water 

demand sensor detects enough water for the refilling procedure and exchanging the 

cardboard box(es) in the docking station. The operator is asked by display messages to 

change the cardboard box(es) and to fill up the water tank at the end of any refilling 

procedure. The docking system then will be in a stand-by position when new chemicals 

are required next time. 

If the water tank is full and a new cardboard box is kept in the docking system the 

refilling of the replenisher tanks will be performed without any actions by the operator. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 7-17




Note: 

The service scripts Actuator_Control_FP.txt and Sensor_Control_FP.txt can be used 


Actuator 

FPDSMG01 

FPDSMO01 

Description 

Interlock of card box door 

Docking cutter drive motor 

(NX next cut position / HP home 

position) 

FPDS 

Sensor 

FPDSMS01 

FPDSMS02 

FPDSLS01 

FPDSLS02 

FPDSLS03 

FPDSLS04 

FPDSLS05 

FPDSLS06 

FPDSLA01 

Description 

Card box door cover switch 

Card box door cover lock switch 

BL,FX,SB: Docking cutter home 

sensor 

BL,FX,SB: Docking cutter position 

sensor 

BL,FX,SB: Detection card box 

bottle 

CD: Docking cutter home sensor 

CD: Docking cutter position sensor 

CD: Detection card box bottle 

LED indication Docking system 

FPDS_2 

FPDS_3 

7-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



3002_083 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 7-19




The part called nozzle set is bonded to form a unit. It includes a bellows and an opener. 

Take out the easy film boxes. 

Check the nozzle sets: 

Push the nozzle sets up. If one does not 

move smoothly, it must be cleaned 

thoroughly. 

Remove the cover plate (1) 

Remove the clamps (2) and disconnect the 

hoses: 

For the water inlet 

To the replenisher tanks 

3002_085 

7-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Remove the docking station: 

Unscrew: 

2 screws on the machine frame 

2 screws inside the docking station (1) 

Lift the docking station out of the 

machine and put it down 

3002_148 

Remove the T-joints with the pipes (water 

rinsing system): 

Remove the clamp (1) 

Take out the T-joint with the pipe (2) 

Note: 

An O-ring (3) is attached to the pipe (2). 

3002_144 

3002_139 

Clean or replace the parts: 

Pipe (1) for CD A/B/C (3 x) 

(delivered with O-ring) 

Color red 

Part no. CL+P4A-F2053 

ABC Code WANX8 

Pipe (2) for FX, SB (3 x) 

(delivered without O-ring) 

Color black 

Part no. CL+P3-F2054 

ABC Code WANYB 

O-ring for pipe FX, SB 

Part no. CL+ZQY-7 

ABC Code URURN 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 7-21



Remove the nozzle set: 

Unscrew the springs (1) from the rear of 

the docking stations and remove them 

3002_143 

Pull down the stoppers (1) which hold 

the nozzle sets (2) in the correct 

position 

3002_146 

Push the bracket (2) to the back 

Remove the two drip trays (1) and clean 

them 

3002_131 

7-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



CAUTION! 

Sharp blade. Risk of injuries when 

working on the nozzle set. 

Do not push down the bellows around the 

opener. 

Hold the bellows, turn it 90° anti-CW 

and lift the nozzle set out 

3002_133 

3002_134 

Service the nozzle sets and sleeves or 

replace them, if necessary (see below): 

Check the nozzle sets for leaks and 

crystal deposits and clean them 

Grease the nozzle sleeve lightly with 

Klueberalfa HX83-302 (see arrows) 

Replace the nozzle sets and sleeves: 

Nozzle set (6 x) 

Part no. CL+PA3-F4205 

ABC Code WANV4 

Sleeve with felt (6 x) 


ABC Code WANW6 

Clean the docking station: 

Wash off crystal deposits and dried chemical 

residues in the docking station 

Reinstall the two drip trays: 

CAUTION! 

Make sure that the drip trays audibly click 

into place, otherwise the nozzle sets 

cannot return to their home position after 

the docking sequence. 

When inserting a new easy box, the 

chemicals would run into the machine. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 7-23



Reinstall the nozzle set: 

Insert the nozzle set 

While pushing the nozzle holder (1) 

approx. 2 mm upwards, turn the nozzle 

set (2) 90° CW, until it audibly clicks 

into place 

Fix the nozzle set with the stopper (3) 

3002_142 

7-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



7.4.7 Replenisher tanks 


Unscrew the bracket (1) and pull out the 

tank 

1 

3002_043 

3002_044 

1 2 

Note: 

The CD replenisher tank contains antioxidation 

floaters. 

Clean the replenisher tanks (1) and rinse 

them, check for possible leaks at the seams 

(especially near the handle) 

Check the float sensors (2) for Empty, Full 

and Overflow (mounted in the tank lid): 

The floaters of the switches must move 

easily in vertical direction, if necessary 

replace the switches. 

Put the tanks back and check the tank lid 

lockings 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 7-25



7.4.8 Effluent tanks 

7.4.8.1 Checking parts 

Rinse the effluent tanks (1) with water and 

check them for leaks 

Check that the float sensors (2) move easily 

in vertical direction 

2 

1 

3002_031 

■ 

7-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family


Scanner 

8 Scanner 

Note: 

netlab.1 machines without Scanner 

3002_155 

8.1 Designation of Assembly Groups and Shortcuts 

Shortcut Assembly group (English) Task 

CM Camera Module Recording of the film scanning data and film positioning 

LM Lighting Module LED lighting for the film scanner 

MB Main Board — 

SF Scanner Frame Basic frame to hold the Scanner assembly groups 

FF Film Feeder Feed station for films (110, 135, APS manual) 

FS Film Supply Transfer of films 135 from the Film Processor (Leader Cutter) to the film 

drive (SF) 

CF Cartridge Feeder Feed station for APS films (automatic) 

ES Scanner electronic — 

FT Film Take Up Film take-up between film feed and film exit 

NM Negative Mask Film carriers to guide the various film sizes through the film scanner 

SM Slide Mask Film carrier to hold framed slides 

MS Magnet Sensor Board Transfer of the data read by the magnetic read head (APS film carrier), 

in EMV box 

MD Magnetic decoder Processing of the magnetic data on APS films, part of APS mask 

DS Driver Sensor Board Driver electronic of the sensors and loads in the Scanner 

CC CCD Driver Board Driver of the CCD Chips of the film scanner, part of camera module 

CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD Chips of the film scanner (surface CCD for film scanning data and 

CCD array for the positioning logic), part of camera module 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 8-1

Scanner 


8.2 Actuators and Sensors 

8.2.1 General overview 

3002_052 

Camera Module CM CM_MO01 Switch-over of the magnification between 135 / APS 

CM_LS01 

Initialisation CM_MO01 

CM_MO02 Chip rotation 

CM_FA01 

Cooling CCD 

Main-, Prescan 

Prescan: Perforation, APL, DX 

Temperature control CCD 

Lighting Module LM LM_xxxx Illumination of the Pre-, Mainscan 

Scanner Frame SF SF_MO01 Film drive 

SF_MO02 

Auxiliary drive left, right, negative pressure 

SF_LS01 to 06 Negative mask detection 

SF_LS07 

Initialisation SF_MO02 

SF_MG01_1 Mask locking locked 

SF_MG01_2 Mask locking unlocked 

Film Feeder FF FF_MO01 Feeder width adjustment 

FF_LS01 

Feeder motor initialisation 

FF_LS04 

Detection film in front of rocker 

FF_LS03 

Detection film from Film Supply 

Film Supply FS FS_MO01 Flap control + lifting drive roller 

FS_LS01 

Top flap position monitoring 

FS_MS01 

Switch to check the Film Processor lid 

FS_MO02 

Film transport motor 

8-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Scanner 

8.2.2 Camera Module CM 

Actuator / 

Sensor 

CM_LS01 

CM_MO01 

CM_CCD 

Description 

Bifocal lens zero position 

Bifocal lens motor 

one channel - two channel switch 

SCCM 

8.2.3 Lighting Module LM 

Actuator / 

Sensor 

LM_LED 

Description 

LEDs switch on/off 

SCLM 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 8-3

Scanner 


8.2.4 Scanner Frame SF 

Actuator / 

Sensor 

LS01-LS06 

LS07 

MG01 

MG02 

MO01 

MO02 

Description 

Negative carrier coding 

Motor zero position 

Negative carrier magnet unlock 

Negative carrier magnet lock 

Film drive motor 

Cam disc motor 

SCSF 

8.2.5 Cartridge Feeder CF 

Actuator / 

Sensor 

LK01 

LS01 

LS04 

LS07/08 

LS09 

LS10 

CF_MO01 

Description 

Light shutter 

APS film on 

Sensor for film developed 

APS film cartridge: open and close 

light shaft 

Film forward or backward 

Sensor for film end 

Motor APS drive 

SCCF_1 

SCCF_2 

8-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Scanner 

8.2.6 Film Feeder FF 

Actuator / 

Sensor 

LS01 

LS02 

LS03 

LS04 

MO01 

Description 

Feeder zero position 

Film in stocker 

Film before driving roller 

Film input sensor 

Film width adjustment 

SCFF 

8.2.7 Film Supply FS 

Actuator / 

Sensor 

LS01 

MO01 

MO02 

Description 

Motor zero position 

Film bridge 

Film transport motor 

SCFS 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 8-5

Scanner 


8.2.8 Main Board MB 

Actuator / 

Sensor 

LVDS 

Description 

Transmitter 

SCMB 

8-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Scanner 

8.3 Functional Description 

8.3.1 Scanner data and signal paths 

CF 

Cartridge- 

Feeder 

CCD Frontend 

Pre-Scan Head PS 

CCD array 

CCD board 

CC 

Data interface IPU 

Command interface MPU 

CAN 

Data 

Clocks 

MD 

Magnetic 

decoder 

CAN 

SC Scanner Main Board 

SVV 

FPGA 

Scanner 

Controller 

APS magnetic 

sensor 

Pulses 

Voltages 

poss. 

Scanner Power 

Switch Board SP 

DS Driver Sensor Board 

Stepper motor 

output stage 

DC motor 

output stage 

Light sensor 

system 

Solenoid 

output stage 

poss. 

Voltage 

switching 

LED driver 

LH 

LED 

Lamphouse 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 8-7

Scanner 


8.3.2 Integration into the global system 

The integration into the global system is shown in the following figure: 

Scanner 

Main-Board 

Controller 

Command 

interface 

MPU 

Data bus 

Mainscan 

IPU 

Prescan 

FPGA 

Data interface 

Frame 

grabber 

Data interface to the Print Engine 

(LVDS or DVI) 

(Orig fehlt) 

Communication takes places via two interfaces: 

– The command interface communicates with the cycle control in the Main PC. No data 

volumes are exchanges via interface. 

– The data interface is a unidirectional connection for large data volumes, e.g. image 

data. 

8-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Scanner 

8.3.3 Driver Sensor Board (DS, SF_GS01) 

St1 FF_LS04 St14 — 

St2 FF_LS03 St15 SC_GS01.St4 

St3 FF_LS01 St16 LM_BU1 

St4 FS_LS01 St17 SF_GS02.St1 (negative mask coding) 

St5 FF_MO01 St18 SC_GS01.St1 

St6 FS_MO02 St19 Input voltage 

St7 FS_MO01 St20 SF_MO02 (code disk drive) 

St8 FP St21 SF_MO01 (film drive) 

St9 LCE St22 CM_FA01.St1 

ST10 SC_GS02.St8 St23 — 

St11 CS_ STOP-Taste St24 SF_MG1 (solenoid negative mask locking) 

St12 SF_LS07 (code disk light sensor) St25 GS01_CF.St3 

St13 free (test plug) 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 8-9

Scanner 


8.3.4 Scanner Motherboard 

■ 

8-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 

9 Printer 

9.1 Assembly Groups in the Printer 


PaperDrive 

9.1.2 Designation and shortcuts 

Assembly group 

Exposure Table 

Main Frame 

Lane Distributor 

Back Printer 

Shutter 

RH Cutter 

LH Cutter 

RH Paper magazine drive 

LH Paper magazine drive 

Auxiliary paper drive 

Shortcut 

PAVC 

PAMF 

PALD 

PABP 

PASL 

PAPC 

PAPC 

PAMD 

PAMD 

PAPA 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-1

Printer 



Example: PALDMO06 


1 and 2 PA for Paper Advance 





Function 

Exposure Controller 

Fan 

LED (red, green, blue) 

Light Sensor 

Magnet / Solenoid 

Microswitch 

Microstepper / Zoom Controller 

Motor 

Shortcut 

EC 

FA 

LA 

LS 

MG 

MS 

MZ 

MO 

9-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 

9.2 Actuators and Sensors in the Exposure Unit 

3002_051 

Exposure unit without covers 

Shortcut Assembly group Task 

EC Exposure Controller Board Main control of the print engine 

LR LED Red LED lighting (red) 

LG LED Green LED lighting (green) 

LB LED Blue LED lighting (blue) 

LD LDB-Board Image data processing and LCD control 

LH Lamphouse Illumination unit 

TS Temperature Sensor LCD temperature regulation 

PD Photo Diode LCD measurement of the light quantity 

MZ Microstepper/Zoom Controller Control of the Microstepper and the Zoom lens (2 magnifications) 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-3

Printer 


9.3 Exchange of the Print Engine 

The design of the print engine mounting plate allows it to replace the print engine 

without mechanical adjustement. 

Each print engine needs individual correction files which are delivered on a CD together 

with the print engine. These have to be copied to the hard disk of the MPU. 

9.3.1 Demounting 

Shutdown machine 

Remove film box (1) 

Pull out the sheet metal part (2) 

3003_076 

Unscrew the bottom cover (containing the 

electronics) and fold it down 

Open the locking levers (1) of the exposure 

table 

CAUTION! 

When performing the next step, do not 

damage any cable! 

Pull out the exposure table to the front 

3003_056 

9-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 

Remove print engine top cover 

Unscrew cable holder bracket and 

disconnect all cables comming from the 

printer 

Remove print engine fixing screws (1) 

Take out Print engine 

3003_107 

1 

9.3.2 Mounting 

Place new printengine and fix it by the 

3 screws 

Reconnect all cables making sure that they 

are not bent 

Mount cable holder bracket 

3002_081_2 

Attach print engine cover 

CAUTION! 

When performing the next step, do not 

damage any cable! 

Push back print engine and lock it 

Attach electronic cover 

Mount film box and sheet metal part 

Close printer door 

Switch on machine 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-5

Printer 


9.3.3 Copying correction files 

Open Watchdog (Alt + Ctrl) and execute 

explorer 

watchdog 

Insert CD with print engine correction files 

and copy all files to following directories 

(confirm message to overwrite existing files): 

- d:\data\Luts 

- d:\sv_in_dir 

- c:\dlab1\dlab1.\ 

export_mainpc\luts 

Press ON-key to restart d-lab application 

9.3.4 Calibrating the machine 

Note: 

After the previous steps are performed, all papers have to be calibrated via a PBL as the 

new calibration files will directly affect the print result. 

9-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 

9.4 Actuators and Sensors in the Paper Advance (PA) 

9.4.1 Actuators and Sensors Diagram 

3002_054 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-7

Printer 





Exposure Table 

Main Frame 

Lane 

Distributor 

PAVCFA01 Actuator Vacuum fan ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PAVCMO01 Actuator Paper transport motor on exposure table ONP: ON (belt moves 

from right to left) 

ONM: ON (belt moves 

from left to right) 

OFF: OFF 

PAVCCN01 Sensor The mechanism detection of the new roll ON: NEW 

diameter measurement 

OFF: OLD 

PAVCLS01 Sensor Detection of the control strip magazine ON: detected 

OFF: not detected 

PAVCLS02 Sensor Paper detection of the exposure table (right) ON: detected 


PAVCLS03 Sensor Paper detection of the exposure table (left) ON: detected 


PAMFLS01 Sensor Paper detection between RH magazine and ON: paper detected 

cutter 

OFF: no paper 

PAMFLS02 Sensor Paper detection between LH magazine and ON: paper detected 

cutter 

OFF: no paper 

PAMFMS01 Sensor Printer door ON: closed 

OFF: open 

PAMFMS02 Sensor Emergency switch ON: SW was pushed 

OFF: OFF 

PALDLS01 Sensor Paper detection before back print ON: paper detected 

OFF: no paper 

PALDLS02 Sensor Home position of paper pad (for rotation) ON: home 

OFF: not home 

PALDLS03 Sensor Paper width check for distribution: 

ON: paper detected 

ON: distribution not possible 

OFF: no paper 

OFF: distribution possible 

PALDLS04 Sensor Paper detection before distributing ON: paper detected 

OFF: no paper 

PALDLS05 Sensor Home position of lane distributor ON: home 

OFF: not home 

PALDLS06 Sensor Paper detection after distributing (front side, ON: paper detected 

lower) 

OFF: no paper 

PALDLS07 Sensor Paper detection after distributing (rear side, ON: paper detected 

lower) 

OFF: no paper 

PALDLS08 Sensor Paper detection after distributing (front side, ON: paper detected 

upper) 

OFF: no paper 

PALDLS09 Sensor Paper detection after distributing (rear side, ON: paper detected 

upper) 

OFF: no paper 

9-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 



Lane 

Distributor 

(cont.) 

PALDMC01 Actuator Clutch for parallel transport ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PALDMO01 Actuator Paper transport in the LD entrance area ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PALDMO02 Actuator Pad movement for paper rotation ONN: initial (up) 

ONP: up 

ONM: down 

PALDMO03 Actuator Paper rotation motor ONP: rotate (CW) 

ONM: rotate (CCW) 

PALDMO04 Actuator Lane distributing motor ONN: home center 

PALDMO05 Actuator Paper transport in the lane distributor area ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PALDMO06 Actuator Paper transport in the LD exit area ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PALDMO07 Actuator Roller nip/release motor for rotation ONN: initial (nip) 

ONP: release 

ONM: nip 

PALDMO08 Actuator Paper transport from LD to processor ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

Back Printer PABPMO01 Actuator Back printer ink ribbon drive ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PABPPH01 Actuator Back printer head ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

Shutter PASLMG01 Actuator Shutter solenoid UPP: open 

DWN: close 

RH Cutter PAPCLS01 Sensor Paper detection at cutter (right) ON: paper detected 

OFF: no paper 

PAPCLS02 Sensor Splice detection (right) ON: paper detected 

OFF: no paper 

(=splice) 

PAPCLS05 Sensor Detection right cutter in paper movable ON: paper movable 

position 

OFF: paper unmovable 

(still cutting) 

PAPCLS07 Sensor Detection right cutter in home position ON: home 

OFF: not home 

PAPCCN01 Sensor Detection of the right cutter unit ON: detected 


PAPCMO01 Actuator Right cutter motor ONN: cut 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-9

Printer 




LH Cutter 

PAPCLS03 Sensor Paper detection at cutter (left) ON: paper detected 

OFF: no paper 

PAPCLS04 Sensor Splice detection (left) ON: paper detected 

OFF: no paper (splice) 

PAPCLS06 Sensor Detection left cutter in paper movable 

position 

ON: 

OFF: 

paper movable 

paper unmovable 

(still cutting) 

PAPCLS08 Sensor Detection left cutter in home position ON: home 

OFF: not home 

PAPCCN02 Sensor Detection of the right cutter unit ON: detected 


PAPCMO02 Actuator Left cutter motor ONN: cut 

RH Paper 

Magazine 

Drive 

PAMDLS01 Sensor Paper width code (right) 




PAMDLS05 Sensor Paper surface code (right) 

PAMDLS06 Sensor Paper surface code (right) 

PAMDLS15 Sensor Paper magazine set detection (right) ONN: not set 

OFF: set 

PAMDLA01 LED LED indication (red) right magazine must not 

be removed 

PAMDLA02 LED LED indication (green) right magazine may be 

removed 

ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PAMDMC01 Actuator Clutch of roller set in the right magazine ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PAMDMC02 Actuator 

Clutch for paper diameter measurement 

(right) 

ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PAMDMO01 Actuator Paper trnsport in the right magazine ONP: forward 

ONM: reverse 

OFF: OFF 

PAMDMO02 Actuator Right magazine core drive ONP: rewind 

ONM: make buffer 

OFF: OFF 

9-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 



LH Paper 

Magazine 

Drive 

PAMDCN01 Sensor Detection of the left magazine unit ON: detected 


PAMDLS08 Sensor Paper width code (left) 


PAMDLS10 Sensor Paper surface code (left) 

PAMDLS11 Sensor Paper surface code (left) 



Auxiliary 

paper drive 

PAMDLS16 Sensor Paper magazine set detection (left) ONN: not set 

OFF: set 

PAMDLA03 LED LED indication (red) left magazine must not 

be removed 

PAMDLA04 LED LED indication (green) left magazine may be 

removed 

ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PAMDMC03 Actuator Clutch of roller set in the left magazine ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PAMDMC04 Actuator Clutch for paper diameter measurement (left) ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PAMDMO03 Actuator Paper transport in the left magazine ONP: forward 

ONM: reverse 

OFF: OFF 

PAMDMO04 Actuator Left magazine core drive ONP: rewind 

ONM: make buffer 

OFF: OFF 

PAPALS01 Sensor Paper detection between exposure table and ON: paper detected 

lane distributor 

OFF: no paper 

PAPAMG01 Actuator Paper direction switch between 

transport from magazin (horizontal) to 

lane distributor (vertical) 

PAPAMO01 Actuator Paper transport from exp. table to LD ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

UPP: from magazine 

DWN: to lane distributor 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-11

Printer 


9.5 Paper Advance Sequence 

3002_125 

9-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 

3002_126 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-13

Printer 


3002_127 

9-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 

9.6 Components of the Paper Advance 

9.6.1 Paper magazine drives 

The Printer has two paper magazine drives that are of an identical structure. They only 

differ by the numbering of the actuators and the sensors. 

9.6.1.1 Actuators 

Note: 

The actuators can be checked with the service script Actuator_Control_PA.txt. 

Paper Magazine Drive RHS: 

Actuator 

PAMDMC01 

PAMDMC02 

PAMDMO01 

PAMDMO02 

Description 

Clutch of roller set in the right 

magazine 

Clutch for paper diameter 

measurement (right) 

Paper transport in the right 

magazine 

Right magazine core drive 

PAMD_2 

Paper Magazine Drive LHS: 

Actuator 

PAMDLA04 

PAMDMC03 

PAMDMC04 

PAMDMO03 

PAMDMO04 

Description 

LED indication (green) left 

magazine may be removed 

Clutch of roller set in the left 

magazine 


measurement (left) 

Paper transport in the left 

magazine 

Left magazine core drive 

PAMD_4 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-15

Printer 


9.6.1.2 Sensors 

Note: 

The sensors can be checked with the service script Sensor_Control_PA.txt. 

Paper Magazine Drive RHS: 

PAMD_1 

Sensor 

PAMDLS01 

PAMDLS02 

PAMDLS03 

PAMDLS04 

PAMDLS05 

PAMDLS06 

PAMDLS15 

PAMDLA01 

PAMDLA02 

PAMDMC01 

PAMDMC02 

PAMDMO01 

PAMDMO02 

Description 

Paper width code(right) 

Paper width code (right) 



Paper surface code (right) 

Paper surface code (right) 

Paper magazine set detection (right) 

LED indication (red): right 

magazine must not be removed 

LED indication (green): right 


Clutch of roller set in the right 

magazine 


measurement (right) 

Paper transport in the right 

magazine 

Right magazine core drive 

Paper Magazine Drive LHS: 

PAMD_2 

Sensor 

PAMDCN01 

PAMDLS08 

PAMDLS09 

PAMDLS10 

PAMDLS11 

PAMDLS12 

PAMDLS13 

PAMDLS16 

PAMDLA03 

PAMDLA04 

PAMDMC03 

PAMDMC04 

PAMDMO03 

PAMDMO04 

Description 

Detection of the left magazine 

unit 

Paper width code (left) 


Paper surface code (left) 

Paper surface code (left) 



Paper magazine set detection (left) 

LED indication (red): left magazine 

must not be removed 

LED indication (green): left 


Clutch of roller set in the left 

magazine 


measurement (left) 

Paper transport in the left 

magazine 

Left magazine core drive 

9-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 

9.6.2 Transport Unit TU 

9.6.2.1 Actuators / Sensors 

Note: 



Actuator / 

Sensor 

PAVCFA01 

PAVCMO01 

PAVCLS01 

PAVCLS02 

PAVCLS03 

Description 

Vacuum fan 

Paper transport motor on exposure 

table 

Detection of the control strip box 

Paper detection of the exposure 

table (right) 

Paper detection of the exposure 

table (left) 

PAVC 

LH Cutter 

Actuator / 

Sensor 

PAPCLS03 

PAPCLS04 

PAPCLS06 

PAPCLS08 

PAPCCN02 

PAPCMO02 

Description 

Paper detection at cutter (left) 

Splice detection (left) 

Detection left cutter in paper 

movable position 

Detection left cutter in home 

position 

Detection of the right cutter unit 

Left cutter motor 

PAPC_L 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-17

Printer 


PAPC_R 

RH Cutter 

Actuator / 

Sensor 

PAPCLS01 

PAPCLS02 

PAPCLS05 

PAPCLS07 

PAPCCN01 

PAPCMO01 

PAVCCN01 

PAVCLS02 

PAVCLS03 

Description 

Paper detection at cutter (right) 

Splice detection (right) 

Detection right cutter in paper 

movable position 

Detection right cutter in home 

position 

Detection of the right cutter unit 

Right cutter motor 

The mechanism detection of the 

New roll diameter measurement 

Paper detection of table (right) 

Paper detection of the table (left) 

9.6.2.2 Troubleshooting TU 

1 

Replacement of the Cutter Unit 

Slacken the three screws and remove the 

cover plate (3) 

Remove the connecting piece between the 

drive motor and the cutter 

Open the two screws (2) 

Undo the cable connections 

Pull out the cutter unit in horizontal 

direction 

2 

3002_106 

9-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 

Replacement of the Sheet Gear 

Slacken the four screws (1) 

Undo the cable connections 

Lift off the sheet gear 

1 

2 

3002_077 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-19

Printer 


9.6.2.3 Adjustment of paper transport and cut length 

MC data default Adjustment of Paper magazine 

PARCUTP+00 first print length right 

PARCUTS2500 short print length right 

PARCUTZ2500 long print length right 

PAVCACR+00 exposure position right 

PALCUTP+00 first print length left 

PALCUTS2500 short print length left 

PALCUTZ2500 long print length left 

PAVCACL+00 exposure position left 

All MC data should be set to default (see 

table) 

plength 

Make sample prints: 

3 prints with length 130 mm, print first 

after rewinding paper to the magazine 

3 prints with length 305 mm, print first 

after rewinding paper to the magazine 

Enumerate the prints: 

1-3 left magazine, 1-3 right magazine 

Each print should have a center mark: 

Write down the print's lengh and center 

distance 

Calculate MC data (see table below) for 

right side: 

PARCUTP 

Length of 1 st print will increase 0.25 mm, by adding 1 to PARCUTP. 

((130L 2 nd + 130L 3 rd ) /2 – 130L 1 st ) / 0.25 

((305L 2 nd + 130L 3 rd ) /2 – 305L 1 st ) / 0.25 

Check 130 mm and 305 mm prints 

Example: 

130 length: 

1 st print = 129 mm 

2 nd print = 132 mm 

3 rd print = 133 mm 

((2 nd print 132 + 3 rd print 133 ) /2 – 1 st print 129 ) / 0,25 = (132,5 – 129) / 0,25 = 3,5 / 0,25 = 14 

PARCUTP = 14 (also possible a –xx result!!) 

PARCUTS (130L 2 nd + 130L 3 rd ) /2 / 520 

result * 10000 = MC data 

Check 130 mm prints 

PARCUTZ (305L 2 nd + 305L 3 rd ) /2 / 1220 


Check 305 mm prints 

PAVCACR 

Center position of the print will move 0.25 mm to the right, by adding 1 to PAVCACR. 

(((130C 2 nd +130c 3 rd ) /2 - 75 ) + ((305C 2 nd +305c 3 rd )/2 – 152.5 )) / 2 / 0.25 


Check 130 mm and 305 mm prints 

9-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 

9.6.3 Auxiliary Paper Drive 

9.6.3.1 Actuators / Sensors 

Note: 



Actuators / 

Sensors 

PAPALS01 

PAPAMG01 

PAPAMO01 

Description 

Paper detection between exp. 

table and LD 

Paper direction switch between 

transport from magazin and into 

lane distributor 

Paper transport from exp. table to 

LD 

PAPA 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-21

Printer 


9.6.4 Exposure Unit 

9.6.4.1 Exposure table 55A-0102 

Designation Requirement Testing Tools Explanation 

Force for transport 

belt tensioner 

Press in each belt tensioner by the bar 

tension to measure the force 

Required to move the tensioner: 

800g +150g/0 

Bar tension 

Load torque at 

driving the 

transport belt 

Measure the load torque on the pully A 

axis (without motor) with right and left 

sub-advance roller pressed each other. 

Max. 4 kg/cm or less 

Torque gauge 

Pully A 

Without Motor 

Belt tension for 

transport motor 

driving motor 

Measure force when the center 

between pulleys is pressed down by 

6 mm. 

800 g ± 80 g 

Bar tension 

3mm 

9.6.4.2 LED Exposure Unit 

Abbr. 

LR 

LG 

LB 

PD 

MZ 

Description 

LED Red 

LED Green 

LED Blue 

Photo diode 

Microstepper/Zoom Controller 

EC 

9-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 

9.6.4.3 Troubleshooting 


electronic) and fold it down 

Pull out the print engine 

Remove the paper dust with a brush or a 

vacuum cleaner 

Lubricate the bearing points of the rocker 

(Klueberplex) 

Transport belts of the exposure table: 

Clean with a damp cloth 

Inspect that the belt runs smoothly 

Clean the light sensors 

3003_031 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-23

Printer 


9.6.5 Lane Distributor LD 

The prints are turned acc. to the size and distributed to two lanes, then the back print is 

printed on the prints in the lane distributor. This is done to increase the capacity. 

Sorter dependent print shift: 

– In machine versions with single tray sorter and 6-inch sorter, print 1 is shifted towards 

the rear of the machine. 

– In machine versions with 8-inch sorter, print 1 is shifted towards the front of the 

machine, which causes a change of the clutch position. 


Note: 



9-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 

PALD_1 

Actuators / 

Sensors 

PALDLS01 

PALDLS02 

PALDLS03 

PALDLS04 

PALDLS05 

PALDLS06 

PALDLS07 

PALDLS08 

PALDLS09 

PALDLS10 

PALDMC01 

PALDMO01 

PALDMO02 

PALDMO03 

PALDMO04 

PALDMO05 

PALDMO06 

PALDMO07 

PALDMO08 

Description 

Paper detection before back print 

Home position of paper pad (for 

rotation) 

Paper width check for distribution 

Paper detection before 

distributing 

Home position of lane distributor 

Paper detection after distributing 

(front side, lower) 


(rear side, lower) 


(front side, upper) 


(rear side, upper) 

Detection of the control strip 

magazine 

Clutch for parallel transport 

Note: Different position of clutch 

in versions with 8-inch sorter. 

Paper transport in the LD entrance 

area 

Pad movement for paper rotation 

Paper rotation motor 

Lane distributing motor 

Paper transport in the lane 

distributor area 

Paper transport in the LD exit area 

Roller nip/release motor for 

rotation 

Paper transport from LD to 

processor 

PALD_2 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-25

Printer 


9.6.5.2 Troubleshooting LD 

1 

The LD can be pulled out to work on it. To 

operate it in this position: 

the supporting plate of the sockets (1) 

must be undone and 

the cable must be unfolded (4 screws, 

cable clamp). 

The LD can then be connected again 

outside the d-lab.1. 

3002_079 

1 

3002_82 

9-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 

9.6.6 Back Printer 


Note: 



Actuators / 

Sensors 

PABPMO01 

PABPPH01 

Description 

Back printer ink ribbon drive 

Back printer head 

PABP 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-27

Printer 


9.6.6.2 Back Printer Adjustment 

Loosen screws (1) 

3002_101 

Move carrier (1) aside 

3002_102 

Insert 0.7 mm gauge (1) 

3002_103 

9-28 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Printer 

Push head base (1) and tighten screw (2) 

3002_104 

Tighten 4 screws (1) 

3002_101 

Insert a ribbon cassette (1) 

3002_105 

Insert 0.6 mm gauge (1): 

The 0.6 mmgauge passes. 

Insert 0.7 mm gauge (1): 

The 07. mm gauge stopps. 

If the 0.6 mm stops or the 0.7 mm gauge 

passes: repeat the adjustment. 

3002_103 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 9-29

Printer 


9.6.7 Shutter 

9.6.7.1 Actuator 

Note: 

The service script Actuator_Control_PA.txt can be used to check the actuator. 

Actuator 

PASLMG01 

Description 

Shutter solenoid 

PASL 

■ 

9-30 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



10 Paper Processor 

10.1 Functional description 

After the prints passed the lane distributor, they run through the developer (CD), the 

bleach-fixing (BX) and the stabiliser (SB) and then through the dryer. 

From the dryer the prints are transported into the Sorter where they are sorted by orders 

and put on the sorter belt. 

The densitometer mounted above the dryer is used for the automatic measurement of the 

test prints. 

10.2 Assembly Groups in the Paper Processor 


ppro 

10.2.2 Designations and shortcuts 

Assembly group Shortcut Assembly group Shortcut 

Temperature Control Tank PPCT Power Supply Unit PPPS 

Docking Station PPDS Replenishment Mixer Drive PPMD 

Dryer Heater PPDH Replenisher Dilution PPRI 

Dryer PPDR Replenishment Pump PPRP 

Effluent Tank PPET Replenisher Tank PPRT 

Lane Shifter PPLS Replenishment Water PPRW 

Main Frame PPMF Sorter PPSO 

Processor Drive PPPD Tank PPTK 

Paper Outlet 

PPPO 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-1



10.3 Actuators and Sensors in the Paper Processor 

Note: 

See also Actuators and Sensors Overview and Tube diagram at the end of this 

chapter (pages A3) 

3002_053 

10-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto




Example: PPRTMO01 


1 and 2 PP for Paper Processor 





Function Shortcut Function Shortcut 

Fan FA Light Sensor LS 

Float Sensor FS Magnet / Solenoid MG 

Temperature Fuse FU Microswitch MS 

Heater HT Motor MO 

Heat Sensor HS Switch SW 

Lamp / LED LA Thermostat TH 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-3




Assembly Group Name Category Function Movement 

(Device State) 

Processor drive PPPDMO01 Actuator Main drive ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

Main Frame PPMFMS01 Sensor Processor Door ON: close 

OFF: open 

Tanks 

Pump 

Effluent tanks 

PPTKMS01 Sensor Processor cover switch ONN: detects 


PPTKFS01 Sensor CD: Level detection 

temperature control tank 

PPTKFS02 Sensor BF: Level detection 


PPTKFS03 Sensor SB1: Level detection 








ONN: needs water 

OFF: normal 


OFF: normal 


OFF: normal 


OFF: normal 


OFF: normal 


OFF: normal 

PPTKFA01 Actuator CD: Cooling fan ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PPTKFA02 Actuator BF: Cooling fan ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PPTKFA03 Actuator SB: Cooling fan ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PPPPMO01 

to 

PPPPMO06 

Actuator Chemical circulation pumps ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PPETFS01 Sensor CD. Level detection effluent 

tank 

PPETFS02 Sensor BF: Level detection effluent 

tank 

PPETFS03 Sensor SB: Level detection effluent 

tank 

ONN: full 

OFF: not full 

ONN: full 

OFF: not full 

ONN: full 

OFF: not full 

1 2 3 

no 

no 

1 Versions with Filmprocessor 

2 Versions without Film Processor and with Docking 

3 Versions without Film Processor and without Docking 

d-lab.1 plus / d-lab.1s plus/ netlab.1 plus to be defined. 

10-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Assembly Group Name Category Function Movement 


Replenishment 

tanks 

Replenishment 

pump 

Replenishment 

water tanks 

PPRTFS01 Sensor CD: Low level detection 

replenisher tank 

PPRTFS02 Sensor BF: Low level detection 


PPRTFS03 Sensor SB: Low level detection 


PPRTFS04 Sensor CD: High level detection 


PPRTFS05 Sensor BF: High level detection 


PPRTFS06 Sensor SB: High level detection 


PPRTFS07 Sensor CD: Overflow Level 

detection replenisher tank 

PPRTFS08 Sensor BF: Overflow Level detection 


PPRTFS09 Sensor SB: Overflow Level detection 


PPRTLS01 Sensor Replenishment Mixing 

sensor 

ONN: empty 


ONN: empty 


ONN: empty 


ONN: full 

OFF: not full 

ONN: full 

OFF: not full 

ONN: full 

OFF: not full 

ONN: overflow level 

OFF: normal 


OFF: normal 


OFF: normal 

PPRTMO01 Actuator Replenishment mixing drive ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PPRPMO01 Actuator CD: Replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PPRPMO02 Actuator BF: Replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PPRPMO03 Actuator SB: Replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PPRWFS01 Sensor Low level detection water 

replenishment 

PPRWFS03 Sensor Hi level detection water 

replenishment 

PPRWMO01 Actuator 



ONN: detects 


ONN: empty 


ONN: full 

OFF: not full 

CD: Water replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

BF: Water replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

SB: Water replenishing pump ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

1 2 3 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 





AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-5



Assembly Group Name Category Function Movement (Device State) 1 2 3 

Temperature 

control tanks 

PPCTHS01 Sensor CD: Temperature sensor Temp. 

PPCTHS02 Sensor BF: Temperature sensor Temp. 

PPCTHS03 Sensor SB: Temp. sensor Temp. 

PPCTHT01 heater CD: Heater element ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PPCTHT02 heater BF: Heater element ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PPCTHT03 heater SB: Heater element ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PPCTHT04 heater SB: Heater element ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

Dryer heater PPDHMS01 Sensor Dryer cover switch ONN: detects 


PPDHAL01 Sensor Monitoring of PPDHFA01 ONN: during FAN rotation 

OFF: FAN off 

PPDHHT01 heater Dryer Heater 1 ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 


OFF: OFF 


OFF: OFF 

PPDHFA01 Actuator Dryer fan ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

Dryer rack PPDRHS01 Sensor Temp. sensor for Dryer Temp. 

Docking system PPDSMS01 Sensor Card box door cover switch ONN: detects 


PPDSMS02 Sensor Card box door cover lock 

switch 

PPDSLS01 Sensor Docking cutter home 

sensor 

PPDSLS02 Sensor Docking cutter position 

sensor 

ONN: locked 

OFF: unlocked 

ONN: detects 


ONN: detects 


PPDSLS03 Sensor Detection card box bottle ONN: detects 


PPDSLA01 LED LED indication Docking 

system 

ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

PPDSMG01 Actuator Interlock of card box door ONN: locked 

OFF: unlocked 

PPDSMO01 Actuator Docking cutter drive motor 

NX next cut position / 

HP home position 

ONPXX: forward 

ONMXX: reverse XX 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 





10-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Assembly 

Group 

Water 

pump 

Print outlet 

Densitometer 

Lane shifter 



PPWPMG01 Actuator CD: Replenishment tank add 

Water Valve 

PPWPMG02 Actuator BF: Replenishment tank add 

Water Valve 

PPWPMG03 Actuator SB: Replenishment tank add 

Water Valve 

ONNxxx: xx.x sec ON 

(004



Assembly 

Group 

Sorter 



PPSOLS01 Sensor Shifter flap home position ONN: detects 


PPSOLS02 Sensor Sort button 

always turned ON (in case of 

single tray sorter) 

ONN: detects 


PPSOLS03 Sensor Stop Plate home position ONN: detects 


PPSOLS04 Sensor Sorter home position ONN: detects 


PPSOMO01 Actuator Flap drive motor 

(original versions: 


d-lab.1s basic 1 and 2) 

UPP: flap up 

DWN: flap down 

1 2 3 

PPSOMO01 Actuator Sorter (8-Inch Sorter) UPP: flap up 

no no 

DWN: flap down 

PPSOMO02 Actuator Sorter drive ONN: ON no no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

PPSOMO03 Actuator Stop Plate drive motor UPP: Stop plate up 

DWN: Stop plate down 

no 

no 

Option 

PPOPLS01 Sensor Detection of water valve 

option 

ONN: with option 

OFF: without option 

no 

PPOPMG01 Actuator Water valve ONN: ON 

OFF: OFF 

no 

1 d-lab.1 allrounder 1 and 2 / d-lab.1s basic 1 and 2 

2 netlab.1 allrounder 

3 d-lab.1 starter / d-lab.1s starter oc / d-lab.1 starter / netlab.1 starter oc 


10-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



10.4 Components of the Paper Processor 

10.4.1 Switches 

3003_006 

1 3-pole main switch 

2 Earth leakage circuit breaker 

10.4.2 Main Drive 

10.4.2.1 Checking the main drive 

Check the drive motor fastening screws 

Check the axial backlash of the individual 

worm gears on the drive shaft: 

The driver pins must still be reliably in the 

groove of the worm gear at a maximum 

backlash. 

Check the tight seating of the sprocket gears 

on the motor shaft and the drive shaft. 

Check the toothed belt tension, if required 

tighten the tension by means of the motor 

bracket. 

pppd 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-9



10.4.2.2 Replacing the main Drive Motor 

The main drive motor is located in the rear part of the Paper Processor. 

Dismount the rear cover 

Unscrew 4 screws (1) 

Remove the motor towards the bottom 

1 1 

3002_023 

10.4.3 Gear for Frequency Adjustment 

10.4.3.1 Replacing the Gear 50 / 60 Hz 

Replace a worn part: 




3002_009 

10-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



10.4.4 Processing Racks 

10.4.4.1 Replace worn parts 

Clean the racks and check them for smooth 

movement 

CAUTION! 

The upper rack rollers should only be 

rinsed. Cleaning them with a brush or in 

another mechanical way will lead to 

deposits on prints. In this case run expired 

paper in order to clean up (approx. 

20 prints) or replace the rollers. 

Check the gears, roller, shafts, slide bearings 




necessary: see Table 

3002_011 

No. Wearing part in the Kit Part no. ABC Code 

1 Sprocket gear 2 pcs. CL+P3-86703 82NGW 

Bevel gear 1 pcs. CL+P3-86701 9HDEL 

2 Gear 2 pcs. CL+P4-86748 9HDHR 

Stop ring 20 pcs. CL+P4-86753 9XYDL 

Inner pin 2 pcs. CL+P4-95549 1J2HW 

Gear 2 pcs. CL+P4-86656 9ELTK 

3 Spring (Coil) 2 pcs. CL+P4-E5354 — 

4 Pin 2 pcs. CL+P4-86665 9HDGP 

5 Support 2 pcs. CL+P4A-E9698 UAM7P 

Bevel gear 1 pcs. CL+P3-86740 82NOC 

6 Bevel gear 1 pcs. CL+P4-86738 82NQG 

7 Sleeve 2 pcs. CL+P4-86757 92753 

Sleeve 16 pcs. CL+P4-E5403 Q6VSA 

Squeeze roller 4 pcs. CL+P3-E6344 TJNCJ 

Squeeze roller 4 pcs. CL+P3-E5394 TFNWX 

8 Bevel gear 2 pcs. CL+P4-86702 9B5XD 

Shaft holder 2 pcs. CL+P4-39286 YDVL6 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-11



10.4.5 Rack drive and torque limiter 


Rack drive: 

Dismount the bevel gear with the 

coupling to the torque limiter 

Lubricate the running surfaces of the 

torque coupling (L1) and the sleeves of 

the hub part (L1) with Klüberplex 

Torque of the racks after reassembly: 

CD and BX rack < 15 Ncm 

SB1 to SB3 rack < 10 Ncm 

Torque limitation 100-150 Ncm 

10-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



10.4.6 Replenisher tanks 


1 2 

Unscrew the bracket (1) and pull out the 

tanks (2) 

3002_028 

1 

4 

2 

Note: 

The CD replenisher tank contains antioxidation 

floaters. 

3002_029 

3 

Clean the replenisher tanks (1) and rinse 

them, check for possible leaks at the seams 

(especially near the handle) 

Check the lids (3) of the mixer paddles for 

tight seating 

Check whether the drivers (4) of the mixer 

paddles turn easily. 

If required, lubricate the collar bearings of 

the mixer paddle axle a little. 

Check the float sensors (2) for Empty, Full 

and Overflow (mounted in the tank lid): 

The floaters of the switches must move 

easily in vertical direction, if necessary 

replace the switches. 

Put the tanks back and check the tank lid 

lockings 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-13



10.4.7 Effluent tanks 

10.4.7.1 Checking parts 

Rinse the effluent tanks (1) with water and 

check them for leaks 

Check that the float sensors (2) move easily 

in vertical direction 

2 

1 

3002_030 

Newer Versions: 

– The three effluent tanks are replaced by one 

bigger effluent tank 

– Only one sensor controls the high level of the 

effluent tank 

– The effluent tubes (2) are no longer mounted 

and fixed to the tank 

3002_171 

10-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



10.4.8 Water Replenishment Tank 

The water replenishment tank supplies the Film Processor a n d the Paper Processor with 

water. It is housed in the Paper Processor. 

Note: 

d-lab.1 oc versions (without docking) do not have a water replenishment tank. 

Example: 

See the following figure: d-lab.1 starter oc without docking stations and without water 

replenishment tank. 

3002_174 

10.4.8.1 Functional description 

The water replenishment tank consists of two parts and holds 24 l of water. When the 

tank is filled, the water runs first into the top tank and then into the bottom tank until the 

tanks are full. Make sure that the empty detection is in the bottom tank and the full 

detection is in the top tank. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-15



10.4.9 Docking Station 

Note: 

d-lab.1 oc versions (without docking) do not have a docking station 


There is a sensor that detects if a full card box is set. The refilling procedure only starts 

when a full card box is set. 

When the first replenisher tank is empty, the replenishing stops and the refilling 

procedure starts automatically. 

The processing of paper goes on up to 3 m² of paper throughput maximum (count from 

replenishing stop). If the refilling procedure is not completed before 3 m² passed the 

processor, the paper throughput stops. 

It is unlikely that all replenisher tanks are empty at the same time. If one replenisher tank 

is empty the remaining amount in the other replenisher tanks will be pumped into the 

processor tanks. If the remaining amount is to much it is likely that there is a mechanical 

error in the machine and a according message occurs. 

All replenisher pumps are calibrated automatically after each refilling procedure if 

necessary. 

The whole docking procedure (without water tank filling and card box exchange) takes 

less than 15 minutes. 

10-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto




Note: 

The service scripts Actuator_Control_PP.txt and Sensor_Control_PP.txt can be used 


Actuator 

PPDSMG01 

PPDSMO01 

Description 

Interlock of card box door 

Docking cutter drive motor 

NX next cut position / HP home 

position 

PPDS 

Sensor 

PPDSMS01 

PPDSMS02 

PPDSLS01 

PPDSLS02 

PPDSLS03 

PPDSLA01 

Description 

Card box door cover switch 

Card box door cover lock switch 

Docking cutter home sensor 

Docking cutter position sensor 

Detection card box bottle 

LED indication Docking system 

PPDS_2 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-17



Versions with Docking 

Versions without Docking 

PPDS 

3002_179 

Note: 

PPDSMS01 and PPDSMS02 changed to micro 

switches 

Removal of the black cover: 

Remove the screw (1) 

Remove the black cover 

3002_180 

10-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



d-lab.1 oc versions (without Docking) have 

sensors (1) to check if the lids of the 

replenishment tanks are closed 

3002_177 

3002_178 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-19



10.4.9.3 Flow charts 

3002_118 

10-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



3002_119 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-21



3002_120 

10-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



3002_121 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-23



3002_122 

10-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



10.4.9.4 Timing 

3002_096 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-25





Take out the easy paper boxes. 




thoroughly. 



hoses: 


For the replenisher tanks 

3002_034 


Unscrew: 





3002_149 

10-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto







Note: 


3002_145 

3002_140 


Pipe (1) for BX A/B (2 x) 


Color red 



Pipe (2) for CD, SB (2 x) 


Color black 



O-ring for pipe CD, SB 






3002_147 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-27





position 

3002_132 


Remove the drip tray (1) and clean it 

3002_136 

CAUTION! 




opener. 



3002_137 

10-28 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto









3002_134 











CAUTION! 



cannot move back to their home position 

after the docking sequence. 








into place 


3002_135 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-29



10.4.10 Dryer 


The prints are dried in the dryer within 63 sec. by a heater with a radial fan. 

– The dryer heater can be checked with the 

Service Script Actuator_Control_PP.txt. 

– The cover switch DHMS01 switches off the 

voltage. 

ppdh 

10.4.10.2 Temperature sensors dryer 

– The temperature sensor can be checked with 

the Service Script Sensor_Control_PP.txt. 

ppdr 

10-30 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



10.4.11 Paper Exit 


– Transport bridge between the dryer and the 

Lane Shifter. It holds the densitometer for the 

PBL / MBL measurement. 

– The drive can be checked with the Service 

Script Actuator_Control_PP.txt. 

3002_095 

– Paper Exit for single tray sorter 

– MDV Board (1) CL+P5A-F5602 for sorter 

control 

– CN 9 on MDV Board must have a bridge 

between PIN 7 and 8, this codes the simple 

sorter for d-lab.1 

– This paper exit is identical to the on for the 

6-Inch sorter (belt tray sorter) 

3002_181 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-31



– Densitometer control PCB (1) 

– Densitometer measuring head (2) 

3002_182 

– Paper Exit for 8-Inch sorter 

– MDV Board (1) CL+P5A-F3682 (6-Inch and 

8-Inch sorter) for sorter control 

– For the 8-Inch sorter the following connectors 

are used: 

CN 1 

CN 2 

CN 3 

CN 4 

CN 5 

CN 7 

CN 8 

CN 9 

3002_166 

– Connectors (1) for PPPOLS01 and PPPOLS02 

Open the screws (2) to replace PPPOLS01 or 

PPPOLS02 PCB 

– Densitometer measuring head (3) 

3002_167 

10-32 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



– Open the screws (1) to clean the Densitometer 

reference plate 

3002_195 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-33



10.4.12 Densitometer 

The integrated densitometer allows an automatic Setup routine for MBL and PBL. The 

routine is repeated upon Auto-Setup until the values of the test print are in tolerance with 

the aim densities. 

Note: 

As the measuring head and the computer board are matched, they must only be 

replaced together. 

The measuring values are compatible with those of DENS 1. Prerequisite is that the 

calibration has been performed with the same reference plates. 


1. Each measurement is preceded by a zeroing in Y, M, C. For this, the measuring head is 

pressed on the reference plate. 

2. The actual measurement is started by the front edge of the test print. The measuring 

head is pressed on the test print and the LED illumination is switched on after 0.6 sec. 

White paper preceding the test print is expected. If this pattern is not seen within 

15 sec. an error message is displayed: ERRDENS002. An error message will also 

appear if the LED illumination fails. 

3. The measuring phase begins as soon as the first black pattern has been recognised 

correctly: 

A measurement takes place for Y, M, C in cycles of 20 ms until the end of the 

measuring field has been reached. The average value of each colour and measuring 

field is calculated. In case of too many measuring values exceeding the tolerance 

limits, the measuring procedure will be terminated by ERRDENS094. 

Possible reasons: 

– inhomogeneity of measuring field density 

– paper transportation speed too slow: paper slippage due to too little roller 

pressure or too little belt tension 

– paper transportation too fast due to damaged gear 

4. At the end of the measurement, the LED illumination is switched off and the 

measuring head is lifted. 

10.4.12.2 Technical Data 

Power supply: 

– Supply voltage: 5.2 +1.6 V / -0.3 V , 250 mA, peak 400 mA 

– Signal voltage: Paper Top, White Calibration 

– Active condition: 0.0 to +0.4 V 

– Standby: +3.0 to +5.5 V 

10-34 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



10.4.12.3 Climatic conditions 

min. 

max. 

Temperature 20 °C 60 °C 

Relative humidity 15% 

Stand by 85% at 35 °C 

90% at 30 °C 

Operation 30% at 60 °C 

10.4.12.4 Measuring characteristics 

Measuring range: 

– Reflection D 0,00 - D 2,55 (minus the basic density) 

– Measuring accuracy under the specific climatic conditions 

Linearity, reproducibility: 

– up to density 1,30: ± D 0,01 

– up to density 2,00: ± D 0,02 

– up to density 2,55: ± D 0,03 

Note: 

The resulting testprints are subject to these tolerances. 

Do not exchange the densitometer, because this will not alter the results. 

10.4.12.5 Zeroing 

Automatic (Y, M, C) prior to each measurement 

10.4.12.6 Data rate (RS 232 Connection) 

8 bit, no parity, 2 stop bits 

for Printer operation factory setting 

for PC (Test operation) 

during Flash programming 

1,200 Baud (JP1 and JP2 not set) 

9,600 Baud (JP1 or/and JP2 short-circuited) 

19,200 Baud (JP1 and JP2 and BR3 open (Printer operation) 

10.4.12.7 Interfaces 

Connector 3 on densitometer board (data interface acc. to RS 232) 

Type: Sub-D 9 poles 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-35



10.4.12.8 Jumper positions 

Jumper position Mode Baudrate 

Normal 1200 

Normal 

In this position the Jumpers have no influence on the 

function of the densitometer. 

1200 

Note 

Do not select: 

The densitometer may be damaged. 

Is only used during the assembly. 

Test mode B 9600 

Test mode C: 

Continuous density measurement in yellow for 15 s at 

intervals of 20 ms 

9600 

10.4.12.9 Measurement 

As soon as LS1PPO/LS2PPO see the test print the measuring head is pressed down and 

the measurement starts. First of all, the measuring head must be set on white paper. The 

dimensions for the measuring fields are indicated in the drawing (see below). 

10.4.12.10 MBL, PBL Test print 

Contact colour: white 

Set point of densitometer head: must be set on white paper before the first black 

measuring pattern. 

Measuring fields: length 15 mm each 

3002_151 

All measuring fields are 15 mm long. 

10-36 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



10.4.12.11 Block circuit diagram of the 5.5 V power supply 

3002_098 

10.4.12.12 7-Segment display 

Possible controls by means of the 7-Segment Display: 

"≡" Waiting status (ready for measurement) 

Zeroing: 

"A" Measuring phase zeroing 

"d" Computing phase zeroing 

"-" Wait until the measuring head is lifted 

For grey wedge measurement 

" " Beginning of grey wedge measurement (Segments a+b) 

"1.....C" Recognised field number 

"-" Wait until PAPERTOP is inactive 

For Flash programming 

„[“ FLASH programming mode (Segments a+f+g) 

„°“ Received code not recognised (Segments a+b+f+g) 

„p“ During programming phase (Segments a+b+e+f+g) 

„o“ Invalid address (Segments c+d+e+g) 

„u“ FLASH range protected (Segments c+d+e) 

‏“כ„‏ 

Conflict protected deletion request c+d+g) (Segments AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-37



10.4.12.13 Data output for MBL and PBL test print 

After successful measurement of the test print the result of the measurement will be sent 

from the densitometer to the main software in the following format: 

Cxxx Mxxx Yxxx 

Cxxx Density value Cyan (3-digits) 

Mxxx Density value Magenta (3-digits) 

Yxxx Density value Yellow (3-digits) 

In case an error occurs: 

ERROR x will be send 

10.4.12.14 Densitometer Error Messages 


ERPPDENS0001 

5515512 

PP: Unknown densitometer error An unknown error has occurred. 


ERPPDENS0002 

5515513 

PP: Densitometer communication error The densitometer does not respond 20 seconds after the 

inquiry has started. 

Switch the machine OFF and start it again. 


Check the densitometer wiring, replace the densitometer if 

necessary. 

ERPPDENS0003 PP: Densitometer light source defective At least one measurement of the white reference calibration 

5515514 

differs too much from the tolerances. Check the shutter 

mechanism of the densitometer calibration plate. 


Clean the recalibration plate, check the pressure mechanism, 

the adjustment of the densitometer head (parallelism and 

slight projection of the densitometer beyond the paper guide 

plate), replace the densitometer if necessary. 

ERPPDENS0004 PP: Densitometer measurement stopped The measured actual value of the calibration plate (white 

5515515 

reference) is smaller than the minimum value after the 

calibration of the densitometer in the factory. 


Replace the densitometer. 

ERPPDENS0005 

5515604 

PP: Clean the measuring plate, repeat the 

MBL 

The measuring plate (pressure plate) of the densitometer is 

too dirty and needs cleaning. 

ERPPDENS0006 

5515516 

PP: Densitometer cannot find the 

beginning of the measuring field 

Border between White and the measuring field not 

recognized, measurement stopped. 




ERPPDENS0007 

5515517 

PP: Densitometer sees a black measuring 

field for too long 

The measurement is stopped. 




10-38 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto




ERPPDENS0008 

5515518 

PP: Densitometer has detected scattered 

light on the measuring field 

White measurement too short, measurement stopped. 




ERPPDENS0009 PP: Densitometer cannot use the speed Service engineer: 

5515519 data from the PA 

Check the connections and the cables, reset the Paper 

Processor 

ERPPDENS0020 PP: Reserved for process control No reference values of the densitometer available. 

5515520 

ERPPDENS0021 PP: Reserved for process control No white reference values of the densitometer available. 

5515521 

ERPPDENS0022 PP: Densitometer does not find enough The densitometer does not see enough valid values in a 

5515522 valid values 

measuring field. The end of the measuring field is seen too 

early due to dirt or scattered light, or the transport speed is 

out of tolerance. 




ERPPDENS0023 PP: Densitometer cannot calculate a PP: Densitometer cannot calculate a mean value 

5515523 

mean value 

ERPPDENS0027 

5515524 

PP: Reserved for process control PP: Reserved for process control 

Densitometer measuring field missing 

ERPPDENS0030 PP: Tolerance of densitometer reference — 

5515525 values too large 

ERPPDENS0031 PP: Densitometer measuring error - paper Acc. to the paper measurement, the white of the paper is 

5515526 

in front of measuring field not white much darker than that on the calibration plate. Measurement 

stopped. another measurement is performed automatically. 

If the next measurement is faulty as well, the paper 

calibration is stopped, Check the paper for scattered light or 

damage, repeat the procedure. 



ERPPDENS0032 

5515527 

PP: Densitometer finds less than 5 

measuring values 

Clean the calibration plate 


Check the position of the measuring head in the machine 

ERPPDENS0033 PP: Densitometer cannot calculate a — 

5515528 mean value 

ERPPDENS0037 

5515529 

PP: Densitometer does not see the black 

measuring field 

The densitometer has not seen the border between white and 

black. Measurement stopped. 


Check the measuring field and the transport speed 

ERPPDENS0040 

5515530 

PP: Internal densitometer Timeout - 

check Firmware 


Check the wiring and the densitometer Firmware 

ERPPDENS0090 

5515531 

PP: Measuring error/ internal assessment 

error in the densitometer 

Check the paper for dirt, clean the densitometer with 

compressed air. 

ERPPDENS0091 

5515584 

PP: Densitometer memory overflow Service engineer: 


AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-39




ERPPDENS0092 

5515585 

ERPPDENS0093 

5515586 

ERPPDENS0094 

5515587 

ERPPDENS0096 

5515589 

ERPPDENS0097 

5515590 

ERPPDENS0098 

5515591 

ERPPDENS0099 

5515592 

PP: Densitometer memory overflow when 

finding the measuring values 

PP: Densitometer cannot find valid values 

PP: Densitometer cannot find enough 

valid values 

PP: Densitometer has detected 

communication failures with PA 

PP: Densitometer has detected 

communication failures with PA 

PP: Densitometer has detected an 

unauthorized mode 

PP: Undefined densitometer error 

The densitometer has found more than 10.000 values in a 

field. Measurement stopped. 







The densitometer cannot find enough valid values in a 

measuring field. The end of the measuring field has been 

detected too early due to contamination or scattered light, or 

the transport speed is out of tolerance. 










The densitometer has detected communication failures with 

the PA. No admissible mode (exposure control, process 

control or grey wedge measurement) occurred. 





Reset the Paper Processor, replace the densitometer. 

10-40 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



10.4.12.15 Generally valid Error Codes (independent of the machine or process) 

ERPPDENS0002 

5515513 

ERPPDENS0003 

5515514 

ERPPDENS0005 

5515604 

ERPPDENS0009 

5515519 

ERPPDENS0040 

5515530 

ERPPDENS0091 

5515584 

ERPPDENS0092 

5515585 

ERPPDENS0093 

5515586 

ERPPDENS0094 

5515587 

ERPPDENS0096 

5515589 

ERPPDENS0097 

5515590 

ERPPDENS0098 

5515591 

ERPPDENS0099 

5515592 

During Zeroing measuring values are < NULLMIN (5ww). This can happen when the zeroing 

medium has a lighter density at the calibration procedure (ERPPDENS0002). The densitometer 

cannot communicate with RS232. 

The mean value of a measurement is larger than the maximum admissible zero value 

(NULLMAX=100h). Possible cause: LED failed or reference white very dirty, head not pressed 

down. This may happen during zeroing, exposure control, process control or grey wedge 

measurement. 

Reference plate polluted 

Error upon the receipt of the speed code (S00hh): 

wrong string length, no Hex character, missing CR 

WATCHDOG-Timeout: reset will be performed 

Processing result > 2 Byte internal 

Processing result > 10,000 (at VALUE) internal 

Cycle number= 0 (division impossible) internal 

Field edge before the minimum window time slippage, zoom set incorrectly; 

interrupt codes y, m, c, Y, M, C; send log file to Munich 

Wrong (invalid) code received via RS232 

Inadmissible HEX code received via RS232 

An unauthorised mode has occurred.: 

none of exposure control, process control or grey wedge measurement 

An undefined error has occurred 

10.4.12.16 Error Codes specified for Process Control 

ERPPDENS0021 

5515521 

ERPPDENS0022 

5515522 

ERPPDENS0027 

5515524 

No white reference values of the densitometer available (before "B"). 

No measuring values could be recorded within the lead time window (corresponds to 30 mm). 

The measuring tolerances probably too large. 

Lead density > Whitemax (before "A"). 

A density outside the white tolerance (-0.1 < D < 0.3) has occurred within the lead time window 

(corresponds to 30 mm). Additional output of the density deviation from the valid Y zero value 

(in 0.01 D). 

LD edge not before max. lead time (before "C"). 

No LD edge detection within 70 mm (D > lead density +0.3) 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-41



10.4.12.17 Error Codes specific for Grey Wedge Measurement 

Clarification 

ERPPDENS0031 

5515526 

ERPPDENS0037 

5515529 

When the density criteria are checked (black-white edges etc.), the calculation is not performed 

with the density values, but directly with the A/D converter values reduced to 8-bit resolution to 

spare processing time. These values are identified by the extension "ww". The resulting resolution 

expressed in density is about D 0,012. 

Lead density > Whitemax. 

At the moment of the lead time + LED ignition time (0.3 + 0.3 = 0.6sec) after the PAPER TOP 

signal, the Y signal is greater than the maximum white density ca. 0.5 D (e.g. paper fogged). 

The A/D converter value (Higher Byte) found last is displayed in the format: 

Yddd 

Ddd Converter value send Log file to Munich 

No black edge within the maximum lead time. The limit value is given by the eff. white density 

measured during the lead. 

10.4.12.18 Error Codes specific for FLASH Programming 

ERROR 081 

Conflict between the programming or delete desire and the PROTECT status of the FLASH-Eprom 

ERROR 084 

FLASH---Byte programming field (difference between programming and Verify) 

ERROR 085 

Unauthorised programming range (Block > F7h) triggered 

ERROR 086 

Error during the delete procedure 

10-42 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



10.4.12.19 Densitometer Types 

Various densitometer types are presently used with the d-labs, see overview below: 

Densitometer Part no. Densi Serial no. Densi 

Software 

LED densitometer 

Measuring spot 2.5x4 

Input voltage 6.8V 

as above 

with new processor 

as above 

with new sensor 

CM+7.0486.1372.0 from 41000 

729F 

to 

72B7 

CM+7.0486.1372.1 from 43000 8102 

currently 

up to 

8109 

used in d-lab 


d-lab2 

d-lab.3 

net-lab.12 

RP30; SRP30 


d-lab.2 

d-lab.2plus 

CM+7.0486.1372.1 from 45000 8109 d-lab.1 

d-lab.2 

d-lab.2plus 

Make sure that the software version of the d-lab firmware table matches the 

corresponding densitometer (Info in the SGUI under "firmware version"). 

If this is not the case download the corresponding firmware manually. 

The usual automatic firmware download during a Main-Software upgrade does not apply 

to the densitometer software. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-43



10.4.12.20 Sudden Density Change in the Print caused by the Densitometer 

Short description: 

Correction of the densitometer head position 

Content: 

Due to the present mounting position of the densitometer and the roller design in the 

outlet unit of the d-lab.1 inaccurate measuring for PBL/MBL is possible. 

In individual cases this may result in sudden color density changes in the production. The 

most critical production is the BW production (sudden density changes in homogenous 

areas). This problem will be solved in the future production. 

Machines presently in the field may be modified as explained below: 

Possibly related error symptoms: 

– In graded color density patterns (script regout_nbild.txt, see picture), the steps or 

irregular density patterns in cyan and magenta are visible. 

test exposure 

– Color trend in black-&-white pictures (see also low to medium densities). 

– Calibration data (PBL/MBL) in the log-file may also indicate wrong densitometer 

measuring values (provided the white reference surface is clean!): high minimum 

densities (higher than about 0.16) in cyan and/or magenta indicate irregular 

measuring conditions. 

Cause: 

Origin of the problem are the specific geometric conditions around the densitometer in 

the d-lab.1. Specifically the distance between the upper edge of the white reference plate 

and the next roller pair, which is quite a bit shorter than in the d-lab.1, is that cause that 

the PBL/MBL prints cannot be pressed flat down on the densitometer head during the 

measuring cycle (see illustration). This is a necessary but not a sufficient condition for the 

above error symptoms. 

3002_154 

10-44 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



The situation gets worse if the densitometer head protrudes only slightly or not at all 

above the guide plate, or is even mounted in a position slightly tilting towards the back. 

The values, as previously specified in the technical spec sheet, which said that the 

densitometer must be 0.1 – 0.5 mm in front of the guide plate, are not sufficient to 

guarantee for correct measuring. In future there will be a modification for the d-lab.1 

family: Installation position 0.3 – 0.5 mm; the densitometer must not be tilted towards 

the back. 

The current situation is shown in the following illustration: 

3002_153 

1 paper is caught tightly at this point 

2 because of paper stiffness and above roller position the pressue plate is tilted a little 

3 paper is not flat on densitometer head which will result in erroneous measurement ! 

4 paper 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-45



Troubleshooting: 

To provide for correct measuring conditions, the densitometer guide plate including the 

densitometer head is moved to the right by 1 mm (towards the paper channel). 

As a temporary solution this can be made with washers used as spacers. 

For retrofitting the d-lab.1 in the field a Spacer (part no. P4-F4960) must be inserted. 

Move the densitometer guide plate 

including the densitometer head to the right 

by 1 mm (towards the paper channel). 

Insert the spacer (1) right and left between 

the densitometer guide plate and the frame. 

Furthermore adjust the densitometer head to 

0.5 mm, if possible. 

3002_152 

1 Spacer (washer) under the densitometer guide plate 

Tests were made to ensure that no scratches occur on the prints, and the above 

conditions guarantee for scratch-free prints. 

10-46 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



10.4.12.21 Densi Error Messages when measuring the Test Print 


Densi error messages when measuring the test print 

Content: 

Inf densitometer error messages appear while the test print is measured, then this is in 

most cases caused by the outlet unit of the d-lab.1. 

The following points have to be checked: 

Ist the densitometer measuring head pressed 

correctly on the passing paper during the 

measurement? 

The pressure mechanism must be 

checked for smooth movement. 

It often helps already to slacken the 

screws of the mechanism and change 

the position so that the mechanism can 

move freely. 

If required, a commercial type grease 

may be used to lubricate it. 

Are the gears of the outlet unit heavily worn? 

This can be noticed by an irregular transport 

of the test print, leading to measurement 

errors or to error messages when the test 

print is measured. 

The gears have to be replaced if they 

show traces of wear. 

Is the whole mechanism of the outlet unit 

stiff? 

Caution! 

Do not use oil or any other 

commercial grease, this would 

damage the plastic gears. 

The outlet unit can be greased with 

silicon grease, otherwise the gears wear 

too quickly. 

The continuous chain and the slide 

bearings of the rubber transport rollers 

should be greased. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-47



10.4.12.22 Error: Densitometer communication time out 


ERPPDENS0002 

Content: 

Problem: Densitometer communication time out 

ERPPDENS0002 during Calibration Firmware Version ”xxxx” 

Cause: 

Static charges in the outlet unit caused by the motor. 

Solution: 

Version 1: 

Shut down machine and switch off plus 

switch off the main breaker 

Start the machine 

Version 2: 

Firmwareversion ” xxxx” 

Download of the firmware Version 

In case of error message 

ERDMDL01 Densitometer not responding 


this is not possible, therefore proceed as 

follows: 

SERVICEmenu / Commands / PO 

Paperoutlet / MG2PPO: 

set device off (the motor of the outlet 

unit is stopped) 

start the download again 

check the version 

Reboot (Shut down) 

10-48 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



10.4.13 Lane Shifter LS 


– Separate outlet for big prints in front of upper 

transportation belt (203 x 305). 

The prints are emulsion side down. 

– Prints up to a paper width of 6 inch are moved 

to the back to the Sorter 

– The drive can be checked with the Service 

Script Actuator_Control_PP.txt 

Replacing the motor: 

Remove the cover and the crossbar 

Remove the red panel part (unscrew the 

screws, push the part to the back) 

ppls 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-49



10.4.14 Sorter SO 


Single tray Sorter 

– No drive or sensors for this sorter necessary, prints are transported by the paper exit 

motor 

– The stacks of prints are transported to the tray, order 1 front and order 2 rear side of 

the tray 

6-Inch Sorter (Belt tray Sorter) 

– Prints up to a paper width of 6" are moved in the Lane Shifter to the back to the Sorter 

– The prints are on the bottom Sorter belt with the emulsion turned up 

– The sensors and loads can be checked with the Service Scripts 

Sensor_Control_PP.txt and Actuator _Control_PP.txt. 

– The stack of prints is moved to the front by one position by means of push button 

SOLS02 

– Drive and sensors in the rear Sorter area 

8-Inch Sorter (10 trays) 

– Prints are moved in the Lane Shifter and then in one of the 13 trays of the Sorter 

– The prints are on the Sorter tray with the emulsion turned up 

– The sensors and loads can be checked with the Service Scripts 

Sensor_Control_PP.txt and Actuator _Control_PP.txt. 

– Drives and sensors in the rear and left Sorter area 

10-50 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto




6-Inch Sorter (Belt tray Sorter) 

Replacing the motors or the sensors: 

Fold up the Sorter 

Unscrew the plastic cover 

Slacken the metal plate: 

The components are mounted on this 

plate. 

ppso 

ppso_1 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-51



8-Inch Sorter (10 trays) 

Replacing the motors or the sensors: 

Unlock (1) the Sorter 

Slide Sorter towards the front 

3002_197 

Unscrew (1) the relevant covers for the lane 

shifter drive motor (PPLSMO01) 

3002_185 

Unplug the power cable (1) and unscrew the 

three screws (2) 

3002_193 

10-52 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Tighten the toothed belt: 

Loosen the screws (1) 

Tighten the belt 

Fasten the screws (1) 

3002_194 

Unscrew (1) the relevant covers: 

Sorter motor (PPSOMO01) 

Sort button (PPSOLS02) and 

Sorter home position (PPSOLS04) 

See the following 6 figures 

3002_186 

3002_192 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-53



3002_190 

3002_191 

3002_189 

3002_188 

10-54 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto



Unscrew (1) the motor (2) 

3002_187 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 10-55



■ 

10-56 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family


Maintenance 

11 Maintenance 

11.1 Purpose 

Maintenance to keeps the machine in good working condition. Some of the maintenance 

jobs have to be performed by the customer himself, others are done once a year by a 


The maintenance performed by the service engineer encompasses the following jobs: 

– Cleaning the machine and the major functional parts 

– Replacing wearing parts 

– Greasing and lubricating functional parts 

Only the lubricants listed in the appendix are allowed to be used, 

see 11.4.2 Lubricants and Cleaning Agents. 

– Checking the maintenance jobs to be performed by the customer resp. performing 

them in case of need, see 11.8 Overview: Maintenance jobs to be performed by the 

customer 

11.2 Safety Prescriptions 

CAUTION! 

The maintenance jobs described in this chapter must only be performed by an 

AgfaPhoto service technician or a person authorised by AgfaPhoto. 

The safety prescriptions on all machine stickers and in chapter 1 of this folder 

must be observed by all means. 

Be sure to observe the safety precautions relating to the individual maintenance 

jobs. 

CAUTION! 

Risk of injury! 

Cleaning must be avoided or done with particular care while the drive is switched 

on. 

Risk of cutting yourself! 

Mind sharp corners or edges while working in the Printer area. 

Note: 

The maintenance jobs must be carried out while the machine is switched off. Do not 

forget to switch it off again if it has to be switched on for some time. e.g. to clean the 

processing tanks. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-1

Maintenance 


11.3 To all Service Engineers 

Your opinion about the parts in the PMV Kits is important for us to know in order to 

ensure optimum maintenance prerequisites. 

Please tick off the parts in the column Not used in the parts lists which were not 

needed for the maintenance. 

Please enter in the following table Additional parts the wearing parts which in your 

opinion should be included in the PMV Kits, giving a brief justification. 

Please send this page and the following two (parts lists) completed with the date, 

your name and your signature to: 

Address: 

Fax: 

AgfaPhoto GmbH 0049-89-62 07 72 77 

Attn. Ingo Wawarta 

Tegernseer Landstr. 161 

D-81539 München 

Sender: 

Name: .................................................................................................... 

Country: ................................................................................................ 

Departm. / Phone: ........................................................................... 

Date / Signature: .............................................................................. 

Additional parts 

Part number Assembly group * / Part name Quantity Reasons 

* FP Film Processor 

FD Film Drive 

PA Paper Advance 

PP Paper Processor 

11-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.4 Maintenance Kits (wearing Parts) 

11.4.1 Kit for Maintenance – Yearly 

Order no.: 10+9.9999.1162.1 

Part number ABC Code Bezeichnung Description Quantity not used 

Filmprozessor 

Film processor 

CL+P4-87162 89ECE Kegelrad Bevel gear 8 

CL+P3-87166 9BUZA Antriebswelle Bevel gear shaft 2 

CL+P4-87163 83GHH Bundbuchse Bush, metal 8 

CL+P4-61823 YVW3G Zahnrad Gear 1 

CL+P4-87183 9BVHD Zwischenzahnrad Idle gear 2 

CL+P4-87190 9BVKH Einlaufrolle Inlet roller 1 

CL+P4-87186 9BVJF Rolle Roller 1 

CL+P4A-87303 9B3ST Walze Roller 1 

CL+P4A-87313 9B44M Walze Roller 5 

CL+P4-49901 YOL9S Sicherungsring Stop ring 4 

CL+P4-49902 YOW3R Sicherungsring 0,7 mm Stop ring 0.7 mm 10 

CL+P4-55751 W6YZY Sicherungsring, groß Stop ring, large 5 

CL+P4-61791 YVW6N Sicherungsring, klein Stop ring, small 15 

Filmlauf 

Film drive 

L9.8506.5024.1 QZWYB Antriebsrolle Drive roller 2 

L9.8506.5015.1 QZWX8 Andruckrolle TR5 kompl. Pressure roller TR5 assy 2 

Papierprozessor 

Paper processor 

CL+P3-86701 9HDEL Kegelrad Bevel gear 2 

CL+P3-86740 82NOC Kegelrad Bevel gear 2 

CL+P4-86738 82NQG Kegelrad Bevel gear 1 

CL+P4-86702 9B5XD Kegelrad Achse oben Bevel gear (top of shaft) 2 

CL+P4-86748 9HDHR Zahnrad Gear 2 

CL+P4-86656 9ELTK Zahnrad Gear 4 

CL+P4-86731 9B5YF Zahnrad Gear 1 

CL+P4-95549 1J2HW Führungsstift Inner pin 5 

CL+P4-86665 9HDGP Stift Pin 4 

CL+P4-86778 9JL1X Stift Achsantrieb Pin (shaft drive) 5 

CL+P4-6110(2/1) TOU8E Rückschlagventil, Teflon Poppet Valve, Teflon 6 

CL+P3-97017 UL2GF Rolle B Roller B 2 

CL+P3-97018 UL2FD Rolle C Roller C 4 

CL+P3-97019 V5RRW Rolle M Roller M 2 

CL+P4-39286 YDVL6 Wellenlagerung Shaft holder 5 

CL+P4-F4668 WRKKY Silikonschlauch Silicon tube 4 

CL+P3-86685 96G75 Silikonschlauch Silicon tube 1 

CL+P4-86757 92753 Lagerbuchse (Kö.Welle) Sleeve 2 

CL+P4-E5404 TFJTA Lagerbuchse Antriebswelle Sleeve 2 

CL+P4-E5403 Q6VSA Lagerbuchse Sleeve 22 

CM+7M200RA01C TON26 Feder Spring 10 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-3

Maintenance 



Papierprozessor (Fortsetz.) Paper processor (cont.) 

CL+P4-86705 82NFU Feder Spring 2 

CL+P4-E5354 TCM8R Schenkelfeder mit Spirale Spring (coil) 4 

CL+P3-E5394 TFNWX Abquetschrolle Squeeze roller 4 

CL+P3-E6344 TJNCJ Abquetschrolle Squeeze roller 4 

CL+P3-96865 TGAWQ Abquetschrolle Squeeze roller 2 

CL+P3-F4078 V7J57 Abquetschrolle Trocknerrack Squeeze roller, dryer rack 1 

CL+P3-F4079 V7J6A Abquetschrolle Trocknerrack Squeeze roller, dryer rack 1 

CL+P4-86753 9XYDL Sicherungsring Stop ring 20 

CL+P4A-E9698 UAM7P Steckachse Support 2 

11.4.2 Kit for Maintenance – Every Second Year 

Order no.: 10+9.9999.1172.0 


Filmprozessor 

Film processor 

CL+P3-87159 83GNS Kettenzahnrad Sprocket gear 8 

Papierprozessor 

Paper processor 

CL+P4-E5403 Q6VSA Lagerbuchse Sleeve 10 

CL+P3-86595 9B9TM Zahnrad 50/60 Hz Anpassung Gear for 50/60Hz (motor) 1 

CL+P3-86685 96G75 Silikonschlauch Silicon tube 3 

CL+P3-86703 82NGW Kettenzahnrad Sprocket gear 6 

CL+P3-97018 UL2FD Rolle C Roller C 20 

CL+P3-97019 V5RRW Rolle M Roller M 8 

CL+P3-E5394 TFNWX Abquetschrolle Squeeze roller 4 

CL+P3-E6344 TJNCJ Abquetschrolle Squeeze roller 4 

11-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.5 Lubricants and Cleaning Agents 

Designation Order no. ABC Code Quantity 

Compressed air spray CM+9.9999.9274.0 8CANZ — 

Constant OY 220 CM+9.9999.9271.0 774KR 100 ml 

Lixtop plastic cleaner CM+9.9999.9231.0 WL9MK 1000 ml 

Klueberalfa HX83-302 CM+9.9999.9287.0 UW126 20 g 

Klueberplex BE 31-502 (for heavy-duty requirements) CM+9.9999.9280.0 Q3WQK 100g 

Bio PVC Cleaner CM+9.9999.9221.0 V7W91 5 liter 

Note: 

The structure of the maintenance schedule and the subsequent description allow 

systematic working: 

The order of the maintenance jobs corresponds to the functional blocks of the machine. 

All lubrications are done on the spot at the same time. 

CAUTION! 

The Film Processor dryer is made of a plastic compound that is particularly 

sensitive to lubricants. The chains in the FP dryer should therefore only be 


Never use any other grease that is recommended for other chains as otherwise the 

plastic will break! 

11.6 Special Tool 

Note: 

A meter is needed to check and adjust the toothed belt tension. 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-5

Maintenance 


11.7 Overview: Maintenance Jobs to be performed by the Service Engineer 

11.7.1 General machine 

Components 

General machine 

Maintenance jobs 

Clean inside compartments 

11.7.2 All Paper magazines 

Components 

Paper magazines 


Remove dust / deposits inside (vaccum cleaner) 

11.7.3 Paper magazine compartment left and right 

Components 

Paper magazine 

compartment 


Coupling: check and replace if necessary 

Check magazine locking 

11.7.4 Film Processor (FP) 

Components Maintenance jobs Lubricants 

Film loading units Blow out film loading unit 

and film magazines 

Check the gears and on the film magazine the counter-gears and 

the locking lever and replace them if necessary 

Main drive chain 

and motor gear 

Dryer 

Wet section 

Replenisher pumps 

Docking system 

Leader cutter 

Lubricate the main drive chain and 

the motor gear 

Blow out / clean dryer 

Clean dryer inlet rubber rollers, replace them if necessary 

Lubricate continuous chain and drive chain 

Clean squeegee unit 

Check wearing parts and replace them if necessary 

Clean racks and check their smooth movement 


Clean processing tanks, if necessary 

Check hoses, valves, circulation pumps; replace valves if required 

Check pumps and replace valves or bellows if required 

Clean drip tray 

Clean nozzle set (incl. bellows and opener) 

Check the locking mechanism of the docking door 

Blow out Leader cutter and the light sensors 

Clean rubber rollers 

Remove glue residue from the cutter blade 

Klueberalfa 

Klueberplex 

Klueberalfa 

11-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.7.5 Computer System (CS) 


Power supply units Clean the power supply units (vacuum cleaner) 

Fans 

Clean the two fans (IPU and MPU) 



Negative mask Check rollers and replace them if necessary 

support 

Cartridge Feeder Blow out mechanical parts and light sensors 

Negative masks Lubricate the clamp actuator and the holes in the bearing plate (if 

required) 

Klueberalfa 


Components Maintenance jobs Lubricants / cleaning 

agents 

Print engine Remove paper dust 

Clean transport belts and check their tension 

Lubricate the bearing points of the rocker, replace if necessary Klueberplex 

Cutter units 

Clean light sensors 

Clean cutter units with a vacuum cleaner 

Lane distributor 

Clean rollers, guide plates and cutters 

Remove paper dust 

Clean guide plates 

Clean rubber rollers (use Isopropanol sparingly if they are very dirty) 

Clean plastic rollers 

Lixtop plastic cleaner 

Check roller pressure springs and plastic bearings, replace them if 

necessary 

Lubricate bearing points Constant OY 220 

Check the tension of the toothed belt drive gears, adjust if 

necessary 

Clean coupling and counter-pressure plate 

Clean the paper rotation unit and 

check the tension of the toothed belt 

Back printer Clean the back printer head Isopropanol 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-7

Maintenance 




PP, in general Clean all gears and bearings Lixtop plastic cleaner 

Main drive chain Lubricate the main drive chain Klueberalfa 

Gear 50/60 Hz 

Wet section 

Check the gear and replace it if necessary (every second year) 

Check crossovers and replace the silicon tubes if required 

Check squeegee unit and replace the wearing parts if necessary 

Clean racks and check their smooth movement 


Processing tanks Clean processing tanks 

Rinse hoses 

Replace valves (if required) 

Check circulation pumps 

Water tank Clean water tank 

Check float sensors for smooth movement 

Replenisher pumps Check pumps and replace valves or bellows if necessary 

Poppet valve Check poppet valves (replenisher and water pumps), replace them if 

necessary 

Docking system Clean drip tray 

Clean nozzle sets (incl. bellows and opener), replace if necessary 

Check the locking mechanism of the docking door 

Dryer rack Clean gears, rollers, bearings and paper guide elements 

Check rollers, replace if necessary 

Lubricate the chain 

Densitometer Clean calibration plate 

Check mechanism of solenoids for smooth movement 

Check the position of the magnetic read head with respect to the 

calibration plate (parallelism) 

Sorter 

Clean the paper guide elements and the rollers 

Clean transport belt and print deposit 

Check toothed belt tension, adjust if necessary 

Klueberplex 

Biocleaner 

Klueberalfa 

11-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.7.9 End of the Maintenance Work (Machine ON) 


End of the 

maintenance work 

Check the circulations pumps (noice) and replace them, if required: 

– Film Processor (only d-lab.1 allrounder) 

– Paper Processor 

Calibrate the water pumps: 

– Film Processor (only d-lab.1 allrounder) 

– Paper Processor 

Check general machine function: 

– Process a film 

– Print 

– Eliminate ghost effects if necessary (script) 

Check correct condition of the safety appliances 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-9

Maintenance 


11.8 Overview: Maintenance Jobs to be performed by the Customer 

Assembly group 

Check parts on the basis of the list and clean or replace them in case of need 


Scanner 

Paper transport 


Clean processing racks 

Clean squeegee unit 

Replace chemical filters 

Check the quality of the chemistry: check film process 

Replace air filter in dryer 

Clean magnetic read head of APS negative mask 

Clean drive rollers in negative mask area 

Clean pressure rollers in negative mask area 

Clean film brushes (2 pcs.) 

Clean film brush for IX240 films 

Negative mask: remove dust 

Lens: remove dust 

Clean film takeup 

Clean film chuter 

Replace air filter in fan box 

Clean paper deck 

Lane distributor: remove paper dust / deposits 

Clean processing racks 

Clean paper guide, tank crossovers and squeegee unit in Paper Processor 

Replace chemical filters 

Check the quality of the chemistry: check paper process 

Replace air filters 

Clean dryer rack 

Clean densitometer calibration plate and guide plate in paper exit unit 

Paper exit: clean guide plate and transport belts 

Sorter: clean transport belts and print deposit 

11-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.9 General machine 

11.9.1 Cleaning the inside compartments 

Remove the covers 

Blow out the inside compartments including 

the air hoses 

Clean the air intake area of the cooling fans 

(grids, fan paddles) 

11.10 Cleaning the Paper Magazines inside 

Clean the paper magazines inside: 

Remove the paper roll in the dark room 

Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust 

and deposits 

Put the paper rolls back into their 

magazines 

3002_111 

11.11 Checking the Paper Magazine Compartments 

Check the drive couplings (1) for the paper 

magazines (visual check) and replace if 

necessary 

Check the magazine locking (2): 

The actuating roller must not be askew 

3002_013 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-11

Maintenance 


11.12 Film Processor (FP) (d-lab.1 allrounder) 

11.12.1 FP: Cleaning and checking the film loading units and the film magazines 

Blow out the film loading units 

Check the gears and on the film magazine 

the counter-gears and the locking lever and 

replace them if necessary 

11.12.2 FP: Lubricating the main drive chain and the motor gear, cleaning and lubricating the dryer 

CAUTION! 

The Film Processor dryer is made of a 

plastic compound that is particularly 

sensitive to lubricants. The chains (1), (2) 

and (3) should therefore only be 


Never use any other grease as otherwise 

the plastic will break! 

3002_015 

Lubricate the continuous chain (1) and the 

drive chain (2) with Klueberalfa 

Lubricate the main drive chain (3) with 

Klueberalfa: 

Use the crank handle to move the chain 

After lubricating the chain remove 

excess lubricant with a cloth 



Blow out / clean the whole dryer and the 

sensor 

Clean the dryer inlet rubber rollers, replace 

them if necessary 

11-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.12.3 FP: Squeegee unit, replace worn parts if required 


necessary: 

Roller (1 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P4A-87303 

ABC Code 9B3ST 

Stop ring, large (5 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P4-55751 

ABC Code W6YZY 

Roller (5 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P4A-87313 

ABC Code 9B44M 

Stop ring, small (15 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P4-61791 

ABC Code YVW6N 

3002_003 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-13

Maintenance 


11.12.4 FP: Cleaning the racks and replacing worn parts if required 


movement 

Check the gears, roller shafts, slide bearings 




necessary: 

Sprocket gear (2 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P3-87159 

ABC Code 83GNS 


Part no. 

CL+P4-49901 

ABC Code YOL9S 

Bevel gear (8 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P4-87162 

ABC Code 89ECE 

Bush, metal (8 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P4-87163 

ABC Code 83GHH 


Part no. 

CL+P4-49902 

ABC Code YOW3R 

3002_001 

Check the roller of the SB3 rack and replace 

it if necessary: 

Roller (1 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P4-87186 

ABC Code 9BVJF 

3002_002 

11-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

Check the inlet roller of the SB1 rack and 

replace it if necessary: 

Inlet roller (1 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P4-87190 

ABC Code 93VKH 

3002_130 

11.12.5 FP: Cleaning the processing tanks 

This task is necessary under the following conditions: 

Process is not OK and there are stains or deposits on developped films 

CAUTION! 

Ask the customer's permission! 

Drain the processing solutions 

Rinse the main tank and the temperature 

control tanks several times with water 

With a full main tank, switch on the machine 

for a short while to rinse the circulation 

pumps and the hoses 

Drain the water 

Check that the drain valves are closed 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-15

Maintenance 


11.12.6 FP: Servicing hoses, valves, circulation pumps 

Check the hose connections between tanks 

and circulation pumps, circulation pumps 

and drain cocks for traces of leakage 

Check the hoses for kinks and siphon 

formation 

Check the circulation pumps for tightness 

and tight seating 

If the circulation pump makes a noise while 

running, replace it: pump type MD6 

11.12.7 FP: Servicing the replenisher pumps 

Check the replenisher pumps (1) for leaks 

and replace the replenisher pump valves or 

the pump bellows if required 

3002_033 

11-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.12.8 FP: Servicing the Docking System 

11.12.8.1 Nozzle sets and Opener 


Take out the easy film boxes. 




thoroughly. 



hoses: 


To the replenisher tanks 

3002_085 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-17

Maintenance 



Unscrew: 





3002_148 





Note: 


3002_144 

3002_139 


Pipe (1) for CD A/B/C (3 x) 


Color red 



Pipe (2) for FX, SB (3 x) 


Color black 



O-ring for pipe FX, SB 



11-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 




3002_143 



position 

3002_146 


Remove the two drip trays (1) and clean 

them 

3002_131 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-19

Maintenance 


CAUTION! 




opener. 



3002_133 

3002_134 














Clean the docking station: 




CAUTION! 



cannot return to their home position after 

the docking sequence. 



11-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 






into place 


3002_142 

11.12.8.2 Locking mechanism of the docking door 

Check the locking mechanism of the 

docking door: 

The locking device (1) and the locking 

bolts (2) must move smoothly 

It should not be possible to open the 

door when it is locked 

3002_042 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-21

Maintenance 


11.12.9 FP: Cleaning and lubricating the Leader cutter 

CAUTION! 

Do not dismantle the Leader cutter. 

Otherwise it is no longer adjusted. 

3002_138 

Blow out the Leader cutter and the light 

sensors 

Clean the rubber rollers (1) 

Remove glue residues from the cutter blade 

with Isopropanol 

Reinstall the Leader cutter: 

Push it in to the limit (elongated holes) and 

secure it with the screws 

11-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.13 Computer System 

Remove the cover (1) 

Check the fans for dust: 

If the fan of the MPU is very dirty, disconnect 

the wiring and pull out the T-rack 

Clean the two fans (IPU and MPU) of the 

heat sinks on the main processors: 

First use a vacuum cleaner 

Then carefully remove any deposits. 

3002_128 

Clean the power supply units (1) of the 

computer system (vacuum cleaner) 

Switch the machine on to check the correct 

function of the fans: 

If the sound indicates that a fan runs untrue 

it has to be replaced. 

3002_141 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-23

Maintenance 


11.14 Scanner (SC) 

11.14.1 SC: Negative mask support, replacing worn parts if required 

CAUTION! 

Make sure that neither screws nor 

washers fall into the machine: Use a 

support. 

Observe the correct position of the 

washer! 


necessary: 

Pressure roller, top (2 x) 

Part no. CM+9.8506.5015.1 

ABC Code QZWX8 

Pressure roller, bottom (2 x) 

Part no. CM+9.8506.5024.1 

ABC Code QZWYB 

3002_005 

11.14.2 SC: Cleaning the Cartridge Feeder 

Remove the front cover of the computer 

system (CS) 

Remove the covers of the Cartridge Feeder 

CAUTION! 

Do not blow dust and fluffs into the 

negative mask area. 

Blow out the mechanical parts and the light 

sensors with a compressed air spray 

11-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.14.3 SC: Lubricating all negative masks (if required) 

Lubricate the clamp actuator and the holes 

in the bearing plate sparingly with 

Klueberalfa 

3002_041 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-25

Maintenance 


11.15 Paper Transport (PA) 

11.15.1 PA: Cleaning the Print Engine 


electronic) and fold it down 

Pull out the print engine 

Remove the paper dust with a brush or a 

vacuum cleaner 

Lubricate the bearing points of the rocker 

(Klueberplex) 

Transport belts of the exposure table: 

Clean with a damp cloth 

Inspect that the belt runs smoothly 

Clean the light sensors 

3003_031 

11.15.2 PA: Cleaning the cutter units 

Clean the cutter units with a vacuum cleaner 

Remove the top guide plate 

Take the cutter units completely out of the 

machine 

Blow out the cutter units 

Clean the rollers, the bottom guide plate and 

the cutter with a damp cloth 

11-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.15.3 PA: Servicing the Lane Distributor 

3002_026 

Pull out the lane distributor on the 

telescopic rails, lift it out and put it down 

Remove the paper dust with a vacuum 

cleaner: 

Lane distributor 

Lane distributor compartment in the 

machine 

Remove the guide plates and clean them 

with a damp cloth or Agfa Cleaner 

Clean all transport rollers: 

Clean all rubber rollers with a damp 

lintfree cloth, use Isopropanol if they 

are very dirty 

Clean the plastic rollers with Lixtop 

plastic cleaner 

Check the roller pressure springs and replace 

them if necessary 

Check the plastic bearings for wear and 

replace them if necessary 

Lubricate the bearing points a little with 

Constant OY 220 

Check the condition of the toothed belts and 

the tension of the toothed belt drive gears 

and adjust it if necessary 

Clean the coupling and the counter-pressure 

plate 

Service the paper rotation unit: 

Blow off the paper dust from the light 

sensors 

Clean the paper rotation unit and the 

counter-pressure plate for the back 

printer with a damp cloth 

11.15.4 PA: Cleaning the back printer head 

Clean the back printer print head with 

Isopropanol 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-27

Maintenance 


11.16 Paper Processor (PP) 

11.16.1 Paper Processor – Important note 

CAUTION! 

Please observe the Safety precautions about the handling of chemicals in 

chapter 1. 

Risk of injury if the wet section cover is unlocked by mistake (uncontrolled). 

 

Open the cover: 

It only locks in in vertical position and may 

fall down if it is unlocked by mistake. 

Close the cover: 

Before pushing the unlocking (PUSH HERE) 

support the cover with one hand and close it. 

3009_011 

11.16.2 PP: Cleaning the gears and bearings 

Clean all gears and bearings with Lixtop 

11-28 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.16.3 PP: Checking / replacing the gear for frequency adjustment (every second year) 

Replace a worn part: 




3002_009 

11.16.4 PP: Crossovers, replace worn parts if required 


necessary (observe the order of the CD roller 

parts): 

Silicon tube for CD (1 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P4-F4668 

ABC Code WRKKY 

Silicon tube for BX and SB1-3 (1 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P3-86685 

ABC Code 96G75 

3002_008 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-29

Maintenance 


11.16.5 Cleaning / servicing the squeegee unit 

Dismount the rubber rollers, check them for 

damages and replace them(observe the order 

and color of the gears): 


ABC Code TGAWQ 

Paper guide surfaces 

Roller pressure equal on both sides, axial 

backlash approx. 0,2 mm 

If necessary (noise) grease the bearings with 

Klueberplex 

3003_054 

11-30 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.16.6 PP: Racks, replace worn parts if required 


movement 

CAUTION! 

The upper rack rollers should only be 

rinsed. Cleaning them with a brush or in 

another mechanical way will lead to 

deposits on prints. In this case run expired 

paper in order to clean up (approx. 

20 prints) or replace the rollers. 

Check the gears, roller, shafts, slide bearings 




necessary: see Table 

3002_011 

No. Wearing part in the Kit Part no. ABC Code 

1 Sprocket gear 2 pcs. CL+P3-86703 82NGW 

Bevel gear 1 pcs. CL+P3-86701 9HDEL 

2 Gear 2 pcs. CL+P4-86748 9HDHR 

Stop ring 20 pcs. CL+P4-86753 9XYDL 

Inner pin 2 pcs. CL+P4-95549 1J2HW 

Gear 2 pcs. CL+P4-86656 9ELTK 

3 Spring (Coil) 2 pcs. CL+P4-E5354 — 

4 Pin 2 pcs. CL+P4-86665 9HDGP 

5 Support 2 pcs. CL+P4A-E9698 UAM7P 

Bevel gear 1 pcs. CL+P3-86740 82NOC 

6 Bevel gear 1 pcs. CL+P4-86738 82NQG 

7 Sleeve 2 pcs. CL+P4-86757 92753 

Sleeve 16 pcs. CL+P4-E5403 Q6VSA 

Squeeze roller 4 pcs. CL+P3-E6344 TJNCJ 

Squeeze roller 4 pcs. CL+P3-E5394 TFNWX 

8 Bevel gear 2 pcs. CL+P4-86702 9B5XD 

Shaft holder 2 pcs. CL+P4-39286 YDVL6 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-31

Maintenance 


11.16.7 PP: Cleaning the processing tanks 

This task is necessary under the following conditions: 

Process is not OK and there are stains or deposits on developped paper. 

CAUTION! 

Ask the customer's permission! 

Drain the processing solutions 

Rinse the main tank and the temperature 

control tanks several times with water 

With a full main tank, switch on the machine 

for a short while to rinse the circulation 

pumps and the hoses 

Drain the water 

Check the drain valves for tightness 

11.16.8 PP: Servicing hoses, valves, pumps 

Rinse the tank effluent hoses with hot water: 

approx. 1 l / 60 °C 

Check the hose connections between tanks 

and circulation pumps, circulation pumps 

and drain cocks for traces of leakage 

Check the hoses for kinks and siphon 

formation 

Check the circulation pumps for tightness 

and tight seating 

If the circulation pump makes a noise while 

running, replace it: pump type MD6 

11-32 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.16.9 PP: Cleaning the water tank 

Note: 

Depending on the water hardness, lime may deposit on the tank inside walls and the 

float sensors. These deposits may cause malfunctions of the float sensors, the water 

replenishment pumps and the water bellows pumps. 

If the water tank (two-part) is very dirty, 

clean it with diluted acetic acid (observe the 

the producer's instructions) and then rinse it 

thoroughly several times 

Check the float sensors (1) in the lid: 

They must move easily. 

3002_027 

11.16.10 PP: Servicing the replenisher pumps 

Check the replenisher pumps (1) for leaks 

and replace the replenisher pump valves or 

the pump bellows if required 

3002_032 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-33

Maintenance 


11.16.10.1 PP: Replacing the poppet valves of the replenisher and water pumps if required 

Check the wearing part and replace it if 

necessary: 

Poppet valve (6 x) 

Part no. CL+P4-6110(2/1) 

ABC Code TOU8E 

3002_010 

11-34 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.16.11 PP: Cleaning the Docking System 


Take out the easy paper boxes. 




thoroughly. 



hoses: 


For the replenisher tanks 

3002_034 


Unscrew: 





3002_149 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-35

Maintenance 






Note: 


3002_145 

3002_140 


Pipe (1) for BX A/B (2 x) 


Color red 



Pipe (2) for CD, SB (2 x) 


Color black 



O-ring for pipe CD, SB 






3002_147 

11-36 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 



position 

3002_132 


Remove the drip tray (1) and clean it 

3002_136 

CAUTION! 




opener. 



3002_137 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-37

Maintenance 








3002_134 











CAUTION! 



cannot move back to their home position 

after the docking sequence. 








into place 


3002_135 

11-38 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.16.11.1 Locking mechanism of the docking door 

Check the locking mechanism of the 

docking door: 

The locking device (1) and the locking 

bolts (2) must move smoothly 

It should not be possible to open the 

door when it is locked 

3002_042 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-39

Maintenance 


11.16.12 PP: Cleaning the dryer rack 

Lift out the dryer rack and put it down 

Clean the gears, rollers and bearings as well 

as the paper guide elements 

11.16.13 PP: Dryer rack, replace worn parts if required, lubricate the chain 


necessary: 

Roller B (1) (2 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P3-97017 

ABC Code UL2GF 

Roller C (2) (2 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P3-97018 

ABC Code UL2FD 

Roller M (3) (2 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P3-97019 

ABC Code V5RRW 

Roller G (4) (1 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P3-F4078 

ABC Code V7J57 

Roller G2 (5) (1 x) 

Part no. 

CL+P3-F4079 

ABC Code V7J6A 

Check that the paper guide elements are 

correctly positioned and locked 

Lubricate the chain with Klueberalfa 

3002_012 

11-40 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

11.16.14 PP: Cleaning and checking the densitometer 

Clean the calibration plate (1) with a damp 

cloth (alcohol) 

Check: 

The pressure solenoid mechanism 

moves smoothly 

The measuring head must be parallel to 

the calibration plate 

3002_040 

11.16.15 PP: Cleaning the Sorter 

Cleaning agent: 

Cloth wetted in warm water 

Clean the paper guide elements and the 

rollers 

Clean the transport belt (1) and the print 

deposit (2) with a damp cloth 

Check the toothed belt tension of the drive 

and adjust it if necessary 

3003_041 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-41

Maintenance 


11.17 Switching on the machine 

11.17.1 FP/PP: Checking the circulation pumps (running noise) 

Replace the circulation pumps if they make 

a noise while running: Pump type MD6 

11.17.2 FP/PP: Calibrating the water pumps 

Calibrate the water pumps 

Film Processor (only d-lab.1 allrounder): 

Path Settings > Machine Setting > 

FP pumps 

Paper Processor: 

Path: Settings > Machine Setting > 

PP pumps 

If necessary, check / replace the poppet 

valves 

11.17.3 Functional check of the machine 

Process a film 

Print 

Eliminate ghost effects, if required, 

see 11.17.4 

Check correct condition of the safety 

appliances 

11.17.4 Eliminate ghost effects (if required) 

Run the scripts to compensate double image effects / ghost effects in prints: 

Image_to_ABD.txt 

Printcycle_GS.txt / Printcycle_Delay.txt 

Write_GS_to_EEPROM.txt / write_Delay_to_EEPROM.txt 

Note: 

Use 8 inch glossy paper for the test. 

Fault Description Reference Script 

Ghost up to 4 mm shifted double image see figure 1, next page Printcycle_GS.txt 

DelayCount up to 1 mm shifted double image see figure 2, next page Printcycle_Delay.txt 

none no ghost effect see figure 3, next page — 

11-42 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Maintenance 

Call up the Service functions 

Scripts for Service\General: 

Perform script Image_to_ABD.txt 

Select image GhostTest.bmp or 

DelayCountTest.bmp depending on the 

distance of the shifted image 

Select magnification 1 

figure 1: ghost 

figure 2: delay count 


Depending on the drift of the shift perform 

script Printcycle_GS.txt (5 prints) or script 

Printcycle_Delay.txt (8 prints) 

FN Number of Exposure is a 5-digit number 

on the front of the exposure unit 

Select the testprints of Printcycle_GS.txt or 

Printcycle_Delay.txt: 

Note down the GS Parameter: xx or 

delay=xxx number of the back print on the 

print on which the ghost effect is not visible. 

If the ghost effect is not visible on several 

prints, take the print in the middle of this 

series. 


Perform script 

Write_GS_to_EEPROM.txt or 

Write_Delay_to_EEPROM.txt 

Enter the number of the 

GS Parameter: xx or the number of the 

delay=xxx of the print without the ghost 

effect under Optimal delay value 

Exit the Service functions 

figure 3: no ghost effect 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 11-43

Maintenance 


■ 

11-44 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Index 

12 Index 

! 

! Important note, Paper Processor........................................11-28 

A 

AC Supply.................................................................................. 5-6, 5-8 

Actuators 

Auxiliary drive ...........................................................................9-21 

Back Printer ...............................................................................9-27 

Docking Film Processor.........................................................7-18 

Docking Paper Processor ...................................................10-17 

Film Processor............................................................................. 7-2 

Lane Distributor........................................................................9-24 

Leader Cutter.............................................................................7-13 

Loading Unit ..............................................................................7-12 

Paper Advance ............................................................................ 9-7 

Paper magazine drives...........................................................9-15 

Scanner.......................................................................................... 8-2 

Shutter .........................................................................................9-30 

Transport Unit............................................................................9-17 

Actuators List 

Film Processor............................................................................. 7-4 

Paper Processor........................................................................10-4 

Printer ............................................................................................ 9-8 

Adjustment 

Back Printer ...............................................................................9-28 

Frequency Film Processor.....................................................7-10 

Frequency Paper Processor ...............................................10-10 

Paper transport / cut length................................................9-20 

Auxiliary Paper Drive....................................................................9-21 

B 

Back Printer.....................................................................................9-27 

Adjustment.................................................................................9-28 

Bios Settings 

IPU.................................................................................................6-31 

MPU ..............................................................................................6-16 

Boot OS for advanced tests .......................................................6-72 

C 

Card Reader .....................................................................................6-14 

Installation.................................................................................6-79 

CE Symbol.......................................................................................... 1-4 

Certificates......................................................................................... 6-4 

Chemicals, safety instructions..................................................1-14 

Cleaning agents.............................................................................11-5 

Clickrate............................................................................................3-65 

Computer System............................................................................ 6-1 

Checking tools..........................................................................6-48 

Components................................................................................. 6-2 

Connection diagram ...............................................................6-46 

Dismounting..............................................................................6-78 

Interfaces / connections......................................................... 6-9 

ON / OFF....................................................................................... 6-8 

Power distribution and power supply of the 

components............................................................................ 6-2 

C 

(Computer System) 

Reset............................................................................................... 6-8 

Room conditions ........................................................................ 6-2 

Serial interfaces........................................................................6-11 

Startup timing chart................................................................6-47 

Troubleshooting........................................................................6-36 

COMTool...........................................................................................6-48 

Conformity, declaration................................................................. 1-2 

Connection diagrams 

PA and PP ...................................................................................5-15 

Pilot voltages ............................................................................5-14 

PS1 to PS3..................................................................................5-10 

SC, PE and Densitometer ......................................................5-17 

Correction of ghost effects in prints...........................4-2, 11-42 

CPU PCBs 

DIP switches ..............................................................................5-25 

LEDs ..............................................................................................5-25 

Replacing PCBs / Firmware download ............................5-26 

Custom Errors 

Exposure Controller (EC)........................................................3-56 

Film Prozessor (FP) ..................................................................3-56 

IP / IPP ........................................................................................3-58 

Overview .....................................................................................3-12 

Paper Advance (PA).................................................................3-57 

Paper Prozessor (PP)...............................................................3-57 

Scanner (SC)...............................................................................3-56 

Software ......................................................................................3-60 

Timer.............................................................................................3-61 

D 

DC Supply........................................................................................... 5-6 

Declaration of Conformity............................................................ 1-2 

Densitometer ...............................................................................10-34 

7-Segment display ...............................................................10-37 

Measuring characteristics..................................................10-35 

Description of DFT Codes ...........................................................6-67 

Diagnosis............................................................................................ 4-1 

DIP Switches of the CPU PCBs.................................................5-25 

d-lab.1 family.................................................................................... 2-1 

d-lab.1 Main Software, first installation.................................. 3-4 

Docking Film Processor...............................................................7-17 

Timing ..........................................................................................7-19 

Docking Paper Processor.........................................................10-16 

Flow charts..............................................................................10-20 

Timing .......................................................................................10-25 

Documentation................................................................................. 1-1 

Double image effects in prints.....................................4-2, 11-42 

Drive Module...................................................................................6-13 

Driver Sensor Board (DS, SF_GS01) .......................................... 8-9 

Drives......................................................................... 6-12, 6-28, 6-50 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 12-1

Index 


E 

Earth leakage circuit breaker ....................................................10-9 

Error Messages 

Film Processor (FP) ..................................................................3-13 

Overview......................................................................................3-12 

Paper Advance (PA) .................................................................3-42 

Paper Processor (PP)...............................................................3-45 

Print Engine (PE), Exposure Controller (EC) ....................3-37 

Scanner (SC)...............................................................................3-24 

Timer (TI) .....................................................................................3-55 

Ethernet card 

IPU.................................................................................................6-29 

MPU ..............................................................................................6-12 

Exposure table 55A-0102 ...........................................................9-22 

Exposure Unit..................................................................................9-22 

Actuators and sensors ..............................................................9-3 

Shortcuts.......................................................................................9-3 

F 


Actuators and sensors ..............................................................7-2 

Assembly groups ........................................................................7-1 

Components.................................................................................7-9 

Gear 50/60 Hz ..........................................................................7-10 

Loading Unit...............................................................................7-11 

Main drive.....................................................................................7-9 

Maintenance...........................................................................11-12 

MC Data.......................................................................................4-54 

Shortcuts..............................................................................7-1, 7-3 

Film Processor Power Supply.......................................... 5-1, 5-20 

Command....................................................................................5-22 

Components...............................................................................5-21 

Connections...............................................................................5-21 

Flash IPU...........................................................................................6-54 

Flash MPU ........................................................................................6-53 

FP MC Data List..............................................................................4-54 

Fuses......................................................................................... 5-8, 5-22 

Fuses on 

90A-FUS.........................................................................................5-8 

90A-LPS ............................................................................. 5-8, 5-12 

90P-SSR.......................................................................................5-22 

AC Main Power Supply.............................................................5-8 

G 

Ghost effects in prints......................................................4-2, 11-42 

Graphic card.........................................................................6-12, 6-29 

H 

HGST DFT Drive Fitness Test......................................................6-55 

HGST Drive Feature Tool .............................................................6-68 

I 

Image Processor System (IPU)............................................see IPU 

Installation 

Card Reader................................................................................6-79 

Safety instructions.....................................................................1-8 

Software / Operating system ................................................3-3 

I 

IPU 

Bios settings ............................................................................. 6-31 

Connections .............................................................................. 6-24 

Does not start........................................................................... 6-36 

Drives........................................................................................... 6-28 

Ethernet card ............................................................................ 6-29 

Functional description........................................................... 6-23 

Mainboard.................................................................................. 6-30 

Manual start.............................................................................. 6-45 

Possible failures during IPU startup or operation ....... 6-41 

Signal diagram......................................................................... 6-23 

J 

Jumper............................................................................................10-36 

L 

Labels, warning / information ......................................1-11, 1-12 

LAN Test .......................................................................................... 6-51 

Lane Distributor............................................................................. 9-24 

Lane Shifter...................................................................................10-49 

Leader Cutter.................................................................................. 7-13 

LEDs 

CPU PCBs................................................................................... 5-25 

Exposure unit............................................................................ 9-22 

Legal situation..................................................................................1-7 

Liability, exclusion...........................................................................1-6 

Loading Unit 

Actuators .................................................................................... 7-12 

Sensors........................................................................................ 7-11 

Log levels......................................................................................... 4-30 

Saving.......................................................................................... 4-31 

Setting......................................................................................... 4-30 

Log views......................................................................................... 4-30 

Logbook............................................................................................ 4-40 

Filters........................................................................................... 4-42 

Lubricants........................................................................................ 11-5 

LVDS card ........................................................................................ 6-29 

M 

Machine 

Components.................................................................................2-7 

Main components......................................................................2-5 

Parts................................................................................................2-8 

Warnings and information labels...................................... 1-11 

Main Power Supply................................................................5-1, 5-4 

Components.................................................................................5-6 

Connections .................................................................................5-7 

Main Processor Unit (MPU)...............................................see MPU 

Main switch .................................................................................... 10-9 

Maintenance................................................................................... 11-1 

Computer System (CS) ........................................................11-23 

Film Processor (FP) ...............................................................11-12 

General machine...................................................................11-11 

Machine ON ............................................................................11-42 

Paper Prozessor PP...............................................................11-28 

Paper Transport (PA).............................................................11-26 

Scanner (SC)............................................................................11-24 

12-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto


Index 

M 


Customer, overview .............................................................11-10 

Technician, overview..............................................................11-6 

Maintenance Kit 

Every second year....................................................................11-4 

Yearly ...........................................................................................11-3 

Manufacturer information ............................................................ 1-6 

Maxtor Power Max Drivetest.....................................................6-71 

MC Data 

Film Processor...........................................................................4-54 

General ........................................................................................4-53 

Modify and save .......................................................................4-53 

Paper Advance ..........................................................................4-57 

Paper Processor........................................................................4-59 

Media Reader...........................................................see Card Reader 

Memorytest .....................................................................................6-71 

Messages............................ see Custom Info, see Custom Errors 

Messages in the status bar (table)..........................................4-34 

MPU 

Bios Settings..............................................................................6-16 

Connections................................................................................. 6-9 

Drive .............................................................................................6-12 

Ethernet cards...........................................................................6-12 

Functional description ............................................................. 6-5 

Mainboard...................................................................................6-14 

Manual start...............................................................................6-45 

Signal diagram............................................................................ 6-6 

Signal table.................................................................................. 6-7 

Multi Slot Card Reader, installation.....................................6-50 

N 

Netsupport Manager ....................................................................4-24 

Network settings ............................................................................. 6-3 

O 

Operating System..............................................................6-16, 6-31 

Installation................................................................................... 3-3 

Operating System MPU 

Installation................................................................................... 3-2 

Update............................................................................................ 3-9 

Operation, safety instructions..................................................... 1-9 

P 

PA MC Data List.............................................................................4-57 

Paper Advance 

Components...............................................................................9-15 

MC Data ......................................................................................4-57 

Sequence (flow charts)...........................................................9-12 

Paper exit ......................................................................................10-31 

Paper magazine compartment, check................................11-11 

Paper magazine drives ................................................................9-15 

Paper magazines, cleaning.....................................................11-11 


! Important note !..................................................................11-28 

Actuators and Sensors............................................................10-2 

Assembly groups......................................................................10-1 

Components...............................................................................10-9 

Docking ....................................................................................10-16 

P 

(Paper Processor) 

Dryer ..........................................................................................10-30 

Gear 50/60 Hz.......................................................................10-10 

Main drive...................................................................................10-9 

Maintenance...........................................................................11-28 

MC Data.......................................................................................4-59 

Shortcuts.........................................................................10-1, 10-3 

Switches......................................................................................10-9 

Passwords.........................................................................................4-22 

PCB 

90A-CPU, LEDs and DIP switches ......................................5-25 

90A-FUS......................................................................................... 5-8 

90A-LPS..............................................................................5-8, 5-12 

90A-TIM, LEDs and DIP switches .......................................5-25 

90F-CPU, LEDs and DIP switches.......................................5-25 

90P-CPU, LEDs and DIP switches ......................................5-25 

90P-SSR.......................................................................................5-22 

PCBs 

Function.......................................................................................5-23 

PP, PA, FP – Overview............................................................5-24 

PCI Netsupport Configuration...................................................4-24 

Power ON Sequence....................................................................... 5-2 

Power Supply Units................................. see Main Power Supply 

...............................................and Film Processor Power Supply 

Adjustment.................................................................................5-13 

Command ..................................................................................... 5-9 

PP MC Data List .............................................................................4-59 

Print Engine 

Exchange....................................................................................... 9-4 

Shortcuts....................................................................................... 9-2 

Printer 

Assembly groups........................................................................ 9-1 

Shortcuts....................................................................................... 9-1 

Product Security............................................................................... 6-4 

Production statistics.....................................................................3-65 

PuTTY .................................................................................................6-52 

R 

Registry entries ................................................................................ 6-3 

Remote Diagnosis .........................................................................4-23 


Explanation................................................................................... 1-1 

Guideline for the technician.................................................. 1-2 

Safety instructions...................................................................1-10 

Representation means 

Safety instructions..................................................................... 1-3 

Text styles and symbols .......................................................... 1-3 

S 

Safety 

Devices .......................................................................................... 1-8 

Instructions .................................................................................. 1-7 

Instructions, chemicals..........................................................1-14 

Prescriptions..............................................................................11-1 

Save customer settings and data base.................................... 3-1 

Scanner 

Assembly groups........................................................................ 8-1 

Functional description ............................................................. 8-7 

Motherboard ..............................................................................8-10 

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 12-3

Index 


S 

Script Folder, overview ..................................................................4-1 

Scripts 

Exposure Controller...................................................................4-2 

Film Processor.............................................................................4-4 

General...........................................................................................4-6 

Initialization.................................................................................4-7 

Paper Advance (Paper Drive)..................................................4-8 

Paper Processor ........................................................................4-12 

Scanner........................................................................................4-15 

Setup.............................................................................................4-20 

Sensors 

Auxiliary drive............................................................................9-21 

Back Printer................................................................................9-27 

Docking Film Processor.........................................................7-18 

Docking Paper Processor ...................................................10-17 


Lane Distributor ........................................................................9-24 

Leader Cutter.............................................................................7-13 

Paper Advance ............................................................................9-7 

Paper magazine drives...........................................................9-16 

Scanner..........................................................................................8-2 

Transport Unit............................................................................9-17 

Sensors List 


Paper Processor ........................................................................10-4 

Printer.............................................................................................9-8 

Service.................................................................................................4-1 

Safety instructions...................................................................1-10 

Service Engineers ..........................................................................11-2 

Shutdown..........................................................................................4-51 

Shutter...............................................................................................9-30 

Signal diagram 

IPU.................................................................................................6-23 

MPU ................................................................................................6-6 

Software 

Clickrate (optional)..................................................................3-65 

Installation ...................................................................................3-3 

Structure (diagram)..................................................................4-47 

Versions.......................................................................................4-43 

Sorter SO........................................................................................10-50 

Special tools....................................................................................11-5 

Standards and rules ........................................................................1-4 

Start Watchdog...............................................................................4-24 

Startup sequence...........................................................................6-36 

Statistics ...........................................................................................3-65 

Switches, Paper Processor..........................................................10-9 

T 

Test prints......................................................................................10-36 

Data output .............................................................................10-38 

Timer card.............................................................................4-49, 6-25 

Tools 

ClickrateChecker.exe............................................................. 3-66 

ClickrateReport.mdb .............................................................. 3-66 

Special, for maintenance ..................................................... 11-5 

Touch Screen calibration ........................................................... 6-22 

Transport Unit ................................................................................ 9-17 

Transport, safety instructions......................................................1-8 

Troubleshooting 

6-Inch Sorter...........................................................................10-51 

8-Inch Sorter...........................................................................10-52 

Checking the main drive FP...................................................7-9 

Checking the main drive PP................................................ 10-9 

Computer system.................................................................... 6-36 

Docking FP................................................................................. 7-20 

Docking PP..............................................................................10-26 

Effluent tanks FP ..................................................................... 7-26 

Effluent tanks PP...................................................................10-14 

Exposure Unit............................................................................ 9-23 

Gear 50 / 60Hz FP.................................................................. 7-10 

Gear 50 / 60Hz PP ...............................................................10-10 

Lane Distributor ....................................................................... 9-26 

Processing racks FP................................................................ 7-15 

Processing racks PP .............................................................10-11 

Rack drive / torque limiter PP .........................................10-12 

Replacing the main drive motor FP.....................................7-9 

Replacing the main drive motor PP...............................10-10 

Replenisher tanks FP ............................................................. 7-25 

Replenisher tanks PP...........................................................10-13 

Transport Unit / Sheet Gear................................................ 9-18 

U 

Use 

Appropriate...................................................................................1-5 

Inappropriate ...............................................................................1-5 

Purpose..........................................................................................1-5 

V 

Versions, d-lab.1 family.................................................................2-1 

W 

Warranty..............................................................................................1-6 

Watchdog ........................................................................................ 4-32 

Extended interface.................................................................. 4-37 

Operator controls .................................................................... 4-38 

Registration codes.................................................................. 4-44 

Standard interface................................................................... 4-36 

Water replenishment tank ......................................................10-15 

■ 

12-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03002_05 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family Repair - Saal Digital Fotoservice GmbH

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?